Standard Safety Practices Manual

Standard Safety Practices ManualBP Canada Energy Company December, 2007 version 1.1 This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer to the gHSSEr Website http://gasiso14001.bpweb.bp.com/index.asp Document Owners: gHSSEr Forum C-7037 XGS Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Standard Safety Practices Manual BP Canada Energy Company December, 2007 version 1.1 This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer to the gHSSEr Website http://gasiso14001.bpweb.bp.com/index.asp Document Owners: gHSSEr Forum C-7037 XGS i Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. BP CANADA GAS PERFORMANCE UNIT SAFETY PRACTICES MANUAL Accident prevention and efficient operations go hand in hand; therefore, incorporating safe work practices in our day-to-day operation is essential to minimize accidents, injuries and job interruptions. This manual provides safe guidelines for all employees to use in addressing the potential risks associated with each task when developing safe work methods. Guidelines specified are in accordance with governing regulations, standards, BP Canada requirements, and recommended good working practices. It will be necessary to incorporate these practices into the specific situations that will arise in each operation. The manual covers many, but by no means all, of the jobs and situations encountered in our operations. Should situations arise which are not adequately covered in the manual, please bring it to the attention of your immediate supervisor. The definition of a BP representative in this manual is taken to include employees, contractors, consultants, and service representatives who have the authority and are duly qualified to direct work on a the behalf of BP. A BP designate is an individual who has authority to direct a defined scope of work specified by the BP Representative. Safety is everyone’s responsibility. WORKSITES The following must be available at all BP Canada worksites: • Standard Safety Practices Manual • Standard Environmental Practices Manual • Local Emergency Response Plan • Material Safety Data Sheets • Site-Specific Procedures 2 ii ii Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. DEVIATIONS The Standard Safety Practices Manual is to be used as a living and working document, and as such must include provisions to handle warranted deviations. The Manual contains practices in accordance with governing regulations, standards, BP Canada Gas Performance Unit requirements and recommended or good working practices. Government Regulations and BP Canada Gas Performance Unit requirements are distinguishable throughout the document by the use of the words Shall, Will and Must, etc. Recommended or good working practices are recognized by the use of the words Should, May and Could, etc. The following outlines how to handle deviations in our day-to-day operations to ensure the safe work methods are practiced. DEVIATIONS FROM: A. Recommended or Good Working Practices (Should, May, Could) Authorized by Local Management (i.e. minimum, employee-in-charge + supervisor) Government Regulations or BP Canada Requirements (Shall, Will, Must) A uthorized by Safety Department (Performance Unit) and the applicable Government Agencies. B. Frequent deviations in either case should be submitted to the gHSSEr Forum for review and adoption if warranted. Procedures for submitting a suggested revision are outlined in the subsequent pages. Note: When government regulations call for additional requirements in excess of BP Canada SSPM, the government regulation will be followed. iii i3 ii Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. REVISION PROCEDURE To suggest a Revision The Standard Safety Practices Manual is intended to be a “living” document, and suggestions for revisions by operating personnel will be welcomed. To initiate a revision, please follow these procedures: 1. 2. F orward request to the HSSE Advisor responsible for your Department/Area. H SSE Advisor to forward to gHSSEr Forum as warranted. The gHSSEr Forum will convene periodically to review all suggested revisions. Standard Safety Practices Manual iv i4 v Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Standard Safety Practices Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Standards and Safe Work Practices Index Golden Rules of safety CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRACTICE ENERGY ISOLATION PRACTICE (Lock Out - Tag Out) 16 37 43 64 87 112 136 147 147 GROUND DISTURBANCE PRACTICE LIFTING AND RIGGING PRACTICE MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PRACTICE PERMIT TO WORK AND HAZARD ASSESSMENT PRACTICE SAFETY PRACTICE VEHICLE STANDARD AND ROAD WORKING AT HEIGHTS PRACTICE Safe Work Standards/Practices ASBESTOS ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING 1 CANADIAN NUCLEAR SAFETY COMMISSION (CNSC) REGULATED ISOTOPES 151 DRAINING AND DEPRESSURING ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL STORMS TEMPORARY BY-PASS 153 154 161 162 167 170 182 183 184 185 EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN SYSTEMS, EYEWASH STATIONS & DELUGE SHOWERS 163 FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT FIRE RESISTANT WORKWEAR PRACTICE FIRST AID EQUIPMENT AND MEDIC GAS AND LIQUID SAMPLING GUARDS HAND PROTECTION PRACTICE 5 v Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. GUIDELINES FOR FIELD VISITS HOUSEKEEPING HOT AND ODD BOLTING PRACTICE HYDRATES, IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL 191 193 195 211 213 216 HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) SAFETY INCIDENT/ACCIDENT REPORTING LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDING – PORTABLE 217 LADDERS, STAIRS AND PLATFORMS - FIXED 220 LINE THAWING PRACTICE HEAVY OR AWKWARD LOADS METER PROVING MOBILE STEAMERS ON BP WORKSITES CONSERVATION JEWERLY 225 229 232 234 236 239 242 245 248 249 251 262 264 267 MANUAL LIFTING AND HANDLING MOVING HEAVY EQUIPMENT NOISE EXPOSURE & HEARING PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PIGGING OF PIPELINES AND FLOWLINES POSITIVE AIR SHUT-OFF REQUIREMENTS (PASO) PRACTICE FOR WORKING IN A COMBUSTIBLE GAS ENVIRONMENT PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES PURGING PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING RADIOACTIVE OR NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (NORM) 269 RAIL CAR LOADING RESPIRATORY PROTECTION HSSE MEETINGS 273 275 280 vi 6 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. SAFETY STANDBY SECURITY 283 286 288 291 297 SAND BLASTING / ABRASIVE BLASTING SERVICE RIG SAFETY SIGNS AND BARRICADES STRESS RELIEVING SWABBING TANK GAUGING TOOLS TRAINING WELDING PRACTICES – GENERAL WELL SERVICING WORK PLAN WELL TESTING WIRELINE OPERATIONS TANK TRUCK LOADING /UNLOADING SIMULTANEOUS OPERATING PROCEDURE 298 306 307 310 311 315 316 319 324 327 331 333 334 WELL WORK - HAND OVER BETWEEN OPERATIONS AND WELLS TEAMS WORKING ALONE PRACTICE vii . xsl/307.asp I nternal and External HSSE Links http://canadahsse.bpweb.asp O ntario Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations http://www. bpweb.bpweb.com/index.asp C odes of Practice http://gasiso14001.on.ca/cps/rde/ xchg/hre/hs.e-laws.ca Golden Rules of Safety/Practices (gHSSEr Docu ments) http://gasiso14001.worksafebc.bp. bp. bp.com/index.bpweb.bp.alberta.html L egal and Other Matrix http://gasiso14001.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. REFERENCES • A lberta Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations http://employment.gov. bpweb.com/EMS/Legal%20Requirements/ P rocess Safety Management http://psmcanada.bp.com/home/links.html B ritish Columbia Occupational Health and Safety Regulations http://www2.com • • • • • • • viii .com/Publications/OHSRegulation/Search. or rescue of. sumps. heaters. and other visiting personnel doing work on CGPU premises and sites. due to its design. hoppers. contractors.0 1. is or may become hazardous to a worker entering it. mud pits and cement and chemical storage tanks. Examples: 2.2 1. silos.1 Confined Space: 1.1 Tanks. sewers. Scope of Definitions 2. scale pits. or does not have an easy means of escape for. vessel skirts. Th e purpose of this practice is to ensure that all reasonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety of personnel who are or may be required to work in confined spaces. and communications are done prior to and during work in confined spaces. bins. atmosphere. the materials or substances in it. a worker entering it. having restricted access or egress and which. or other conditions. tank cars. contracted employees. ventilation or exhaust ducts.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.1 Scope and Applicability This practice applies to BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees. vessels. towers. construction.0 A confined space means an enclosed or partially enclosed space that is not primarily designed or intended for human occupancy. aerial coolers. underground utility tunnels or pipes. location. This practice provides guidelines for the development of site specific procedures to prevent injury to personnel by ensuring that an assessment of all known hazards. CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRACTICE 1.1. 1 Confined Space Entry .3 2. pre-job planning. except for the purposes of performing work. 2. because of restricted access and egress must be considered as confined space.1. Confined Space Entry 2. 2. compressor fan housings and hoardings. 2. for example if there is limited access or egress or the quality of the atmosphere cannot be guaranteed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.4 ower or vessel skirts. utility doors.1.3 diked area could be considered a confined A space if it is more than 1.1. such as pipe racks. 2 . false ceilings.5m deep and the atmosphere cannot be guaranteed.2 An excavation is considered a confined space under certain circumstances. under trailers with T skirts.5 Others.1. A ll BP Canada Gas Performance Unit CGPU sites must: • Identify and document all confined spaces • abel all entry points. DETERMINATION OF CONFINED SPACE START Does the space now have or has it previously had contents that could be harmful? YES Is the space enclosed enough to NO contain a hazardous atmosphere or other physical h d? YES Is access/egress so restricted that NO emergency exit or rescue requires extra manpower or equipment? YES NOT A NO CONFINED SPACE THIS IS A CONFINED SPACE Class 1 – No Hazard Class 1I – Potential Hazard Class III – Hazard Exists A Confined Space in which there does not exist and is not likely to exist: A hazardous gas.3 3 Confined Space Entry . ALL REQUIREMENTS LISTED IN CLASS II PLUS THE FOLLOWING: Breathing Apparatus mandatory for all personnel entering 2.2 E ntry into a confined space is deemed to have occurred as soon as the plane of the entry point has been broken by a part of the body. vapour. vapour. dust or fumes An oxygen content less than 19. Class 2 & 3 Confined Spaces labeled “Confined Space – Permit Required” • dentify and control all hazards prior to entry I utilizing site specific procedures 2.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.5 % or more than 23% and which cannot be ventilated to Class 1 – No Hazard ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Class 1I – Potential Hazard ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Class III – Hazard Exists ENTRY REQUIMENTS Communication with back-up Atmospheric Testing (if applicable) All PPE identified and worn Rescue plan in place Rescue Equipment readily available Confined Space Permit Lockout/Tagout Procedure followed Isolation Procedure followed Continuous Atmospheric Testing mandatory Confined space purged & ventilated Rescue Plan in Place – Rescue Equipment set up. Class 1 Confined Spaces L labeled “Confined Space”. vapour.5 % or more than 23% by volume. ventilated and steps taken to provide and maintain a safe A Confined Space in which there now exists or is likely to exist: A hazardous gas. which has been purged.5 % or more than 23% and. A Confined Space in which there has existed or was likely to exist: A hazardous gas. dust or fumes An oxygen content less than 19. dust or fumes An oxygen content less than 19. Documents will identify and communicate to all workers the possible hazards of working in the confined space and what controls are in place to make the job safe to proceed • ll workers are trained in STOP-THINK-GO A and Time Out for Safety and understand their obligation to exercise these tools 3. e. Confined Space Entry 3. ventilation equipment • ll workers required to wear respiratory protecA tion are medically fit to wear the associated equipment and/or perform the required duties • Confined Space permit is issued laying out A the conditions upon which the work is to be performed and that this is communicated to all workers at the site • e confined space work location is properly Th prepared for the work to take place.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. supplied air. gas detection.2 4 . PPE. Th e on-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure that: • n emergency response plan is in place specific A to the work being performed • n adequate inventory of protective equipA ment is available at the work location. harnesses/lifelines.1 Scope of Responsibility E ach worker is responsible to recognize the hazards of a confined space and take corrective measures to work within those areas ensuring that site specific procedures and this practice are followed.g. area is ventilated and isolated from external piping/ equipment • dditional risk assessment beyond the scope of A the safe work permit is completed if deemed necessary based on the scope of the job (see Job Hazard Analysis form and Prejob Risk Assessment form).g.0 3. e. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. documented and A labeled in the area sites • orkers who are involved in confined space W work are adequately trained and competent 3. 3. R ensuring all other options have been ruled out • Assist in completing the rescue plan • nsuring that everyone involved in the confined E space understands the hazards involved in the job scope • aintaining the safe conditions on which the M permit is based • uspending the permit if the permit conditions S cannot be maintained • aking certain that the confined space is evacuM ated if the permit is suspended • nsuring a new work permit is issued at the start E of each shift • nsuring atmospheric testing and continuous E monitoring is done by qualified gas tester and ensuring he/she co-signs the permits • etailed vessel diagrams must be reviewed D during the pre-job risk assessment including the following items where applicable: entry/exit points.4 e immediate supervisor or designate overseeing Th the confined space work is responsible for: • eviewing the need for a confined space entry. and Nitrogen vent points • iling Confined Space Permit at the field site for F 13 months upon completion • nsuring all workers are adequately trained and E qualified for the job at hand • pproving the means of isolating the confined A space 5 Confined Space Entry . ventilation points.3 Th e Area Manager has ensured that: • ll confined spaces are defined. blinding points. The work site must be re-inspected and tested by the permit issuer before the job can be allowed to resume • nsuring the preparation and precautions are E acceptable. understood. before endorsing and accepting a Confined Space Permit • nsuring all safety equipment is in good working E condition • stablishing an escape plan agreed to by the E Supervisor or designate and Lead Worker • Defining appropriate tools to be used for the job • nsuring that any person entering the confined E space is aware of his/her responsibilities under this code. or change in. is qualified to use all the personal protective equipment required.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and is aware of 3. documented and communicated • nsuring information on the availability and E proper use of PPE is communicated • efining the maximum number of workers who D will be allowed access for the purpose of executing work within the confined space at any one time • nsuring that workers entering the confined E space are familiar with the layout of the confined space e person accepting the permit (Lead Worker in Th control of the work) is responsible for: • otifying Supervisor or designate in the event of N job delays or changing conditions. and agreed to. Confined Space Entry • pproving the means of ventilating the confined A space • nsuring tests and measurements are taken to E determine the presence of. the concentration of harmful substances or oxygen deficiencies • nsuring an emergency and rescue plan is in E place.5 6 . escape plan • enewing permits. This person is not part of the work crew.7 Definition of the Confined Space Safety Standby: • “safety standby” person is an employee or A designate used as an observer and back-up. obtaining new permit when R required and returning permit to issuer when permit expires or job is complete 3.6 e person(s) entering the confined space is responTh sible for: • nderstanding and following the conditions U detailed in the permit • eporting changing conditions to the Supervisor R or designate and confined space safety standby • eporting conditions and practices that will not R allow him or her to follow the conditions of the permit • sing appropriate tools for the job and ensuring U they are in good condition • Reporting defective or damaged tools • sing respiratory protection and other PPE U (personal protective equipment) properly (if breathing air is used. Safety standby personnel will be identified by some type of measure as identified in the pre-job risk assessment. a full body harness must be worn) • tool list must be checked off before and after A entry and exit of the confined space to ensure nothing is left behind 3. the conditions of the confined space entry. communications. and is only concerned with the safety of the workers.g. e. hazards.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 7 Confined Space Entry . whenever the above work applications are being carried out. Confined Space Entry 3. or confined space is evacuated.0 4.8 e Confined Space Safety Standby is responTh sible for: • Observing work task • Monitoring atmospheric conditions • nsuring ongoing communications with those is E confined space • xecution of emergency rescue plan and activaE tion of rescue team • aintaining entry log and tool log to ensure all M personnel and tools are accounted for • nsuring unsupervised entry points are flagged E off indicating “DO NOT ENTER” or made inaccessible by other means • nsuring that all workers involved in the task E have the proper training certification in place • ther duties as specified in the pre-job safety O meeting • or further guidance please check the safety F standby section of the SSPM NOTE: Safety Standby personnel can not leave their assigned post unless personal safety is jeopardized. • reparing Confined Space Entry Permits – preP entry training is required 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. F acilities are required to establish individual training requirements to meet the needs of the activity.2 8 . commensurate with the duties assigned in the confined space activity.1 Scope of Training and Qualification T raining is mandatory. that all personnel associated with the confined space entry are trained and competent. to ensure safety. 4. relieved by a competent person. 5.1. Mechanical means are the preferred method of cleaning.3 yrophoric and other products capable of P spontaneous combustion require special handling methods. using the most practical method. 5.2 If steam is used as a cleaning medium.5 NERTING - If an inert gas is used to protect I against an explosive or flammable atmosphere 9 Confined Space Entry . fluids and all spent cleaning materials S should be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and CGPU site specific waste handling procedures. 5.1 All confined spaces should be made clean prior to entry. Please refer to site-specific procedures and MSDS’s for handling these materials.0 5. and ensure the confined space is cooled to ambient temperature and adequate oxygen levels are present upon completion of cleaning.1 • onfined Space Entry Class 2 or 3 - pre-entry C training and Confined Space entry is required • afety Watch class 2 or 3 - pre-entry and ConS fined Space entry training is required • onfined Space Rescue – confined space rescue C training is required • Must have first aid training Scope of Pre-entry Procedures Pre Entry Cleaning 5.1. 5. according to the nature of the product and residue.1. and should be used prior to any personnel entering the confined space.4 ludge.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Workers may only enter a confined space to clean after all other reasonable means have been exhausted. cleaning contractors must ensure appropriate respiratory and other protective gear.1. 5.1. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. as well as the MAWP (maximum allowable working pressure) must be permanently marked on the handle in such a manner that the information is visible when the blind is installed. 5. If a full-rated ASME blind cannot be accomplished. Confined Space Entry the personal responsible for the confined space must: • ain approval from the Operating Centre ManG ager • otify BC WCB in writing 7 days prior to the N entry (BC applications) • nsure all requirements for working in an inert E atmosphere are followed Pre-Entry Isolation and Lockout 5.6 isconnecting or blanking shall be performed D 5.2. capped. “slip” or “pancake” blinds rated for full line operating pressure must be used.2. 5. or blind flanged.2 10 .1 lectrical equipment controlling or connected E in any way to the confined space or peripheral equipment shall be tagged and locked. as per BP Canada Energy Isolation practice gHSSEr MS 800.5 A blind list will accompany the site specific job procedure for the confined space being entered.2.4 linds that do not meet engineering practices B and have not been marked accordingly will not be used. 5.2. a safe process must be developed in close cooperation with site engineers. 5.2. The ASME size and rating.2 ines that could allow fluids to enter the conL fined space shall be disconnected.2.3 here connecting lines cannot be removed W and capped or blind flanged. as per gHSSEr MS 800 Energy Isolation (Lock out/Tag out) practice. 5. exchanger.9 Where monitoring is not continuous. It is acceptable to include a re-boiler.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2. continuous monitoring of high points is required.g. When gases lighter than air could be present.8 Atmospheric monitoring should be completed immediately prior to entry. confined spaces shall be re-tested after work breaks and shift changes before re-entry.2. 5.7 Rotating equipment (e. fan blades.2. pumps. continuous monitoring of low points is required • ORM: Naturally Occurring Radioactive MateN rials should be tested for. as part of the package for the Confined Space. etc. N minimize and protect against • enzene: Must be monitored prior to entry and B at frequent intervals. 5. Atmospheric monitoring must be completed within 20 minutes of entry. if known to exist in the stream • xcess or insufficient oxygen: a continuous oxyE gen monitor is required where the atmosphere cannot be guaranteed • oxic or otherwise hazardous vapors or gases T such as hydrogen sulfide must be continuously monitored to ensure conditions on the permit have not changed 5. When gases heavier than air could be present. providing that the entire system is tested in accordance with the following: • xplosive gases or vapors: continuous monitorE ing is required where the atmosphere cannot be guaranteed. 11 Confined Space Entry . agitators) must be immobilized and secured against accidental movement.. if known to exist in the stream • oise - All effort must be made to monitor. as close to the confined space as practical. 3.11 Respiratory protection must be worn while initial and re-entry atmospheric tests are being performed 5.2. Less than 10 ppm H2S • enzene >0.0 % oxygen (by volume) • Less than 10 % LEL. 5.1 eaters that are required to maintain a suitH able thermal environment inside the confined space shall be located outside the space with the hot air supply ducted into the space (see Manufacturer’s instructions for setup and venting). and the work inside generates no contaminates other than exhaled air 5. is occupied for less than 15 minutes.2 irect-fired heaters. If direct-fired heaters are used. which discharge exhaust D gases with the heated air. Confined Space Entry 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2. 5.3 Temporary Heating Devices 5.5% to 23. will not be used to heat confined spaces while they are occupied. personnel must confirm a safe working atmosphere prior to entry.10 Confined spaces shall be ventilated to ensure a known working atmosphere and to prevent accumulation of any other harmful substances: • 19.3.3.3 reassessment of the amount of ventilation A required must be made when heating confined 12 .8m3 (64ft3) per occupant.5 ppm (half mask) or >10 ppm B (breathing air) • Ventilation providing a minimum of 85m3/hr 50cfm) of clean respirable air is required for ( each person inside the confined space with exception given to a) when the atmosphere is continuously monitored and shown to contain respirable air b) the space has an internal volume greater than 1. 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2 Prior to any confined space entry the con trolled products that may be encountered in the confined space must be identified and the MSDS on these materials must read and understood.1 A rescue plan must be completed. 5. goggles. face shields. 5. or flammable materials at elevated temperatures. documented and a copy must be on site prior to a confined space entry.3 reathing apparatus is also required as standby B equipment outside the confined space. Any equipment required to implement the plan must be in place prior to the confined space entry. 5. Rescue plans will be kept on file at the facility. fire retardant clothing.5.5. to be used by personnel responding to emergency. 5. 5.4. New plans will be developed only where a suitable plan does not already exist.2 5. reviewed. respiratory apparatus. spaces that may release additional toxic.e. boots. explosive.4. safety harness and lifelines).4.1 ppropriate personal protective equipA ment must be worn for the particular job as required (i. 13 Confined Space Entry .4 Personal Protective Equipment 5. gloves.3 competent safety standby person must be in A attendance at the entrance during all phases of any confined space entry unless classified as a Class 1 confined space.5 Emergency Rescue 5. 8 14 . Confined Space Entry 5. 5.1 Consideration must be given to inclusion of static relief procedures where there is a potential of generating static electricity.7.7. shall be used in conjunction with a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFI).6 Communication 5.1 Preference should always be given to the use of pneumatic portable tools and explosion-proof lamps. This method must include at least two of the following: • Simple voice • Visual contact • Radio equipment • Alarm horn • Rope attached to worker 5.2 Some specific conditions that may lead to static are: 5. GFI’s are to be located outside confined spaces. 5.2 A system of communication must be established and maintained between the safety standby and the rescue personnel.7.7 Electrically Operated Equipment 5. which is used within A the confined space.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.6. 5.6. between the safety standby person and the person(s) in the confined space. Static Electricity 5.8.2 lectrical equipment must be tested for E ground continuity prior to use in a confined space.1 A system of communication must be established and maintained.8. 5.3 C electrical equipment. 6. all required safety checks have been completed and the area deemed safe as per the Confined Space Classification.9.2 7. signage (i.1 Scope of Forms gHSSEr MF 34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment gHSSEr MF 82001 Confined Space Entry Permit Scope of References A lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as amended B.2 7. nitrogen.1 6. air Th hoses discharging to atmosphere.1 All confined spaces must be made secure when left unattended.e.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. or vacuum hoses • The use of sandblasting equipment • The types of clothing worn Unsupervised Entry Points 5.4 15 Confined Space Entry . closures.0 7. 5.9 • e use of high-pressure steam.2 Barricades. Entry is prohibited until a new permit has been issued.C.3 7. Confined space - Entry by permit only) or other means of warning that the confined space must not be entered by unauthorized personnel are required at all unsupervised entry points. 5. Occupational Health and Safety Regulation and Guidelines 296/97 as amended g HSSEr MS 800- Energy Isolation (Lock Out-Tag Out) Practice) gHSSEr MS 840- Ground Disturbance Practice 7.0 6.9. Construction Foreman. Energy Isolation ENERGY ISOLATION PRACTICE (LOCK OUT – TAG OUT) 1.1 Scope and Applicability This practice will be used if the unexpected energization or startup of machinery or equipment or the unexpected release of energy could result in health.2 16 . E effective protection for employees Scope of Definitions F unctional Area Manager – Operating Center Manager or Wells Manager or HSSE Manager. This practice specifies minimum requirements for the control of hazardous energy. Th is practice applies to all BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees. provided it can be demonstrated that: • Continuous service is essential • Shutdown of the system is impractical • GPU accepted documented procedures are C followed • quipment is used that will provide proven. contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on CGPU premises and work sites. safety.1 2.0 1.4 2. 1. F unctional Team Lead – Area Foreman. Th is practice does not apply to hot tap operations performed on pressurized pipelines.0 2.2 1. contracted employees. environmental or equipment damage losses.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 1. Wellsite Leader. gravitational.8 2. chemical. 2. “ Personal Lock” means a lock for use by an affected worker to ensure personal lockout protection such that each lock when applied is operable only by a key in the worker’s possession.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. nuclear. or other energy source that could cause injury. “ Affected worker” is a person who works on equipment in which energy control procedures have been implemented.10 Lockbox” is the control point for the key securing “ system which physically prevents access to keys when locks are applied in a group lockout procedure. pneumatic.9 2.5 2. mechanical. This person can be the operator in charge. 2. “ Energy source” is any electrical. thermal.6 2. a construction foreman or a wells foreman or designate. “ Energy isolating device” is a mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy.11 dentification/Warning Tag” is a tag directing people I not to start or operate locked out equipment and 17 Energy Isolation 2. hydraulic.7 2. “ Lockout” means the use of a lock or locks to render the energy isolating device inoperable. 2.3 A rea Authority – the person who is on-site or associated with that site and is assigned single point accountability for that site. a maintenance worker. .4 “Authorized worker” is a person who applies the energy isolation procedure and is deemed competent by the functional team leader or designate. 0 Scope of Responsibilities 3. blinds etc. for the job at hand • ll workers are trained in STOP-THINK-GO A and Time Out for Safety and feel comfortable in being able to exercise these tools 18 .2 • n energy isolation system is implemented to A control the hazards at the worksite Th e functional team lead or designate is responsible for: • stablishing on site individual training programs E for authorized and affected workers that meet the site’s needs for required energy isolation activities • nsuring the authorized worker(s) are competent E to perform the energy isolation procedures • etermining the requirement for site specific D lockout procedures for equipment being worked on within their area • ere is an adequate inventory of protective Th equipment and energy isolation devices such as locks. Energy Isolation indicates the name the lock is assigned to.1 ach functional area manager is accountable for E ensuring that: 3. name and reason for lockout. the date of the lockout and reason for the lock out. 2.13 ermanent Lockout Isolations” is equipment.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. maP chinery or process that is indefinitely locked out from service.12 Warning Tag” is a numbered tag directing people not to start or operate locked out equipment and references people back to the energy isolation log for date. 2. 3. The identification/warning tag is attached to each authorized and affected workers’ personal lock. inspection and checking Th of the work site is completed prior to the work permit being issued • at the work area is inspected and checked after Th the job is completed Th e authorized worker is responsible for ensuring that all equipment and energy sources are properly isolated and locked and tagged with a personal lock prior to starting work. including the hazards of the energy sources to be controlled.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 3. Th e affected workers and authorized workers are responsible for ensuring no work is performed on the equipment until it has come to a complete stop and the affected worker(s) working on the equipment has a personal lock in place at each isolating device or at the group lock box when the group lockout procedure is being used. and the prohibitions regarding attempts to restart or re-energize locked out and tagged equipment • e equipment to be worked on has been Th properly isolated. locked out and tagged and is verified and documented safe to be worked on • mergency response plans are in place that E addresses unplanned exposure to energy sources from the equipment being worked on • at all required testing. • proper work permit is issued for the type A of work being undertaken and that everyone involved is aware of the hazards. the methods or means to control the energy. controls and emergency procedures • e authorized and affected workers are aware Th of the risks prior to starting work.5 19 Energy Isolation 3.4 3.3 Th e Area Authority in charge or designate is responsible for ensuring: . maintaining or cleaning cord-connected electrical equipment.3 A work permit is issued by the Area Authority in charge or designate to each trade or group of workers on the job. the energy source must be isolated with an energy isolating device and effectively controlled.5 20 . 4. can lock out the equipment by applying a lock to the electrical plug or render the equipment inoperative.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and posted as required. W hen energy isolating devices must be locked out the devices must be locked and tagged in the position that isolates the affected worker(s) from all hazardous energy when maintenance/servicing work is being performed.4 A work permit is not issued until a Pre-job Task Hazard Analysis is completed to evaluate risks for all deemed critical and non-routine jobs.1 Scope of Expectations I f the unexpected energization or start-up of equipment or the unexpected release of an energy source could cause injury. 4.0 Energy Isolation 4.2 4. W orkers servicing. for example changing grinding wheel or repairing a drill. An acceptable approach to rendering the equipment inoperative is for the worker doing the work to: • Disconnect the plug from its electrical supply • eep the plug in sight and within reach so that K no else can accidentally plug in the equipment • eep the plug under his or her exclusive and K 4. communicated to all personnel involved in the work. Each affected worker must install a personal lock to secure the isolating device in a safe position. 4. This approach cannot be used simply because it is more convenient than locking out equipment. For example.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. This is allowed only if it is required by the manufacturer or it is not reasonably practicable (in the case where there are no manufacturer specifications) to render the equipment inoperative.6 o complete maintenance. it may be necessary to work on equipment while it is energized. The authorized worker positions all the energy-isolating devices and applies lock out and tag to isolate the machinery or equipment from the energy source(s).7 ite specific procedures and controls must be S developed and implemented to ensure the work is performed to an equivalent level safely. Refer to Isolation Log gHSSEr MF 80001 A designated authorized worker will physically identify the required isolation points for isolating the equipment or machinery from the energy sources. 5. adjusting/tuning engines. 4. 4. troubleshoot problems T or perform adjustments.1 5. L ockout of the equipment will be done with a 5. pigging of pipelines or volt/amp checks on electrical equipment.3 21 Energy Isolation immediate control at all times while working on the equipment .0 Scope of Energy Isolation (Lock Out/Tag Out) General Requirements The Area Authority designates an authorized worker to turnoff or shut down machinery using the site specific procedures established for an orderly shutdown in order to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees.2 5. Energy Isolation lock and tag approved by the Area Authority or designated authorized worker(s).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The number of personal locks and tags on each energy isolating device equals the number of authorized and affected workers working on the equipment • For group lockout: o The authorized worker will lockout and attach a warning tag to each isolation device o e authorized worker and all affected workTh ers place their personal lock on a group lock box with an identification/warning tag with the installer’s printed name. date of installation and reason for installation attached to it o The number of locks on the lock box securing the master key to the lock box equals the number of authorized and affected workers working on the equipment. Each energy isolating device will have the master lock from the lock box secured to it 5. date of installation and reason for installation on each energy isolating device. The devices must be attached in a manner that will hold the energy isolating devices in a “safe” or “off” position. This is also logged on the Energy Isolation Log sheet. Areas may elect to use a group lockout where a number of workers are working on equipment or a large number of energy isolating devices must be locked out: • f a group lockout is not used each authorized I worker and all affected workers will place their personal lock with an identification/warning tag showing the installer’s printed name. 22 .4 L ockout devices must be affixed to each energy or isolating device by the worker authorized by the Area Authority. signature. signature. 11 At the beginning of each shift change.10 After ensuring that all personnel are clear. 5.5 Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device. Whenever locks. the equipment must be tested to verify that it is properly de-energized. Verification must be documented in the Energy Isolation Log. in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the equipment. details must be recorded in the Energy Isolation Log and be available on site for the duration of the lockout to record and track the status of the isolation. locked out and will not operate. or otherwise rendered safe. 5. 5. the Area Authority. If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level. . The reference number on the Energy Isolation Log must be recorded on the Permit to Work form completed for any work falling under the isolation. or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists. blinds and tags are installed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. restrained.6 If more than one group is working on the same item (including different maintenance crafts). authorized workers or affected workers 23 Energy Isolation 5. each trade or group will verify or test the isolation to confirm a state of zero energy.7 5. verification of isolation will be continued until the servicing or maintenance is completed. the tag must be located as closely and safely as possible to the device.9 5. disconnected.8 5. All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy must be relieved. O nly the affected worker who installed the lock may remove it with exception to emergency or if the worker is not available in which site specific procedures must be followed.1 24 . Contractors working on BP sites will apply their own personal locks identifiable with an attached tag.0 Specific Procedures – Color Identified Locks E ach affected worker must install a personal lock color-coded to their respective trade or group of workers prior to commencing work.0 Specific Procedures – Group Lockout (Lockboxes) Areas may elect to use a group lockout where a number of workers are working on equipment or a large number of energy isolating devices must be locked out.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.1 6.3 7. E ach trade will use a different color-coded lock and will use the colors as listed below: Construction: Electrical: Instrumentation: Mechanics: Operations: Permanent Lockout: Yellow B lue Red Orange Green Black 6. Energy Isolation will verify that all equipment is safe for work and has not been returned to service during their absence. 7.2 6. Such locks will be operated only by the keys of the individual workers affected by the isolation. Color-coding applies to BP personnel and FTE. 6. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 7. the authorized worker must ensure that it is safe to end the group lockout. Th e lockbox will contain as many keyed-alike locks as required for the energy isolation. W hen all affected workers’ personal locks are removed from the lockbox. • Locking out the energy isolating devices • ecuring the key(s) for the locks used for locking S out energy isolating devices in a lock box by affixing a personal lock on a multiple lock hasp to the lock box • ompleting. Site specific requirements will determine the size and number of lockboxes required.3 7. A fter each affected worker has completed their work they must remove their respective locks.4 7.6 7. When multiple lockboxes are used on a site each lockbox must have its own identifier corresponding to its respective locks. The personal lock of the authorized worker is the last lock to be removed from the lockbox. Verification must be documented in the Energy Isolation Log.2 An authorized worker competent in the isolation of equipment is responsible for: .5 7. signing and posting the Energy IsoC lation Log that identifies the equipment covered by the lock out Th e energy isolation must be verified by two authorized workers. E ach affected worker working on the locked out equipment must apply a personal lock to the lockbox referred to in subsection (7.7 25 Energy Isolation 7.2) before working on the equipment. Each lockbox must contain locks with a key unique only to the locks in the respective lockbox. 3 De-energize sources of energy: • tored electrical. disconnecting. pins.1 8. fluids and gases. a qualified person will use testing equipment to ensure that all circuits are dead Install/ lockout and tag energy isolation devices: • ockout energy isolation devices (e. hydraulic.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. pneumatic. For example. Isolate all sources of energy: • hut down electrical equipment using the selecS tor switch followed by the master disconnect • solate all inlet and outlet piping by closing block I valve(s) upstream and downstream. hydraulic. or use of double block and bleed • se blocks. inserting blinds. block L 8. or chains to secure potential U mechanical energy 8. use blocks. pneumatic and gasses S and fluids energy must be bled to obtain zero energy state • n cases where zero energy state cannot be I attained control measures must be developed to prevent uncontrolled release of energy. pins or chains that are rated to restrain the potential energy when equipment cannot be brought to zero potential energy state • hen working on or near exposed de-energized W electrical equipment.2 8. Identify system and isolation points to be isolated.0 Energy Isolation Energy Isolation Process The following steps identify the process in which the Energy Isolation Practice is to be applied: I dentify energy source(s) to be isolated – electrical. mechanical.4 26 .g. 8. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. electrical switches and breakers.1 Blinding/Blanking Guideline General: • ll blinding/blanking or disconnecting and plugA ging requires a safe work permit with a master list attached identifying the isolation method and listing the isolation devices and their location.6 9.5 • nstall blinds or disconnect piping as necessary I (lockout required when opening piping) • ffix identifier/ warning tags to each isolation A point • Record points in isolation log Verify isolation is complete: • orkers verify zero energy. mechanical devices) .0 9. 8. A pre-job meeting (accompanied by a Task Hazard Analysis) needs to be done with all involved 27 Energy Isolation valves. Ensure that the W switch or START button used to test the lockout is returned to its OFF or NEUTRAL position to prevent accidental start-up on re-energization • solation points are confirmed to be secure in I safe position • ersonal locks of affected workers control the P isolation Complete Isolation log: • All workers applying locks sign off isolation log • Workers verifying isolation sign off isolation log • Confirm all isolation points are recorded • solation log remains at site for duration of the I energy isolation procedure 8. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If S necessary. the block valves are to be locked and tagged in the closed position and the bleed valve locked and tagged in the open position. vessels and equipment • f these cannot be done. pipelines. The bleed valve venting safely to atmosphere • ingle valve isolation is not recommended. After depressuring. Valves (inlet and outlet) must be locked and closed and tagged before work begins Blinding and Blanking: o very blinding job will have a blind list that E was generated by referencing all the available P&ID’s for the system. These tags must be attached to the blind when the blind is installed. the recommended I alternative is double block and bleed. The system will also be physically inspected to make sure that all the blind locations that were identified on the P&ID’s will completely isolate the system. A record must be kept of the blinds that have been installed with their respective tag number. then verification must be made that the valve is holding before the work commences. If extra blinds are required they will be added to the blind list o All blinding jobs will use a tag system to track blind locations. Blind boards or multi-part blind tags may be used to 9. Energy Isolation personnel prior to starting work • athodic protection must be shut down and C flanges bonded prior to the installation of a blind or disconnecting of piping • linding/blanking or disconnecting and plugB ging is the preferred method of isolation for pipes. The work must be accompanied by a risk assessment and specific site procedure with approval by the Functional Team Leader in charge or designate.2 28 . Refer to gHSSEr MF 80001.3 10. the authorized worker must ensure that it is safe to end the group lockout. The personal lock of the authorized worker is the last lock to be removed from the lockbox. Scope of Restoring Service to Equipment 9. A they will remove their respective locks. 10. 10.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. equipment and vessels. If blind boards are used the tag is moved from the blind board and attached to the blind o Blind equipment as required ensuring the tags from the board and the blind list correspond with each other o ach blind location must be recorded in the E Energy Isolation Log R efer the tables in Appendix A to select proper blind thickness and Appendix B for standard practices for isolation of pipe. Upon removing their locks they must sign off work completed in the Energy Isolation Log.1 fter each affected worker has completed their work. pipelines. o After equipment has been made ready to blind (depressured) the operator in charge will use the tag system to track all active blinds. 10.4 personal lock can only be removed by the authoA 29 Energy Isolation track installed blinds .0 10.3 pon removal of locks and blinds the Energy U isolation Log must be updated to record status of isolation.2 n a group lockout once all affected workers’ personal I locks are removed from the lockbox. Once all locks have been removed from the lockbox an authorized worker may remove the locks from the energy isolation devices and return them to their respective lockbox. 5 efore a machine or equipment is started.6 The individual restoring energy to the equipment must: 30 .g. off-shift. For situations where an authorized or affected worker is unavailable to remove their lock (e.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. then the Area Authority will complete gHSSEr MF80002 (Removal of Absent Employee Personal Lock Log) to verify that the following steps are completed: • aking every reasonable effort to contact the M affected worker who installed the lock • etermining conclusively the job has been comD pleted and no personnel remain in the affected area • erifying that the machinery can be operated V safely before removing the lock • ontacting the Functional Team for verbal C authorization to access spare key stored in designated central location or to cut the lock • eturning the spare key to the designated central R location • otifying the worker at the start of his or her N next shift that the personal lock was removed since the workers previous shift • orwarding completed Form to Functional Team F Lead to sign off documentation and verify spare key was returned to designated central location Energy Isolation 10. affected B employees must be notified that all lockout devices(s) have been removed and that all blinds have been accounted for. 10. holidays) or an emergency involving equipment arises. Completed log sheet(s) are filed at a central location for 1 year. rized and affected workers who installed the lock. An authorized worker must verify the de-isolation and complete the Energy Isolation Log. 1 Prior to the installation of a permanent lock. • nsure that the machine or equipment comE ponents are operationally intact and ready for service • heck the work area to ensure all employees are C safely positioned or removed from the equipment Permanent Lockout Isolation 11. as amended) • C Occupational Health and Safety Regulation B and Guidelines (BC Regulation 296/97.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. as amended) 31 Energy Isolation • nspect the work to ensure that non-essential I items have been removed .0 11.3 e authorized worker will attach a steel tag to the Th lock which identifies the date of the lockout. 12. a Management of Change (MOC) will be conducted to determine and verify the correct isolation points. group responsible and a reference number for reference to a log providing details and reference to the MOC.0 Scope of Regulatory References • lberta General Safety Regulation (Alberta A Regulation 448/83.5 eys for the permanent locks must be controlled by K the Functional Team Lead.2 The functional team lead will designate an authorized worker to lock each of the energy isolation devices at the identified isolation points with a permanent lock (black). 11. 11.4 e authorized worker will record the lockout on the Th energy isolation log and file it at a central location for future reference. 11. 11. A-525.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping Code. Zero corrosion allowance was used. The allowable stress used was 90% of the SMYS.O. If alternative material is used or a higher temperature is required. Energy Isolation • Ontario Industrial Establishments Regulation (O. The tables were calculated using A-285 Gr.3 of ASME B31. B and C.5. R. 1990. as amended) Appendix A Selection of Temporary Blinds/Blanks Appendix A is only to be used for temporary blinds and blanks. A plate material and the formula found in clause 304. thickness requirements must be calculated using above codes and certified by a Professional Engineer. 32 .R. The following alternate materials may also be used: A-285 Gr. These tables can only be used for process temperatures less than 100 F (38C). A-516 and A-537.Regulation 851.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A-299. Permanent Blank sizing Requirements must be certified by Professional Engineer. 250 1.625 1.250 1.750 1.500 1.875 2. These tables are for selection of temporary blanks only.500 1.000 1.875 1.875 1.625 0.000 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 Pressure (psig) 952 450 2142 1013 2048 1800 3200 2813 4608 2243 6272 3053 8192 3987 10368 5047 6230 7539 8972 10529 288 648 1152 1800 2592 2170 2835 3588 4429 5359 6378 7485 8681 9965 139 314 557 871 1254 1707 2230 1800 2222 2689 3200 3756 4356 5000 5689 85 192 341 533 768 1045 1365 1727 2132 1929 2296 2695 3125 3588 4082 56 127 225 352 506 689 900 1139 1407 1702 2025 2377 1936 2222 2528 40 91 161 252 362 493 644 815 1006 1218 1449 1700 1972 2264 1800 NOTE: The shaded area beneath the line in the above table applies to RTJ type flanges only.375 1.125 1.750 0.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.875 2.750 0. DO NOT USE FOR PERMANENT BLANKS! Pipe Size (inches) Blank Thickness (inches) 0.250 0.500 0.375 1.375 0.000 14 16 18 20 24 26 30 Pressure (psig) 34 26 76 59 135 104 210 163 303 234 412 319 539 417 682 528 842 651 1018 788 1212 938 1422 1101 1649 1276 1893 1465 2154 1667 21 46 82 129 186 253 330 417 515 624 742 871 1010 1160 1320 17 38 67 105 151 206 269 341 421 509 606 711 824 946 1077 13 26 47 73 106 144 188 238 294 356 423 497 576 661 752 10 22 40 62 89 121 158 200 247 299 356 417 484 556 632 7 17 29 46 66 90 118 149 184 223 265 312 361 415 472 33 Energy Isolation HYDROTEST BLANKS--SELECTION TABLE .375 0.250 0.500 0. Pipe Size (inches) Blank Thickness (inches) 0.625 0.125 1.625 1.750 1.000 1. 3 For Vents and Drains on Vessels or Pipelines in Operation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Confined Space Entry Sour Gas Gas Liquids (Propane. 3 1 or 2.4.4.4. 3 1 or 2. 3 1 or 2.4.4. 3. 3 1 or 2.4. 34 .4.8 1 or 2.7. Equipment and Vessels Matrix For Unattended.4.8 1 or 2.3.7. 3 1 or 2.8 1 or 2.5. 3 1 or 2.4.4.3.3.8 1 or 2. Open Ended Piping Where Equipment/ Component is Physically Cold Work Removed for Maintenance 1 or 2.8 1 or 2.3.4.3.8 1 or 2.7. Can only be used if approved by a Professional Engineer or Functional Team Lead. 3 1 or 2.6 1 or 2. 3 1 or 2.4. Butane) Sweet Gas Crude oil (Emulsion. Double Block Valves (no bleed) 5.3.8mm Steam < 2482 kPa & 50. 3 1 or 2.3. 3.7.7. 3 1 or 2. 3 1 or 2. See the Legend for an explanation of numbered references Legend 1.3.8 1 or 2.7.7. 3 1 or 2.3.4.3.5.4.3. based on a documented risk assessment complete with procedures.8 1 or 2. 3 1 or 2.7. 3 *The isolation options in the table above are presented in the order of preference. 3 1 or 2.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.8 1 or 2.4.6 1 or 2.6 1 or 2. 3 1 or 2.7.4. Blind/Blank or plug Disconnect and plug Double Block and Bleed S ingle Block valves with Authorization (use only if #3 doesn’t’ exist or #1 & 2 are impractical.5. Energy Isolation Standard Practice For Isolation of Pipes. 3 1 or 2.5. 3 1 or 2.7. 4.4.8 1 or 2. 3 1 or 2.7. 3 1 or 2.3.6 1 or 2.3. 3 1 or 2.8 or less Acid/Base Amines Flammable Substances Non-Flammable Substances Produced Water Fresh Water Toxic Substances 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 Hot Work 1 or 2.8 1 or 2. 2.7.3.3.3.7.8 1 or 2. Appendix B. 3 1 or 2.8 1 or 2.8 1 or 2.7. 3 1 or 2. Bitumen) Steam > 2482 kPa Steam < 2482 kPa & > 50. 3.4. Pipelines. Note D: This practice needs to be used with other procedures. Single Block valves . Unique task carried out using a site specific procedure certified by Professional Engineer. Blinding/Blanking or Disconnect and plug: • linding/blanking or disconnect and plug is the B preferred method for isolating equipment for work purposes • blind/blank tag system must be used in all BP A Canada facilities. bleed must be vented to atmosphere and consideration must be given to make sure it is vented to a safe place. on both sides to prevent damage to flange faces 35 Energy Isolation 6.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Lockout Procedures. When a blind/blank is being installed the following are important: o ite-Specific blinding/blanking procedures or S guides must be followed o Gaskets must be installed on the pressure side and. Refer to Provincial regulations outside Alberta. where possible. the bull plug/ cap will not be required until the valve is replaced. Note C: ouble block and bleed cannot be used to isolate D critical hot work in British Columbia. 7. Note B: or valves that are holding but the threads/nipple F are unable to accept a bull plug/cap.e. H2S Code of Practice). 8. codes of practice and standards to provide a safe work environment (i. Common tasks carried out using a standard practice certified by Professional Engineer. This tag system must also be used for identifying disconnect and plug locations. Notes Note A: All valves must be locked out and tagged when using double block and bleed. See specification table at the end of this section Double Block and Bleed: I f installing blinds/blanks creates a hazard and disconnect and plug is impractical.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. NOTE: Bleed valve outlets must be vented with consideration given to both Safety and Environmental impacts Single Block Valves with Authorization: Closing of inlet valve and outlet valve and then depressuring the equipment. the recommended alternative for isolating equipment is closing double (block) valves with a bleed valve in between. Single Block: 36 . Must verify that the valves hold before work commences. Valves must be locked closed and tagged. Can be used only when approved by a Professional Engineer or Functional Team Lead. based on documented risk assessment complete with site-specific procedure. The bleed valve size between the block valves must be sufficient to handle potential upstream block valve leakage without applying pressure to the downstream block valve. Block valves must be locked and tagged in a closed position and the bleed valve must be locked and tagged in the open position. Energy Isolation o roper pressure rated blinds/blanks and P gaskets must be used. The block valve nearest to the inlet and the outlet of the isolated equipment must be locked and tagged closed. Double Block Valves (No Bleed): Two valves closed on each side of the equipment without de-pressuring between the block valves. 0 1. cavity. contractors and other visiting personnel involved in ground disturbance activities on CGPU sites. Unique task: Task that is unique and requires the expertise of a Professional Engineer to ensure that the equipment isolation meets BP safety requirements and OH&S regulations. Examples 1. Scope of Definitions G round Disturbance is a man made cut.0 2. contracted employees.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2 2. trench or depression in the earth’s surface. .1 37 Ground Disturbance Closing of inlet valve and outlet valve and then depressuring the equipment. Valves must be locked closed and tagged. Reference Forms: g HSSEr MF 80001 – Energy Isolation Log gHSSEr MF 88001 – Permit to Work gHSSEr MF 34004 – Pre-Job Risk Assessment GROUND DISTURBANCE PRACTICE 1. The purpose of this practice is to outline the requirements for ground disturbance necessary to ensure worker safety and to avoid contact with all underground facilities.1 Scope and Applicability Th is practice applies to all BP Canada Energy BP Canada Gas Performance Unit(CGPU) employees. Must verify that the valves hold before work commences. ) is available • ll protective trench devices temporarily used in A an excavation are to be certified by a Professional Engineer • Ground Disturbance permit and.0 3. sloping.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. aurgering. and where possible. drilling. gas detection. isolation and depressurization of all underground hazards (e. a Confined Space Permit is issued • round movement is controlled and collapse G is prevented by systematically shoring. back-filling. Ground Disturbance include excavating. hydrovacing. land leveling. clearing. tunneling. O n-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure that: • mergency Response Plans are in place to adE dress Ground Disturbance specific hazards as well as the area Emergency Response Plan • n adequate inventory of Protective Equipment A required for hazards identified for the Ground Disturbance (shoring. lifelines etc. topsoil stripping. benching and use of temporary protective devices(see section 5. harness. 3.g. grading. rig anchors and soil sampling. digging.5) • hazard assessment of the worksite is comA pleted prior to work commencing.2 38 . this includes identification. electric cables) within the area to be disturbed • at all workers are trained in STOP-THINKTh 3.1 Scope of Responsibilty E ach worker has the responsibility to recognize ground disturbance hazards and take corrective measures by ensuring this practice is followed. plowing. barricades. trenching. blasting. pipelines. fencing. cages. where A required. 0 4.1 4. Onsite documentation of training will be entered in the VTA database. T raining shall be conducted by a competent trainer.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 5. The person supervising the job must have formalized Ground Disturbance Level II training. Any worker who issues a Ground Disturbance permit. Scope of Consideration for Ground Disturbance 4. Both permits shall be filed at the field office for 13 months. • ll requirements of the Ground Disturbance A Code of Practice and Permit have been met Scope Of Training And Certification A ll workers involved in the ground disturbance must be trained and competent.0 39 Ground Disturbance GO and Time Out for Safety and are able to exercise these tools . P rior to Ground Disturbance activity commencing. a Work Permit and Hazard Assessment Form (gHSSEr MF 88001) and Ground Disturbance permit (gHSSEr MF 84001) shall be completed. The Ground Disturbance Permit recipient is not required to have Ground Disturbance training. This training can be job specific training on site by a person who has received formalized Ground Disturbance Level II training from a recognized institute. Permit recipient is not required to have training but person supervising the job must have training and be on-site during the disturbance.2 4. Ground Disturbance training is not required for the BP representative completing the Work Permit and Hazard Assessment Form. supervises or independently creates a disturbance requires formalized Level II Ground Disturbance training. A Ground Disturbance Permit is required any time powered mechanized equipment is used to disturb the ground. An exemption to this rule would be grading a lease road (see 5.1 A risk assessment is necessary to determine if a ground disturbance permit needs to be completed and all steps followed.s. F ollowing is a list of jobs that have been identified as low risk jobs and therefore a ground disturbance permit would not need to be issued: • sing a spade to dig to a depth of less than 30 U cm • Pounding in wooden survey peg • Pushing in wire marker flags • Grading a lease road • sing hydro vac at low pressure (< 2200 p.3 5. Certain manual penetrating hand tools can damage underground structures and this should be considered when doing risk analysis. Ground Disturbance 5.i.5 40 . This risk assessment needs to be completed by a person trained in ground disturbance by a recognized institute.4 5.) to U dig H ydrovacing or hand exposure is to be used on plant facilities (excluding wellsites) to locate any possible underground facilities.3) as it is considered low risk due to extra ground cover.2 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A complete hazard assessment for ground disturbance needs to address the following areas which are incorporated in the ‘Work Permit and Hazard Assessment Form (gHSSEr 88001): 5. No mechanical excavation. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. sandy or loose” the walls are sloped from the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 45 degrees measured from the vertical • e employer must ensure the the Spoil Pile is Th piled so that: o the leading edge is at least 1 metre away from the edge of the excavation o the slope of the spoil pile adjacent to the excavation is at an angle of not more than 45 degrees from the horizontal. If this is not possible an engineered approved structure for shoring will need to be installed. Proper shoring is as follows: • If the soil is considered: o “hard and compact” the walls are sloped to within 1.If the atmosphere in an excavation cannot be guaranteed safe. and o loose materials are scaled and trimmed from the spoil pile • e method of identification of underground Th facilities • e method of exposure methods and pressures Th 41 Ground Disturbance • onsideration must be given to all trenches C and excavations being confined spaces. it must be properly shored or cut back before workers can enter the area.5 metres of the bottom of the excavation at an anlgle of not less than 45 degrees measured from the veritcal o “soft.5 metres deep I and closer to the wall or bank than the depth of the excavation.5 metres of the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 30 degrees measured from the vertical o “likely to crack or crumble” the walls are sloped to within 1. the excavation would be considered a confined space . • f an excavation is more than 1. environmental conditions) • e work to be carried out. establish degradation factors (heat. and spoil pile placement • ize of excavation. structures.6 5. ground and atmospheric conditions must be continually monitored for changing conditions. preexcavated. in accordance with the permit. maintain a safe atmsophere. consistency. lay down areas. See gHSSEr MS830.6 metres BC) • ethods to stabilize excavation faces.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The pipeline owner may have more stringent requirments therefore this should always be addressed in the pre-project meeting. slurry disposal. equipment. Ground Disturbance involved • afety and environmental procedures for dealing S with encountered or compromised underground facilities • pecific excavation considerations such as soil S type. load placement distances and wieght distribution relating to the excavation (vehicles. proximity to traffic. cold. PPE requirements and the need for a safety standby D uring the job. soil fluid pressures. contamination. stability S of adjacent improvement. natural angle of repose. the number of workTh ers and tools and equipment in the excavation. vibration producing equipment. etc) • ngineering certification and design requireE ments for excavations > 6 metres (4. piping.0 42 . Scope of Forms 5. ramping M and proper access & egress points.5 metres of ground cover.7 6. H eavy equipment (including pickup trucks) must not cross a pipeline unless it is properly ramped or there is a minimum of 1. water. 0 1. when it is necessary to prepare a lifting plan and to make certain all neces- 1. contracted employees. as amended HSSEr MS820- g Confined Space Entry Practice g HSSEr MS830- Working in a Combustible Gas Environment Practice 7. contractors and other visiting personnel doing lifting and rigging operations on CGPU premises and work sites.2 B. The purpose of the practice is to identify safe lifting and rigging procedures. Occupational Health and Safety Regulation and Guidelines 296/97 as amended Ontario Regulation 213 Construction Projects - Part III Excavations.1 Scope and Applicability This practice applies to all BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.4 LIFTING AND RIGGING PRACTICE 1.0 7.2 43 Lifting Opeartions .3 7.1 lberta General Safety Regulations AR 448/83 as A amended.2 7. Part 32 7.C. 6.1 g HSSEr MF 84001-BP Canada Energy Ground Disturbance Permit HSSEr MF 88001 – BP Canada Work Permit and g Hazard Assessment Scope of References 6. maintenanace requirements and fundamental operating requirements used throughout the BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU). The on-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure: • E mergency response plans are in place to address specific Lifting and Rigging hazards for the job at hand Th at the workers are trained and competent to operate the cranes and/or hoists or rig up for lifting as required for the work at hand A ll cranes. Lifting Opeartions sary pre-planning has been accomplished when heavy loads and/or long booms will be in proximity of operating equipment. requires that the Critical Lift form be completed. 1.4 2. and if deemed critical.2 • • • • 44 . hoists and rigging equipment are properly labelled and inspected daily prior to work commencing Th at the safety devices installed on the lifting equipment are operational A hazard assesment is completed prior to start- 1. Scope of Responsibility E ach worker is responsible for recognizing lifting and rigging hazards and taking corrective measures to ensure that this practice is followed. Th e practice defines circumstances and requirements that classify a lift to be Critical.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.1 2. crane inspection.3 Th e practice defines training and certification requirements for crane operators.0 2. and executed by all responsible parties associated with the lift. signed. It will identify that the lift is clear of overhead obstacles. Crane Operators will have: • ppropriate Provincial Crane Operators CertifiA cate or an Inter-Provincial Certificate • e Alberta Apprenticeship has 3 defined apTh prenticeship programs for lifting and hoisting • obile Crane Certification – 3 year program. and how the load is to be balanced and directed throughout the various stages of the lift • Th at all workers are trained in STOPTHINK-GO and Time Out for Safety and feel comfortable in being able to exercise these tools Scope of Training. Certification and Competencies O nly trained and competent authorized personnel or trainees under the direct supervision of trained and competent authorized personnel will be permitted to operate cranes and hoists or rig up for lifting.2 3.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.1 3.3 45 Lifting Opeartions . that workers are aware of the hazards and there is a clear understanding of communication methods and what hand signals are to be used. ing work that includes identification of the loads involved and that the lifting equipment is adequate and otherwise ready for service for those loads. Th e employer of crane operators and riggers will coordinate the training and will maintain the training records. M capable of lifiting > 45 tons.0 3. • oom Truck – Certification is required when B operating: 3. 2. Wireline operations 3. Perforation operations 4. Ability to recognize hazards and risks within the lift area. and have previous experience or familiarity with the type of lift to be performed 3. Snubbing operations 6. Sound working knowledge and understanding of the use of hardware and equipment 2. Ability to read. Wellhead pumping operations. hoisting and booming up and down with a lifting capacity of greater than 5 tons and less than 45 tons b) Articulation booms without live lines with a lifting capacity of greater than 8 tons and less that 45 tons • ellhead Boom Truck – to work in this trade W a person must be a registered apprentice or a certified journeyman or hold a recognized trade certificate.understand and implement lift plans and drawings 3.4 Riggers will have: • Knowledge of equipment 46 .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Coiled tubing operations 5. Lifting Opeartions a) Booms (including telescoping booms and articulating booms possessing live lines) capable of swinging. Rig up and rig out of slant service rigs. • ll operators of lifting devices rated > 2000 A kilograms shall be certified as a journeyman operator or enrolled in the Alberta Apprenticeship system. Operators of lifting equipment that is rated at < 2000 kilograms must be able to show competence to the items below: 1. have a clear understanding of lift dynamics. A wellhead boom truck may be used for one or more of the following: 1. tested. checked.2 4. maintained and repaired in accordance with the appropriate practice listed in the applicable provincial regulations. I f an incident occurs with lifting equipment (i. erected. A ll rigging equipment will be inspected to prior to each usage to ensure the integrity of the equipment.0 4. codes W and practices • bility to prepare and interpret site and lift plans A and drawings • Knowledge of hand signals Scope of Inspection and Maintenance A ll cranes.e. inspected. hoists and rigging equipment will be installed. and damage is suspected. examined. 4.4 4.1 • orking knowledge of relevant practices. Davitt Arms) must be certified by an engineer and properly labelled for capacities. operated.e. A ll cranes and hoists will receive preventative maintenance based on usage and manufacturer’s recommendations.6 47 Lifting Opeartions • Experience with lift procedures . sling breaks during lifts). 4.1. (See Appendix 1 for guidelines regarding sling damage). A ll cranes on CGPU sites must have the most recent appropriate inspection documentation on site as per 5.3 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A ll lifting devices (i. All damaged rigging equipment will be removed from use immediately and destroyed or discarded or repaired and certified by the manufacturer. the crane shall be taken out of service until it is recertified in safe operability.5 4. labelled. shock loading to the boom. 5 5. the clearance shall be increased 10 centimeters for every 10kv over 50kv. All crane hooks must be equipped with a positive locking safety latch. swinging. W hen a crane is to be operated near energized overhead electrical power lines. The ballast or counterweight in place that is specified by the manufacturer will not be exceeded.1 Scope of General Operation A substantial and durable rating chart with clearly legible letters and figures will be provided with each crane and securely fixed to the crane cab in a conspicious location visible to the operator while seated at the controls. No hoisting. and load to ensure safe operation and eliminate hazards of electrocution.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. roping. a clearance of 3 meters will be maintained as an absolute limit of approach with the boom. lowering.e. Cranes will not be operated without the full amount of any ballast or counterweight in place as specified by the manufacturer.0 5. Lifting Opeartions 5. Th e crane operator will not lift or carry any load over or above personnel. A crane in transport with the boom or mast lowered can come within 2 meters of an energized line. or traveling will be done while personnel is on the load or the hook. 5.4 5. block. taping) and signed.6 48 . The area of the lift over which the load is carried should be barricaded (i. All unnecessary personnel will be restricted from the barricaded area. If the voltage is greater than 50kv.3 5.2 5. 5. be free of defects. dry chemical. Such use of this equipment shall comply with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements. waste. The command STOP may be given by anyone and must be obeyed by everyone including the crane or hoist operator. track hoes. 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 5. side loaders and similar earth moving equipment may be used only for incidental lifting in which they are designed. or equivalent fire A extinguisher will be kept in the cab or the vicinity of the crane. 5.9 5.7 The crane operator must test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes. 5.12 Tools.10 Backhoes. front-end loaders. . with easy accessibility. the load is the responsibility of the crane operator. cranes equipped with outriggers will have them fully deployed whenever possible.13 ranes will not be refueled while the engine is runC ning.11 While making lifts. The flag man should be 49 Lifting Opeartions 5. extra fuses and other necessary articles will be stored in the tool box and not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab. 5. specifications and designs for lifting. Wood blocks used to support outriggers must be strong enough to prevent crushing. oil cans.14 carbon dioxide.8 Once a load is hooked up.15 se of a flag man is required to direct the lifting U operator in a blind zone. and be of sufficient width and length to prevent shifting or toppling under load. 5. Crane hoisting should be kept vertical.0 7.1 7. E nsure that the load will be attached to the hook by means of slings or other approved rigging devices.1 Scope of Rigging the Load Only competent riggers will attach a load. E nsure that the hoist rope is free from kinks or twists. Cranes will not be used for dragging loads sideways. A test lift should be performed. A competent rigger must have sufficient knowledge of hand signals and rigging loads and procedures. Scope of Hoisting Operation Center the crane over the load before starting the hoist to avoid swinging the load as the lift is started.2 6.2 7. L oads should not be swung by the crane to reach areas not under the crane.0 6. The crane operator must make sure the load is well secured and properly balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a few inches. STOP.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 50 . Do not wrap the hoist rope around the load. 6.4 7.3 6. portruding objects). THINK. 6.e. sharp edges. T ake care to make certain that the sling clears all obstacles (i. Lifting Opeartions competent in the use of signalling to direct the lift operator. GO and ensure communication and hand signals are reviewed. Prior to a lifting operation. Neither the load nor the boom will be lowered below the point where less than five full wraps of cable remain on their respective drums. Scope of Holding the Load The crane operator will not be permitted to leave their position at the controls while the load is suspended. Do not leave unsupervised loads suspended.2 9. chains. 7.3 51 Lifting Opeartions 7. a horn or some other method of warning must be used to warn personnel in the area that a lift is taking place.0 8.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. ensure all slings. chains. On truck mounted cranes. or moving loads. no loads will be lifted over the cab of the vehicle except as approved by the crane manufacturer. E veryone in the immediate area must be clear of the load and aware that a load is being moved.1 9. Scope of Moving the Load Before moving the load. . lowering. care should be taken so that there is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving load. T ag lines of sufficient length must be used to steady or guide the loads as they are being moved unless they would not be effective (e. extremely heavy 7. slings.6 8.1 8.5 D o not make lifts beyond the rated local capacity of the crane. or other load lifting devices are fully seated in the saddle of the hook.0 9.g.2 9.4 D uring hoisting. When raising. cables or any other rigging and lifting equipment. 0 Scope of Critical Lift Requirements 11.2 All lifts made over operating process equipment.3 efore travelling a crane with a load.1 lift will be considered Critical and a Critical Lift A Plan will be completed when any of the following conditions or circumstances exists. 10. When travelling with a suspened load. the crane operaB tor will be responsible for ensuring position of the load. 52 . boom location. 11. Rig matting may be moved without tag lines with the load less than 1 meter from the ground and workers standing back from the load.4 crane.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 10. and speed of movement. Lifting Opeartions large loads) or creating an uncontrolled hazard. 11.2 Speed should be kept to a minimum and should not exceed manufacturers recommendations. 10. shall not be travelled A with the boom so that it may bounce back over the cab.1 When travelling without a load. ground support. The crane will have a ground or vehicle guide to escort them so that travel can be conducted in the safest manner possible. travel route.0 Scope of Travelling 10. 10. ground speed should not exceed 5kph. the empty hook should be secured. with or without a load. 11. 12.5 Utilization of poles and derricks that have been erected for a specific lift.5 meters for every extra 150 kV.7 ifting of personnel. Lifts of personnel utilizing man baskets must conform to 29 CFR 1926.8 BP CGPU or contract employee requests a lift plan. 13. .0 Drilling and Well Servicing 13. plus the required voltage clearance. 11. Manbaskets must engineered L and visually inspected before the lift is made. 11. 11. (see Appendix 3 for an example). Minimum clearance is 3 meters for voltages up to 50 kilovolts (kV) and distances increasing by 1.3 ingle crane lifts when the total load exceeds 80% of S the cranes load chart.550 (g). 11. Boom cats during pipeline stringing operations would not be considered a critical lift.4 wo or more cranes are required for a single piece T of equipment.1 rilling and Service rigs will be maintained and D inspected in accordance with the manufacturer’s and American Petroleum Insitude’s (API) specifications.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.0 Scope of the Critical Lift Plan 12. Certification of Masts will be in accordance of CA- 53 Lifting Opeartions 11.6 If power lines are within twice the maximum swing radius of the crane.1 e contractor performing the Critical Lift must Th develop a Critcal Lift Procedure and must include a Critical Lift Checklist which must reviewed by a BP CGPU representative. 0 15.0 and 4. Occupational Health and Safety Regulation and Guidleines 296/97 as amended 15.0.0 Scope of Appendices APPENDIX 1- Sling Checklist APPENDIX 2- Sling Operating Practices Guidelines APPENDIX 3- xample of a Critical Lift Plan E completion/Approval Checklist APPENDIX 4- Initial Crane Inspection APPENDIX 5- Daily Crane Inspection Scope of References 15.0.0. Regulation and Code Ontario Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments and 16.1 lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as A amended 15. in the OH&S code in which lifting related equipment is referenced.4 Alberta’s OH&S Act. as amended Forms • gHSSEr MF 34004 Pre-Job Risk Assessment • HSSEr MF 88001-BP Canada Energy Comg pany Hot Work/Cold Work Permit 54 . 3. 14.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2 B. 2.3 CAODC Recommended Practices 15.2 rilling and Service rigs will also follow Part 37. Oil D and Gas Wells. Lifting Opeartions DOC Recommended Practice 1.C.0 Regulation 213 Construction Projects. 13. Sling Guidelines This checklist is to be referred to prior to the use of any slings for lifting and rigging procedures. charring. excessive pitI ting. cuts. Lifting and Rigging Practice . If any of the following checklist items are identified as an issue. 1) oes the synthetic sling(s) have a rated capacity D tag that is clearly legible? 2) re there any acid or alkalis burns on the A sling(s)? 3) s there any melting. 2) elect the sling(s) having suitable characteristics S 55 Lifting Opeartions APPENDIX 1 . snags or embedA ded particles in the sling? 5) s there any broken or worn stitching in load I bearing splices? 6) Are there signs of excessive abrasive wear? 7) Are there are knots in any part of the sling? 8) s there any evidence of distortion. or weld spatters I on any part of the sling(s)? 4) re there any holes. tears. remove the sling from use immediately.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. corrosion or broken fittings on the sling(s)? 9) re there any conditions which cause doubt as to A the strength of the sling? APPENDIX 2 Sling Operating Practices Guidelines 1) etermine the weight of the load. The weight of D the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling. 18) wisting and kinking the legs (branches) shall be T avoided. 16) Personnel shall not ride the sling. 13) e sling shall be hitched in a manner providing Th control of the load. 10) lings shall not be pulled from under loads if the S load is resting on the sling. and never on a fitting. 5) lings used in a basket hitch shall have the load S balanced to prevent slippage. 6) e opening in fittings shall be the proper shape Th and size to insure that the fitting will seat properly in the hook or other attachments. Lifting Opeartions for the type of load. shall be kept from between the sling and the load. 17) Shock loading shall be avoided. and from between the sling and the crane hook or hoist hook. protrusions or abrasive surfaces.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 14) ersonnel. 9) lings shall not be twisted or tied into knots. hitch and environment. 15) Personnel shall stand clear of the suspended load. 3) lings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated S capacity. Considerations shall be given to the sling load angle which affects rated capacity. 7) lings shall always be protected from being cut S by sharp corners. 11) Do not drop slings equipped with metal fittings. 12) lings that appear to be damaged shall not be S used unless inspected and accepted. or S joined by knotting. 4) lings with fittings that are used as a choker S hitch shall be of sufficient length to assure that the choking action is on the webbing. sharp edges. 56 . including portions of the human P body. 8) lings shall not be dragged on the floor or over S an abrasive surface. 22) lings shall be long enough so that the rated S capacity of the sling is adequate when the angle of the legs (branches) is taken into consideration. with or without the load. 24) ylon and polyester slings shall not be used at N temperatures above 90 degrees C. dry and dark place when not in use. 21) e slings’ legs (branches) shall contain or supTh port the load from the sides above the center of gravity when using a basket hitch. to allow removal of the web sling. Lifting Near Electrical Hazards Safety Form.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Lifting Site Plot Plan. 23) lace blocks under load prior to setting down P the load. personD nel shall be alert for possible snagging. 57 Lifting Opeartions 19) oad applied to the hook shall be centered in the L base (bowl) of the hook to prevent point loading on the hook. etc. Store slings in a cool. APPENDIX 3-Example of a Critical Lift Plan Critical Lift Plan Completion/Approval Checklist Note: All applicable forms (Lift Plan. if applicable. Job Name: _____________________________________ Date Lift Expected To Take Place: Planned Duration Of Lift: Site/Ground Evaluation/Preparation: hrs. 25) xposure to sunlight or ultra-violet light E degrades the strength of slings.) and drawings/plans (Rigging Drawing. 20) uring lifting. etc. .) must be attached to this completion/approval checklist prior to the approval meeting and for the duration of the lift. all above ground hazard or obstructions. Ground stability has been evaluated and documented in the attached report for ability to support the bearing surface of the lifting equipment being used. Ground conditions surrounding the crane location. all underground hazards. have been evaluated for underground hazards such as underground piping. Any potential underground hazard and the position of the crane has been noted on the site plot plan. Lifting Opeartions Answer ‘YES’ or ‘NO’ (if ‘NO’ provide explanation and justification of in space provided after each section) A detailed site plot plan has been prepared and includes crane(s) location. All open excavations in the lift area have been examined for their potential effect on the lift in question. swing rates and sudden load stops have been examined. Construction details of the bearing mats. such as dynamic or impact loads.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 58 . All conditions that may affect the ability of the ground to support the load. as indicated in the attached site plot plan. and uncompacted backfill from recently filled excavations. and load travel paths to be utilized during the lift. All open excavations in the lift area have been noted on the site plot plan. Bearing mats are required if any question exist as to the grounds ability to support the lift in question. conduit. Load: A detailed drawing of the load has been completed and is attached to the critical lift plan. information pertaining to the weight of the load. at a minimum. minimum jib offset angle to the ground (if applicable). maximum boom length. The maximum allowable wind speed has been established. reviewed and is attached to the critical lift plan. and includes. as noted on the lift plan. boom configuration to be used. are attached and have been reviewed. .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The percent crane capacity. but is not limited to. has been verified and the crane’s load chart used to complete the lift plan has been attached to the critical lift plan. maximum operating radius. Cranes(s): The lift plan for each crane used to support the load has been completed. The detailed load drawing will show. for each crane used to support the load. based on crane manufacture’s recommendation and load configuration. including any auxiliary 59 Lifting Opeartions if required. the minimum boom angle to the ground. and is clearly labeled on the crane configuration drawing. to be used during the lift. A detailed crane configuration drawing has been completed. All information on the detailed rigging drawing has been reviewed and verified acceptable for the lift in question. the configuration of all rigging. Lift Logistics: A logistics plan has been prepared and is attached to the critical lift plan. Rigging: A detailed rigging drawing has been completed and is attached to the critical lift plan. platforms. piping. that may be attached to the load prior to the lift.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The detailed rigging drawing will show. communications between the Signal Person(s) and the crane operator(s). I-bolts. including angles and lengths. insulation.. swing radius of the crane or cranes supporting the load. and anchor bolt pattern of the load’s foundation. spreader bars. etc. the travel path of the load. all rigging to be utilized for the lift. etc. Any special lifting requirements will also be clearly stated on the detailed load drawing. slings. lifting and tailing lugs available on the load and their orientation. All information on the detailed load drawing has been verified for accuracy. securing the load once it is Lifting Opeartions 60 . The logistics plan addressing. at a minimum. attachment to the load and crane. the travel path of the crane or cranes supporting the load. equipment such as ladders. placement of Signal Person(s). anchor bolt pattern of the load. chain falls. including shackles. at a minimum. and access to disconnect the rigging from the load once the load is secured. . The rigging configuration is in accordance with the detailed rigging drawing. The Rigging Inspector has obtained the current wind speed and has noted the current wind speed and the maximum allowable wind speed in the spaces provided. The crane location is in accordance with the location noted on the site plot plan. Th e Emergency Response Coordinator has been notified of the lift in question.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The crane configuration is in accordance with the detailed crane configuration drawing. The current wind speed is equal to or below the maximum 61 Lifting Opeartions in place. Critical Lift Plan Approvals: Area Manager: Project/Construction Engineer: Rigging Inspector: Job Representative: The following items must be addressed on the day of the lift. All information in the logistics plan has been reviewed and is acceptable for the lift in question. Critical Lift Pre-Lift Safety Meeting Attendance: By signing this form.Current Wind Speed mph - Maximum Allowable Wind Speed A detailed pre-lift safety meeting has been held and included ALL individuals involved or affected by the critical lift in question and covered all details associated with the lift.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Lifting Opeartions allowable wind speed mph . Equipment Operator: Rigging Inspector: Signal Person/Rigger: Signal Person/Rigger: APPENDIX 4 Initial Crane Inspection Date: ____________________________ Inspection By. _____________________ _____________ Is Crane Certification Current? Please include date of certification ____________ ____________ Is Operator Certification Current? Is the size of the crane adequate for the Operations Representative: 62 . the following individuals are indicating they have actively participated in the pre-lift safety meeting for the critical lift in question and fully understand the scope of the lift to be made and their assigned roles and responsibilities. sheaves) ___Engine (belts. pins. wiring. swing. access. damage. damaged) ___Capacity (limitations. dents. cables.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. power lines. strong enough. clips) ___Rigger (understanding of hand signals. chart. leaks. barricades. high 63 Lifting Opeartions jobs anticipated? . fittings. pulleys. ____________ Is there a current log book kept with the crane? APPENDIX 5 Daily Crane Inspection Date: ____________________________ Inspection By: _____________________ ___Lubrication (gears. weight known) ___Cable (kinks. filters. seals) ___Bolts/Pins ((loose. filters. bolts. hardware. roles. filter ok) ___Boom (wear. level. hoses. limit switch) ___Pads (large enough. wear. pins. missing. vehicles) ___Ground (firm. PTO) ___Work Area (clean. rigging. workers) ___Obstructions (clearances. wear secure. limit switch) ___Outriggers (functioning. capacity) ___Rigging (capacity. log) ___Hoses (leaks. wire rope) ___Log (check previous reports or logs) ___Cylinders (fittings. dry) ___Load (capacity. connections) ___Manual (familiar with operator/maintenance manual) ___Controls (movement. good condition) ___Hydraulic Fluid (level ok. telescope) ___Brakes (functioning. plate. 5 1. visibility vest) ___Hook (bent. M OC practice is also an excellent communication tool to inform impacted groups or areas that a change is being considered and/or about to occur.4 1. materials or substances. equipment. staffing levels.2 1. wear. authorize and document changes before they are made and ensure proper closure after the changes are completed. safety catch. twisted. cracks) MOC ___Sheaves (cable fits. Its purpose is to establish the procedures necessary to ensure that the risks arising from proposed changes are managed to an acceptable level.1 Purpose. free of debris. wear) ___Track or tires (clean. systems. The practice covers modifications intended for implementation by BP personnel and contractors. The practice is designed to insure compliance with gHSSEr Element 7 and Group Process Safety and Integrity Management Practice Element 2.6 64 .0 1. procedures. as well as projects designed by an approved engineer- 1. products. temporary and emergency changes to organization. Th e MOC practice applies to all permanent. Scope and Applicability M anagement of Change (MOC) is a system to evaluate.3 1. condition) MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PRACTICE 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. scaffolding) are undertaken under other safety management controls. organizational structures and supporting documentation. such as safe systems of work and permits • arrying out replacement-in-kind work C • eplacing an individual with someone having R the same competencies • f you are not sure whether an MOC practice is I required.9 65 . with the intention of maintaining an auditable trial from the original design through to the current status. The application of this process provides this audit trail.g. in particular: • odifications to plant facilities and equipment M • Changes to the organization • odifications to wells within the well integrity M envelope • hanges to critical information and procedures C • Changes to IT systems and softwar It is the intention of this process to highlight changes that affect the original ‘design intent’ of the facility.8 1.7 The practice should be applied when assessing any significant change in BP operations in the (CGPU). ing contractor. It is not necessary to follow this practice when: • outine activities covered by practice R maintenance and operations procedures (e. but does not apply to project scope changes which are managed by the engineering contractor using their internal processes. 1. which includes facility and equipment. access this web link to an MOC decision tree: MOC 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. it is vital that there be at least one review with a minimum of three people. Technical MOC Practice Decision Tree 1. Only in true life-or-death situations where minutes count can a single person assume full responsibility for making a change without reviewing that change with others.g. 30. therefore. preferably from different disciplines and the change must be approved by a Technical Authority or line supervisor. The formal application of the MOC practice must follow the emergency change as soon as possible.12 Organizational Change can range from substitution of personnel to the elimination of positions. 60. 1. SmartMOC can be used to record the termination/reassessment date and forward a reminder task to the SPA. 90 days) and will not exceed the indicated timeframe for the change without an additional authorization and review. 66 . Changes to the organization’s structure and responsibilities are reflected in HSSE responsibilities and accountabilities. This type of change is justified when the following circumstances exist: • • • • • • Immediate danger to personnel Potential for major equipment damage Potential for major operational loss Serious environmental impact Community complaint Regulatory violation MOC In spite of the fact that emergency change initially by passes the formal change process.11 n Emergency Change is one in which personnel A assume the responsibility to make a change without invoking the full MOC practice. organizational change whether permanent or temporary must formally assess and recorded.10 A Temporary change is not intended to be permanent (e. 0 2. Technical Authorities and Technical Reviewers 2. 1. Policies. Gatekeeper and Assurance role • erformance Unit technical authority frameP work: Engineering Authorities. procedure.1 The Facilitator: • acilitators will be appointed for each major site F 67 MOC .2 e key process roles in the MOC practice are the Th Facilitator and Approval Authorities. They have the following roles and responsibilities: 2. processes or forms affected as a result of a Technical or Organizational change are resolved as part of the original instigating change.14 anaging a change to a DCS (Distributed Control M System) or a SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) system requires completion of specific records for assurance. 1. These changes stand alone and are not initiated as the consequence of a Technical or Organizational change.1 Roles and Responsibilities I n summary.2.13 n Administrative Change is one that impacts a polA icy. Details of how to manage this type of change are available at the following web link: MOC practice for SCADA Change Worksheet 2. procedures. the MOC practice requires competent personnel in the following three areas: • nitial approval and risk assessment: Facilitator I and Approval Authorities • mplementation of change: Single Person AcI countable.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. process or form and includes changes from regulators or outside agencies. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2. to the Approval Authority o nsuring that the assessment team includes all E necessary knowledge and competence for the change being assessed o aintaining a record of the status of all MOC M practice documentation o Recommending improvements to this procedure Note: The Facilitator and the Approval Authorities cannot be the same person 2. responsibility. or group of smaller sites MOC • ey are typically the Management of Change or Th Process Safety Management Coordinators • acilitators must be properly trained in the F change assessment methodology being used • ey should have detailed knowledge of the site. Th its hazards and procedures • The Facilitators are responsible for: o ogging data associated with the change into L the SmartMOC system o Selecting the appropriate method of assessment and managing the process o Identifying which Technical Authorities should be involved in the assessment of risk associated with a given change proposal o aking recommendations.2 The Approval Authority: • pproval Authorities should be appointed for A each major site or group of smaller sites • ey will typically be the Manager. including condiM tions for implementation and such monitoring requirements as deemed necessary. accountability and delegation of authority • e formal delegation of authority for MOC Th 68 . or their Th designate(s) based on their role. of a change to proceed to assessment o Nominating a Facilitator to manage the assessment o etting the initial workflow schedule for the S change o Accepting the outcome of the assessment and approving. they will identify the implementation process o nsuring that any changes stay within defined E scope and that the recommendations from the assessment are fully implemented o nsuring that the roles within the MOC pracE tice are carried out by competent personnel o Feedback to the Originator or Facilitator when rejecting a proposal o nsuring appropriate financial support for the E change MOC Note: The Facilitator and the Approval Authority cannot be the same person 2. practice within CGPU can be accessed at the following web link: Approval Authority for MOC practice • The Approval Authority is responsible for: o Initial approval or rejection.3 e key process roles in the implementation of any Th approved change are the SPA. if appropriate. within the Performance context.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. the Gatekeeper and the Assurance role. or not.1 The Single Point Accountable role (SPA): • e SPA person will be recommended as part of Th the approval process 69 .3. the change to move to implementation. They have the following roles and responsibilities: 2. In this role. including updating documentation MOC o aintaining the change within the scope M assessed by the MOC practice and ensuring that any changes to the scope are adequately assessed o Completing the Pre-Startup Compliance Review when the change is managed using the MOC practice 2. sanction of the scope. • The SPA is responsible for: o Implementation and management of the approved change through the MOC practice o Implementing recommendations from an MOC practice.2 The Gatekeeper role: • e Gatekeeper will be recommended as part of Th the approval process if the change is managed outside the MOC practice • The Gatekeeper will typically be responsible for: o The funding budget.3.3 The Assurance role: • ill be recommended as part of the approval W process and will typically be the Facilitator • The Assurance role is responsible for: o Attesting that the change has addressed the risks and actions identified in the assessment 70 . but the Approval Authority will be responsible if the change is implemented within the MOC practice o Approving the stages of the implementation process.3. in particular.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. cost and timescale o Providing or obtaining resources for implementation of the change o Completing the Pre-Startup Compliance Review when the change is managed using an outside process 2. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. during impleL men tation of the change through another process. o iaising with the Gatekeeper.4 Th e Performance Unit Technical Authority Framework: o The key roles in the CGPU Technical Authority framework supporting MOC practice are Engineering Authorities.4.1 e Engineering Authority’s responsibilities Th for MOC practice are: • echnical approval authority for MOC practice T proposals defined as “high” risk • ssures compliance with the engineering aspects A of Management of Change 2.2 e Technical Authority’s responsibilities for Th MOC practice are: • echnical approval authority for MOC practice T proposals defined as “medium” risk providing: o Independent assessment of the risks associated with the proposed change o Review of the key documents related to the 71 MOC o Attesting that the change has been controlled within the scope of the original MOC assessment. or that any changes to the original scope have been adequately assessed . Technical Authorities and Technical Reviewers o The roles and responsibilities of these authorities are detailed in the CGPU Engineering and Technical Authorities Register o The Register can be accessed through the following web link: Technical Authorities Register Rev 2 2. to ensure adequate resources are available o Assisting the SPA or Gatekeeper to document the Pre-Startup Compliance Review 2.4. 4.1 The SmartMOC software program developed by Dya dem International. All facilities are encouraged to utilize the SmartMOC program as it insures management of the process. The software can be accessed at the following website: SmartMOC Log-in Page 4. is the database that supports MOC practice in the CGPU.0 3. A log-in name and password are required to access the software and can be obtained from your PSMC. proposed change o Specification of the maximum implementation period for temporary modifications o Independent technical arbitration 2. in relationship with CGPU.3 e Technical Reviewer’s responsibilities for Th MOC practice are: • ct as the point of contact for MOC practice A requests at the facility level within their assigned discipline for changes defined as “low” risk • rovide requested technical advice and recomP mendations within the required time frame • pecify the maximum duration permitted for S temporary deviations • articipate in Process Hazards Analyses as is apP propriate • hair or participate in Management of Change C technical and safety reviews • ct as point of contact for new projects in area of A competency • valuate risk associated with each decision or E recommendation carefully and base technical recommendations on reasonable risk Supporting Technology MOC 3.0 Process Description 72 .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. the Initiator has the greatest knowlA edge of the change and needs to communicate that information in sufficient detail to eliminate delays in the evaluation of the change and include any supporting or relevant documentation • The Initiator should: o Identify the type of change: Technical. o A unique file number will be generated by Smart MOC • efine the reason or scope of the proposed D change by including any relevant history or background of the problem or opportunity and any other pertinent information • dentify the high-level risks they may be aware I 73 MOC . SmartMOC automates this workflow so that as each step is completed. Administrative* or Organizational* o Identify the implementation type: Permanent. Temporary* or Emergency* o Identify the location of the change. 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2 Initiation Step: • ny BP employee or full time contractor in A CGPU may initiate a change proposal under the MOC practice • t this stage. the date initiated. The database can be searched to identify the equipment affected by the change o Identify a title for the change. 4.1 ll potential changes that are assessed by the MOC A practice are carried out through the following main process steps. the change advances to the next step and advises the identified resource to expedite the change. their name and if they are representing others o martMOC shares the Maximo equipment S database. the Approval Authority then endorses the change in principal. • uggest a high-level plan for achieving the S change. equipment shutdown. MOC • nclude the potential opportunities presented I by the proposed change to improve things like safety. production. of associated with the change during its implementation. taking into account Performance context. etc. hot work required.g.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. I This will generally be the Initiator’s direct report supervisor. environment. e. but can be whomever is appropriate to approve the change being proposed • ecord the details in the Initiator Section of the R SmartMOC program and attach any supporting documentation * NOTE: Not available in Phase 1 deployment of SmartMOC. assigns a suitable Facilitator to carry out the Change Assessment. integrity.3 Preliminary Approval Step: o Based on the details presented in the Initiator section the Approval Authority assesses if the change proposal is worthwhile. How would you make the change? • Estimate the cost of the change • dentify the Preliminary Approval Authority. and sets the initial workflow schedule o If the Approval Authority rejects the proposal. 4. the reason for rejection is recorded and the process terminated with the feedback being given to the Initiator 74 . but the type can be noted in the comments section and a task created for the removal date of a temporary change. likely cost and benefits o If satisfied. etc. MOC This should include: o Further clarification of the scope of the change if required o The assumptions associated with the change o Whether or not the change has been undertaken before o The rationale behind the assessment technique selected o The risks that are associated with all stages of the change o The mitigation measures required o The plan to put in place the mitigation measures and the change o Recommendations to proceed or reject the 75 . o Record the details in the Approval Section of the SmartMOC program 4. Additional guidance on Process o Hazard Analysis is available at the following web link: http://psmcanada.bp. the Facilitator O will instigate the change assessment: o nsure that the scope of the change and supE porting information is clear o nsure that all relevant information required E to assess the risks are identified and gathered o Notify the appropriate evaluation personnel and/or Technical Authorities o Carry out the risk assessment with the appropriate personnel o Select the appropriate method for risk assessment.com • detailed record of the assessment should be atA tached to the SmartMOC file by the Facilitator.4 Change Assessment Step - General: • n acceptance of the assignment.bpweb.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. in- MOC 4. time. safety and environmental protection program. and vigorous process safety and integrity management systems o dentify and include effects of the change on I the Emergency Response Plan o Identify the Process Safety Information or other documentation that will need to be produced or updated as a result of the change 4. A list of trained Facilitators within CGPU is available at the following web link: BP CGPU Facilitators o ake an initial determination of the risk level M to identify the level of Technical Authority required to approve the change o Review safe process start-up. change o Recommendations on the way that the modification should be implemented o ecommendations for the SPA and/or the R Gatekeeper Change Assessment Step - Technical Change: • nly a trained Facilitator can perform certain O types of Process Hazard Analyses.6 Change Assessment Step - Organizational Change: • e key objective is to ensure that the changed Th organization has the resources (human.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. operation and shutdown in the full range of foreseeable conditions and scenarios including upsets to insure the risks are reduced to as low as reasonably practicable (ALARP) o Review all activities required to maintain facility in a safe condition during the change o Identify all activities required to insure a fully functioning health.5 76 . processes I and procedures • nsure ISO-14001 document requirements are E met if they are affected Change Recommendation Step: • e Facilitator determines if there is a need to Th identify a different Approval Authority based on the category and ranking of the greatest risk identified in the assessment • e Facilitator meets with the Approval AuthorTh ity and briefs them on the output of the assessment • ased on the results of the change assessment. B the Facilitator recommends whether the risks associated with the change can be managed • t this session the Approval Authority should A make a check on the quality of the assessment and documentation • e implementation route for the change should Th MOC 77 .8 Change Assessment Step - Administrative Change: • dentify affected documents.). competency and motivation to deliver without making unrealistic expectations of people • e risk assessment should use two approaches: Th o apping of tasks and individuals from the old M to the new organization o Scenario assessments should be made where the reorganization impacts staff that may have a role in handling or responding to crises such as upsets and emergencies o A knowledge based checklist to aid in assessing organizational change are available at the following web link: Organizational Change Checklist 4. systems. formation.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. etc.7 4. the Approval AuthorB ity is confirming that funding for the change is also sanctioned • f not approved to proceed. the Approval AuB thority is responsible for deciding if the change is justified • f it is. the Approval Authority A will identify the Assurance role • e Assurance Role will verify that all the Th requirements identified in the process to manage the change and its risks are completed satisfactorily and there is a clear.10 Assurance Step: • s part of the handover.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. transparent audit trail 78 . The workflow manager tracks the completion of the change and monitors subsequent steps in the process and sends reminders if critical timelines approach • ecord the details in the Assessment Section R of the SmartMOC program and attach any checklists or PHA files developed Sanctioning the Change Step: • ased on the review meeting. Other processes can include the Project Management Plan or other internal/external process • y sanctioning the change. also be discussed at the meeting MOC • e risk ranking also sets the workflow manager Th in SmartMOC. the Approval I Authority records the decision not to implement the change and informs the Facilitator and the Initiator • ecord the details in the Approval Section of R SmartMOC 4. then the Approval Authority decides I whether the change will be implemented using this MOC practice or another process.9 4. 4. organizing. Th 79 MOC . and the W Approval Authority decides that it can be implemented within this MOC practice. through supporting documentation • is assurance is defined in the Records AssurTh ance Form and the Pre-Startup Compliance Review documentation • e Assurance Role will perform this verification Th step regardless of how the change is implemented • ecord the details in the Assurance Section of R SmartMOC.12 andover for Implementation Using the MOC pracH tice: • hen a change has been sanctioned. the job will be handed over to the Single Point Accountable person to implement the change • hanges that are implemented using the MOC C practice remain the responsibility of the Approval Authority • e SPA is responsible for planning.11 Handover Step: • nce approval has been given for the impleO mentation the information and risks associated with the change are communicated to the person responsible for implementing the change • ere are two types of handover associated with Th change management: o anding over the assessment using the MOC H practice to an Single Point Accountable (SPA) person to implement the change o Handing over the remaining change management activity to a Gatekeeper for another supporting process or procedure to manage the change • ecord the details in the Handover Section of R SmartMOC 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and the W Approval Authority decides that it will be implemented outside this MOC practice.13 andover for Implementation by a Supporting H Process or Procedure: • hen a job has been sanctioned.14 Close Out Step: • hanges that are sanctioned and managed within C 80 . the equipment should be made safe and an additional MOC practice raised to consider the additional changes required • Record the details in the SPA Section of SmartMOC 4. leading and controlling all resources associated with completing the change: MOC o e SPA can utilize SmartMOC to manage Th tasks associated with completing the change o PHA recommendations can be uploaded and managed in SmartMOC directly from PHA Pro software if it was utilized to record the hazard analysis • f at any time the SPA cannot make the change I within the defined scope. the change will be handed over to a Gatekeeper for implementation in another supporting process or procedure • e supporting process is responsible for delivery Th of the change • hanges that are implemented in this way C become the responsibility of the Gatekeeper • hanges to be implemented by supporting proC cesses or procedures will not be closed out in the MOC practice until signed off by the Approval Authority • Record the details Gatekeeper Section of SmartMOC 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. they will inform the Approval Authority that the change has been completed within the scope of the assessment and that the associated work and documentation is complete • e Approval Authority will review the change Th and confirm acceptance of the change by signing off the MOC practice file as complete • e records of the MOC practice will be kept Th until the end of the facility’s life • ecord the details in the Completion Section R of SmartMOC 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. For a list of these helpful and knowledgeable individuals access the following web link: MOC practice Coordinators by Area 81 MOC the MOC practice. e-Training modules have been developed and are accessed at the following web link: Management of Change Practice Training 5. • hen the Assurance role has verified the change W is complete.2 SmartMOC also has a comprehensive “Help” screen system that explains the software in detail.3 Super Users” have been identified for each Operat“ ing Centre and staff department in Calgary to aid personnel with the transition to the new procedure and software. To facilitate the training. or another process. 5.0 Support for Management of Change 5.1 Training for awareness of MOC practice is manda tory for all CGPU personnel. will be kept open until the SPA or Gatekeeper informs the Assurance Role that the change and all supporting documentation is completed . or delegate. will monitor compliance with the MOC practice on an annual basis to confirm: • e process is being correctly applied Th • ppropriate risk assessment processes are being A conducted • echnical Authorities are being involved approT priately • emporary and permanent MOC practice’s are T closed out in a timely manner Online Reference Documents • HSSEr requirements of MOC g Getting HSSE Right • SIM Practice Implementation Guide P Element 2 - MOC • -Training Modules for MOC E Management of Change Training • ngineering & Tech.0 • martMOC software SmartMOC Log-in Page S 82 . 6.g. all formal documentation was completed within 90 days of start-up) • umber of high risk MOC practice’s whose N close-out is overdue Audit and Performance Review Th e Engineering Authority for CGPU (Manager. Technical Integrity Group).0 6.1 MOC Performance Measurement The performance of the system will be assessed using the following Key Performance Indicators: • umber of MOC practice’s closed out in time N (e. Authorities Register E Technical Authorities Register Rev 2 • elegation of Authority for MOC D Approval Authority for MOC 7.1 8.0 7.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. bp.bpweb. • rocess Hazard Analysis Manual PSM/PHA P • GPU PHA Facilitators BP CGPU Facilitators C MOC • OC practice Coordinators by Area M MOC Coordinators by Area • OC practice for DCS & SCADA Changes M MOC for SCADA Change Worksheet • o I need an MOC? D Technical MOC Decision Tree http://psmcanada.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.com Forms • anagement of Organizational Change Checklist M gHSSEr MF36101 • Pre-Start-up Compliance Review gHSSEr MF 36104 • HSSE Review Checklist HSSEMF36102 • Technical Review Checklist HSSEMF36103 • ecords Assurance Checklist HSSEMF36105 R • hemical Assessment & Ranking Tool C gHSSEr MF36106 • hecklist for Organizational Change C Organizational Change Checklist 9.0 • quipment Specific Knowledge Based Checklists E Equipment Checklists 83 . Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Figure 1 Process Safety Management Technical Integrity Group Canada Gas Performance Unit M A N A G E M E N T O F C H A N G E MOC Technical Management of Change Decision Tree 84 . Figure 2 85 MOC .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Figure 3 MOC 86 .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The types of permits covered in this Practice are: • Hot work permits • Cold work permits • Confined space permits • Ground disturbance permits The types of hazard assessments covered in this Practice are: • Permit to Work and Hazard Assessment • Procedure • Job Safety Environmental Analysis (JSEA) • Stop Think Go • Time Out for Safety 1.5 87 Permit to Work PERMIT TO WORK AND HAZARD ASSESSMENT PRACTICE .2 1. contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on CGPU premises and work sites.1 Scope and applicability This practice applies to all BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees. 1.3 1. Th e purpose of this practice is to ensure that CGPU employees.4 1. This practice addresses issuing and obtaining permits to work within the CGPU and requirements for completing task level hazard assessments.0 1. contracted employees. and contractor staff use the proper permit to work and complete an adequate task hazard assessment for the particular job being undertaken.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. contracted employees. 1 2. The PIC is an onsite 2. In the case of major projects. P erson in Charge (PIC)- The PIC is appointed by the AA to be responsible for coordinating among multiple PAs and IAs working at one site to confrim safe delivery of all work activities.0 2. P erforming Authority (PA)- The PA is the person who has been assigned by the AA to be responsible for activities carried out on the work site. In special cases the PA may also be the IA if competent in the practice and requirements in question.2 2. and is accountable to the IA/AA for the safe delivery of all work activities. in consultation with the AA.3 2. in consultation with the OCM or Wells Team Leader. Definitions A rea Authority (AA)- The Area Authority is the person appointed by the OCM or Wells Team Leader for confirming all work activities conducted are consistent with the COW Practice and associated practices and permit requirements.4 88 .6 Permit to Work Refer to North America Gas SPU Control of Work Practice for requirements around permitted activities and risk assessment requirements. 1. I ssuing Authority (IA)- The Issuing Authority is the person appointed by the OCM or Wells Team Leader- and assigned by the AA for issuing permits consistent with all associated practice and permit requirements.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Tha PA may be performing a task or may be supervising a group that is performing a task. the Project Manager. This role can be delegated to another person who is a BP Employee or contractor. the Project Manager. In the case of major projects. will assign the AA. will assign the IA. IA. or one of the PA’s.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.6 3. BP JSEA are documented on form gHSSEr MF34002 and BP NAG JSEA’s are documented here- NA Gas JSEA Process. closed. and Major Project Manager is accountable for ensuring that: • work permit and hazard assessment system A is implemented to control the hazards at the worksite • orkers are appropriately trained and competent W in its use The Area Authority will: • nsure that a proper permit is issued for the type E of work being undertaken and that everyone involved is aware of the hazards.0 3. J ob Safety Environmental Analysis/(JSEA) – A document that has been approved for use by the BP representative in charge or by a contractor that details the job steps. 2. Scope of Responsibility and Accountability E ach Operating Center Manager.1 3. The PIC can be the AA.2 89 Permit to Work individual that has working knowledge of all work activities being performed by all groups/personnel working on location. E and filed • dentify a Person in Charge (PIC) for each I 2. Wells Team Leader. . controls and emergency procedures • nsure appropriate permits are issued. hazards and controls.5 P rocedure – A step by step description of how to proceed from start to finish in performing a task properly. g cold work. inspection and V checking of the work site is completed prior to the work permit being issued • nsure that the work area is inspected and E checked after the job is completed e Issuing Authority (IA) is accountable for ensurTh ing that: • orkers are aware of STOP-THINK-GO and W Time Out for Safety from their Level 1 indoctrination and feel comfortable being able to use those tools • orkers are indoctrinated/orientated prior to W work starting and have all the required tickets and certifications for the job or task • ere is proper issuance and closure of permits Th in their area of competnecy. ground disturbance. or critical lifting • ey are on site for permit issuance and then as Th required as per specific task requirements 3.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 90 . or will be. confined space entry. Permit to Work worksite prior to commencement of activity and approve any replacements • ssign a compenent Issuing Authority (IA) A and/or Performing Authority (PA) for each work site and/or activity • onfirm with the IA that all appropriate control C measures have been. put in place prior to commencement of activity • equire that the IA and site work group perform R a risk assessment and agree that needed risk mitigation has occurred and that the work can proceed safely • nsure an assessment of the hazards associated E with the work being performed and control measures are identified as part of the permitting process • erify that all required testing. e. hot work. and who is in charge • erifying the permit and hazard assessment is V reviewed by all workers associated with the job prior to them starting work on the job. communicated. the original scope of work The Performing Authority (PA) is responsible for: • onfirming that the following have been clearly C established. and for understanding and following the conditions of the permit • nsuging adequate handovers take place between E ingoing and outgoing PAs at shift and crew 3. controls.e. SIMOPS • ere is good cummunication with the AA about Th the issuance and closure of permits • ll site personnel involved in a work activity are A competent and correctly oufitted for the wok they will perform. what procedures and policies will be followed (e.g. and mitigations • e correct tools and equipment are available Th and appropriate certifications and/or inspections are reviewed or made as appropriate • e required permits are in place and that Th work undertaken on site is consistent with. and confined to. even if they were not present while completing the permit • nforming the Issuing Authority of any changes I in conditions. hazards. what permit tracking system will be used).4 91 Permit to Work • ey review with all site personnel a site specific Th emergency response plan .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. imcluding any work that is under someone else’s authority/control. and understood: a process for the transfer of Control of Work between work groups. • orkers have clear understanding of the scope of W work. • oordinate with the PIC and maintain full C knowledge of all work in progress in the area concerned. i. there will be representation from each team during the risk assessment • bserving work activities and if an individual O feels that he/she cannot safely manage more than one concurrent task. and controls for the job • onfirming that all members of the work party C sign the permit • onfirming that only work within the scope of C the permit takes place • onfirming that the worksite is kept in a clean C and safe condition both during and upon completion of the job • onfirming that appropriate lessions learned C from the job are captured.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. incorporated. or Major Project Manager to use their permitting 3. In the event that there is more than one work team. that all persons involved in the task fully understand the scope of the work. hazards.5 92 . They must receive written authority from the Operating Center Manager. Wells Team Leader. and shared • onforming all workers involved in the permitC ted work activity sign the JSEA and permits(s) acknowledging their understanding and agreement. by including in the JSEA discusC sion. stop the appropriate portions is assigned work and request assistance from the IA/AA Th e Person in Charge (PIC) is responsible for ensuring that their permitting system meets this Practice and complies with the CGPU permit to work system. change periods Permit to Work • ccepting and signing authorized permits for the A work activity being performed • articipating in the risk assessment for the P planned activity • onfirming. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. .0 4. conflicting jobs in the area and availability of fire fighting equipment. Th e work area should be inspected for all hazards by the Issuing Authority prior to issuing the permit. Items for consideration include the hazards associated with a potentially flammable atmosphere.4 93 Permit to Work system at a CGPU work site. Orientations & Monitoring). Otherwise. The 4. presence of combustible materials. and appropriate equipment has been secured for the shift Scope of Expectations A ll workers will acquire the appropriate permit and conduct the appropriate hazard assessment for the type of work they are about to perform. permits are closed. need for isolation and/or purging.2 4.1 4. A ll workers are instructed on work permitting and hazard assessment requirements as part of their site-specific orientation training (see gHSSEr MS312 – Indoctrinations. The Person in Charge will: • unction as a liason between all personnel and F groups on location • oordinate any issues that could result in a C change in work scope with the AA • onfirm that all people working on site have C reviewed and signed the JSEA(s)/permits and verified that the appropriate permits have been completed • emain on site until work activities have R stopped. Th e Issuing Authority keeps the green and white copies of the permit and hazard assessment. the CGPU permit to work system will be used.3 4. 3 94 . See section 6. In Part 1. Completing the Work Permit and Hazard Assessment Th e work permit form. the Issuing Authority indicates if the job is completed. This expectation does not apply for work that is self-permitted. At the end of the work.1 5.0 for more information. the equipment is ready to be started and the work area is cleaned. The form is completed with input from all people participating in the job. gHSSEr MF 88001 has four main parts. its name or number should be referenced right after the question “Procedure/JSEA available”. If a procedure or JSEA exists that covers all or part of the job. receiver keeps the goldenrod copy of the permit and hazard assessment when doing the work and they will return the form when the work is completed or it is the end of the shift. 4. A ll permits and hazard assessments become void if an emergency occurs at the location that may or may not be related to the scope of work covered by that specific permit and hazard assessment form. Complete the basic job information in Part 1.6 5.0 5. P art 3 must be completed for all jobs that require a work permit unless the job falls into one of the two exceptions outlined in sections 5.8.5 A new permit is issued at the beginning of every shift. This document must be reviewed prior to starting the job. When the work is completed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. check all Golden Rules that apply to the job. the green copy of the form may be provided to the contractor for their records.5 or 5.2 5. Permit to Work 4. the potential hazards associated with each step and the controls needed to prevent the potential adverse effect on people and the environment in Part 3: • n the first column. 5. See appendix 1 for more information on the intent of each question. procedures I or actions the team will take to control the hazard associated with the job step in the third column • f part 3 does not provide sufficient space for I identifying job steps.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. For questions 17 – 28. Using the hazards identified in Part 2. use form gHSSEr MF 34002 either as a separate 5. list the basic tasks for the job in order and identify what is to be done. list the controls. consider the hazards asI sociated with the job. The procedure or JSEA must be referenced in Part 1 and reviewed prior to starting the job.4 5. focus on each job task and identify actual and potential hazards including hazards from the job itself. hazards and controls.5 I f an approved procedure or JSEA covering the scope of the entire job exists. list the job steps. if the answer to the question is yes than the control required to mitigate the hazard must be identified in the column to the right of the question. . completion of Part 3 is not required.7 95 Permit to Work P art 3 should be completed after the work area is inspected. hazards from the work area. describe the work identified I on the Permit. not how to do it • n the second column. Review the questions in Part 2 and check each as applicable or not applicable to the job.6 5. chemical hazards and physical hazards • n the third column. 9 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Part 3 is not to be completed and a job specific JSEA using form gHSSEr MF 34002 must be completed: • obs which require a rescue plan (not a response J plan but a job where physical rescue may be required such as class 2 or 3 confined space. 5.8 I f the job involves any of the following.11 At the conclusion of the job or at the end of the shift. work requiring SCBA/SABA) • obs which require entry into a Class 2 or 3 J confined space • Jobs which require ground disturbance • Jobs which require critical lift plans • obs where the BP or contractor representative J deem that an additional hazard assessment is required The required atmospheric testing must be completed as per section 7. 5. the 3 questions (Job Completed. Permit to Work document or stamped on the back of the Goldenrod copy of the form 5. 96 . 5. Work Area Cleaned. work at heights using fall arrest. it should be approved for on-going use by the BP representative in charge.10 ach person that participated in the permit and E hazard assessment must print their name and initial in Part 4.5 and documented on Part 4 of the work permit. Contractor Locks Removed) located at the bottom of the work permit should be checked yes or no and the form returned to the Issuing Authority.12 f the JSEA developed for the job is deemed apI propriate for future use. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. ground disturbance (if the worker has current Level 2 ground disturbance training). Self permitting is not allowed for any job requiring entry into a class 2 or 3 confined space. hot work. Workers must follow this Practice but are allowed to issue their own permits and document their own hazard assessments for certain work.4 6.5 6. energy isolation. 6. In order for a worker to issue their own permits. they must have a Level 2 Indoctrination and have demonstrated a level of competence in completing the job to the BP representative in charge or designate. S elf-permitting can be conducted by BP employees.3 6. lifting and work at heights where worker safety is addressed through engineering controls. At these locations. S elf-permitting cannot be conducted on a location where operating staff attend the facility for the majority of a shift.2 6. The worker requiring the permit must contact the Permit to Work 6. full time equivalent contractors (FTEs) and other designated contractors.1 Scope of Self-Permitting M any activities conducted in the Gas Business Unit are done in isolation of other workers. A self-issued permit can be prepared for any job involving cold work.0 6.6 97 . Self permitting (working alone) is not allowed for any job requiring work at heights in which the fall protection plan does not address the provisions for self rescue in the event of an arresting fall. the Issuing Authority issues the permit to the worker to ensure proper communication in the event of simultaneous operations or conflicting jobs. riveting.1 Scope of Hot Work Permits Hot Work means: • utting. 6. chipping.8 6. 6.6 and 6. Permit to Work Issuing Authority for the location prior to starting work to advise of the work being conducted and determine potential hazards to the worker. Each location is clearly identified on Part 1 of the form and the worker discusses each location with the Issuing Authority prior to starting work that day. one permit can be completed for the entire day. air gouging.9 6. 7. Requirements 6. Arrangements are made to provide a copy of the completed permit to the Issuing Authority. buffing • the use of non-classified electrical equipment • he introduction to a work process of a combust tion engine • ny other work where flame is used or sparks are a 98 .0 7. If the worker is visiting more than one location in a day to perform a similar task. he or she reviews the permit to assess if all hazards have been identified and updates the form and implements the new hazard controls. When the worker arrives at each location. the worker signs off the permit and contacts the Issuing Authority to advise the status of the work and that the worker is leaving location.7 O nce the job is complete. burning.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.7 do not apply if the work is being done by the Issuing Authority. c drilling. welding. grinding.10 Other site specific requirements such as working alone procedures and working with H2S will also apply when self-permitting. 4 7.1 99 . The safety standby person must have immediate access to emergency equipment such as a fire extinguisher. please reference Safety Standby in SSPM. Work must be completed to eliminate the source of the gas release. The only duty of the safety standby person is to observe the job and be able to communicate with others should assistance be required. H2S and LEL hazards are done and that tests are documented at regular intervals (i. Scope of Cold Work Permits Cold work permits are issued for work where there is no danger for fire or explosion based on the tools 7. For more information. Where atmospheric testing is required during hot work and confined space work.2 • work on electric cables and equipment Hot Work Permits are issued where the atmosphere could become in excess of 0% LEL and/or there is a potential for a fire and/or explosion. prior to starting work and after each break as a minimum). produced Permit to Work 7.e. U nder no circumstances will any hot work activity be permitted where LEL is greater than 10%. A safety standby person may be required as per site specific procedures for any hot work to be performed.0 8. The test results must be documented on form gHSSEr MF 88001.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 7.5 8. the employer will ensure that continuous monitoring of oxygen. gas detector and two-way radio or other means of communication. or if electricity or static charges exists. SOCs.) • aily.e. Permit to Work and equipment being used for the job and the atmosphere will remain normal for human respiration.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 8.3 9. No permit is required for the following jobs: • A worker taking readings • worker making external adjustments to the A process (changing valve positions. See Confined 8. Wells Team Leader (if applicable).1 100 .0 9. review of new facilities installation). HSSE inspections. Major Project Manager (if applicable). the BP safety coordinator and at least one representative of the affected workers Scope of Confined Space Permits Confined space permits are issued for entry into a Class 2 or Class 3 confined space. equipment settings etc. A permit is required if photos will be taken in a potentially explosive atmosphere • dditions may be made to the above list by area A management after a documented hazard assessment of the work is completed and reviewed by a team consisting of the Area Authority. Examples include lifting. entry into a Level 1 confined space and work at heights. the Operating Center Manager. weekly and monthly housekeeping activiD ties • P tradesperson working in their respective B shops unless their work meets the definition of hot work • worker taking other visitors on a tour of a A facility for the sole purpose of observation (i.2 The atmosphere must remain normal for human respiration. 1 Ground disturbance permits are issued for any work operation or activity that results in a disturbance of the earth. 11. insert an expected end U date • omplete Part 2 only to reflect the hazards of the C location at the time of the turn over: o Identify if multiple types of operations will need to take place at the location and the procedure for checking-in with the area authority (i.0 Changing Area Authority 11. Space Practice gHSSEr MS820 for complete details.0 Scope of Ground Disturbance Permits Permit to Work 10.1 A work permit and hazard assessment is required when the area authority for an existing lease discharges their accountabilities to wells or construction. location and time • nder work description. company leases. 10. See Ground Disturbance Practice gHSSEr MS840 for complete details.e. 11. It applies to all pipeline right-of-ways. For example.2 The following components of the permit are completed to document a lease turn-over: • The date. construction sites.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. well work and daily operator checks) o Identify any concerns or potential hazards with permanent equipment or materials on-site and document any energy isolation applied o dentify if there are WHMIS controlled prodI 101 . during a workover of an existing well or when construction is taking place at an existing location. 1 People with SOC training can use the SOC process to provide assurance that the permit to work Practice is followed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 12.0 Assurance Process 12. 10. 7. please reference SSPM Well F Work – Hand over between operations and Wells Teams. This task should be completed after the condition of the site is reviewed by the two Area Authorities. 12. and the date and initials of the person accepting the lease should be written near the check-box. 11. 23. 19. 25. the “job completed” box should be checked yes on the original form. ucts on-site as part of permanent operations Permit to Work o Identify the linkage of site activities with the emergency response plan for the area o uestions 2.3 o discharge area authority accountabilities back to T the original area authority. 11. 27. 24. 20. 12. 13. 4. Q 22. 28 must be answered to reflect the status of the lease and the hazards associated with the permanent equipment on-site • Part 3 does not need to be completed • single atmospheric test should be completed A and documented prior to lease turn-over • e issuer is the current area authority and the Th receiver is the new area authority 11.4 or more information. 21.2 All workers can use the job observation process to provide assurance that the permit to work Practice is 102 . An SOC can be conducted while a job is in progress to link the hazards identified in the discussion with what is documented on the permit. 13.5 HSSEr MS 312 - Indoctrinations.C.bpweb.com/NAG:/content/hse/on shore/documents/K0000002586 103 Permit to Work followed.2 .1 lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as A amended 14. all work permits and A hazard assessment forms and associated documents are signed off in accordance with the permit and retained in the field office for a period 13 months. .1 fter the work is completed.3 gHSSEr MS820 - Confined Space Practice 14. A job observation can be conducted while a job is in progress.6 AG SPU Control of Work (COW) Policy N http://docs.0 Scope of References 14.0 Record Keeping 13. 14. Occupational Health and Safety Regulations B and Guidelines 296/97 as amended 14.bp. after the permit to work and hazard assessment form has been completed or at the conclusion of the job to verify that the steps required for completing a permit were followed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Orientations and g Monitoring 14.4 gHSSEr MS840 - Ground Disturbance Practice 14. The following lists each question on the form. work at heights or use of mobile equipment in an area with heavy foot traffic. Safety Stand by required? Name • or jobs that require a designated safety stand-by. The questions were chosen because they represent the majority of the hazards in our various worksites and they build on learning’s identified during incident investigations. F this question should be checked yes. If the question is answered as yes. Questions 17-28 require a yes. no. 15.1 HSSEr MF 88001 - Permit to Work and Hazard g Assessment Form 15. the control measures required to mitigate the hazard must be identified. and provides some interpretation on how to answer it.2 gHSSEr MF84001 - Ground Disturbance Permit 15. or not applicable to the job.4 NAG JSEA Form NA Gas JSEA Process Appendix 1 – Details on the Intent of Work Permit and Hazard Assessment Questions Part 2 of the work permit and hazard assessment form contains 28 questions. In some cases. no. a line has been added so brief details for that question can be identified. This might include entry into a class 2 or 3 confined space.0 Permit to Work Forms 15. or not applicable to the job answer and for all questions answered yes.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 gHSSEr MF84001 - Confined Space Entry Permit 15. Questions 1-16 are simple questions that can be answered yes. 1. the name of the safety stand-by 104 . Part 3 should identify the controls required for ensuring adequate communication between different activities. It should be clear to all workers if additional PPE is required at all times during the job or only during specific times. 5. 2.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If any boxes are checked. . • is question is focused on air quality. 4. I s additional PPE required? Face/eyes Chemical Protection Hands/Gloves Respiratory Fall Protection 3. A rea safe for personnel/vehicle entry? Record test below. Oxygen. The roles and responsibilities for that worker need to be reviewed prior to work starting. Th LEL and H2S (if applicable) should be checked prior to work commencing and documented on Part 4 of the form. H ave conflicting activities/simultaneous operations been identified? List: • f there are other activities in the area that this I work will be taking place or simultaneous operations in the same area. step off don’t jump off. • e minimum required PPE is listed near the top Th of the form. 105 Permit to Work should be written on the document. Will workers be getting down from equipment or climbing off of equipment? 3-point contact. This question addresses other PPE that may be required. a space is provided to specifically identify the item or items of PPE that are required. A separate SIMOPS plan may need to be developed. the question should be answered yes and those other activities listed in the space provided. this location should be noted on the form. 6. S If materials are being transferred from one area to another or if there is a second muster point close to where the work will be taking place. 106 . If workers need to access work areas or equipment at heights. Do workers need job specific certifications? • ocumented training is required for some D jobs in addition to what is asked at the Level 1 indoctrination (H2S and WHMIS). permit area) • ome jobs require work in multiple locations. assembly points. The MSDS does not need to be at the work site but the information must be available to workers by phone or radio.e. 7. • e MSDS for all WHMIS Controlled products Th must be reviewed before handling these materials so adequate controls may be put in place such as ventilation or PPE.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. crane operator. M SDS for WHMIS Controlled products affecting job is available and understood? List WHMIS controlled products. Have all locations that pertain to the job been reviewed? (Secondary locations-dump sites. this question reinforces the need to descend using caution and maintaining a 3-point contact. Permit to Work • significant number of recordable injuries are A related to workers getting down from equipment at various heights. Tickets demonstrating training must be verified. confined space) answer the question yes and list the training required on the space in the form. first aid. 8. If specific certifications are required (i. • ll tools and equipment required for the job A should be identified prior to the job starting. it should be either repaired or destroyed. H ave all job-related cathodic protection and/or overhead/underground power lines been located and identified? • ll power lines near the work area need to be A identified prior to work starting and controls put in place to ensure that power lines will not be contacted during the work. If a tool or piece of equipment is not suitable for use. 107 Permit to Work Have all tools and equipment that pertain to the job been identified and checked to be in good condition? Certifications checked if appropriate. In some cases. certifications are required such as crane inspections. all jobs requiring the use of heavy equipment (i. 9. Fire eyes/gas detectors bypassed? • ire eyes and/or gas detectors may need to be byF passed for certain jobs involving hot work inside a building. The condition of tools and equipment should be checked by the person that will be using them. H ave all underground piping/obstructions been identified? • nderground piping. tanks and lines need to be U identified for all jobs involving ground disturbance.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. a crane and outriggers) and for all jobs using mobile equipment as striking or driving over an underground obstruction can lead to significant injury and/or property damage. 11. 10. . and the document should be reviewed prior to issuing the permit and hazard assessment. 12. Additional procedures may need to be followed to by-pass these safety devices.e. 17. tools and equipment should be reviewed so areas where people need to walk are kept free of hazards. 108 . Have the risks of working alone been assessed? • f a worker will be working alone. tools. cables. the controls for those hazards and their role in promoting a safe and environmentally friendly work atmosphere. 15. hoses. The document should be completed prior to starting the job and attached to this form. H ousekeeping - cords. one person needs to be designated to review the contents of this form with those workers so they understand the hazards of the jobs. material or debris controlled and out of the path of workers.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 16. this question I must be answered yes and the control measures 14. If the answer is yes. who is responsible to update these workers? • f some workers will be joining the work site at I a later time. identify using a check box which additional permit is required. Are additional permits required? Ground disturbance Confined space Critical lift • is question is a double check of the Golden Th Rules identified in Part 1 of the form. Permit to Work Protection of all sewer catch basins and floor drains? • is question must be answered yes when doing Th welding inside a building or near any outdoor sewer catch basins that could contain hydrocarbon. Are all personnel involved with the job participating in the pre-job meeting? If no. 13. • ules around housekeeping specific to the job R and the materials. pulling. The work area including any seasonal influences should be reviewed and controls put in place to maximize traction. Review proper lifting techniques.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Review any specific hazards and rules of the road for that day. If this type of work is required. 21. Can personnel be placed in line of fire? (struck by protruding. trips and falls. or fall to the same level or to the area below? • is question links too many of the recordable Th injuries that have occurred as a result of slips. Are there driving hazards associated with the job? • is will be yes for almost all jobs to cover the Th drive to the work site or the drive home. 18. pulling. sharp edges. . consider if mechanical devices can be used to reduce the chance of strain. Are personnel at risk of slip. 20. objects falling. • is question links too many of the recordable Th injuries that have occurred as a result of manual lifting. Th It should first consider permanent hazards of 19. pushing or twisting. pushing or twisting. moving objects. Determine how heavy a load will be and the number of people required to lift it. 109 Permit to Work for ensuring that worker’s safety documented in the column to the right. caught in or between) • ere are many considerations for this question. trip. Is heavy manual lifting involved? Potential of injury due to over exertion or strain by lifting. Controls might include reviewing the local working alone procedures or establishing a communication plan with defined check-in intervals. H ave environmental controls/procedures necessary for spills/atmospheric release/waste been identified due to loss of containment. • f the job could result in a fire. Permit to Work the site equipment and then must consider the hazards of the job. Can personnel come in contact with an energy source or be exposed to hazardous material? • onsider energy sources and hazardous materials C in and around the work area. Controls might include energy isolation. If the job creates potential line of fire hazards. 25. using a spotter or using additional PPE. this question I should be answered as yes. 24. Steps should be taken to execute the job to minimize the chance of a fire starting. atmospheric reI lease or will generate waste. A re personnel working in the vicinity of mobile equipment? • f the answer to this question is yes. A re there fire hazards associated with the task? Equipment needed? Identify. failure of equipment or other form of release? • f the job could result in a spill. identify if additional 23.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 22. Hand signals between the spotter and driver must be reviewed. they need to be identified during the hazard assessment and controls put in place to reduce or eliminate the hazard. Appropriately sized extinguishers and other fire fighting equipment needs to be available and readily accessible for workers to ensure a safe exit from the area should a fire occur. controls I should include verifying that back-up alarms are fully functioning and a spotter is designated for the job. 110 . The control column should be used to identify how energy was isolated and reference site-specific practices and procedures for energy isolation. tag lines. 26. Identify what is needed at the job site to immediately address the emergency situation and ensure that equipment is available before starting the job. Is a rescue or environmental response plan required? List team and verify training. • is is in addition to the local ERP and would Th be required for jobs involving confined space entry. 27. The lift plan should consider equipment capabilities.e. etc. In some cases. I s materials/equipment required to be lifted by mechanical means? I. . • f materials will be lifted by mechanical means. the I type of energy isolation applied should be noted using the check boxes. some jobs requiring work at heights and jobs that involve handling large volumes of liquids that can have a negative impact on the environment if released. the need for spotters. E nergy isolation complete? Equipment de-pressured purged blinded lock-out tag out stored energy • f energy isolation is required for the job. hoist. 111 Permit to Work site-specific procedures need to be reviewed. bobcat. I document the controls required to ensure a safe lift.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. crane. 28. a brief overview of waste storage areas and segregation practices or material handling techniques needs to take place. com/files/ showdocument.bpweb. This includes employees using personal vehicles for company business. The standard is applicable to summer and co-op students.bp. full time equivalent contractors and office staff that may be traveling on company business. Vehicle and Road Practice VEHICLE STANDARD AND ROAD SAFETY PRACTICE 1.0 2. The purpose of this standard is to ensure BP CGPU and NGLBU employees. Personal. In this standard. Seat Belts must be worn at all times while a vehicle is in motion. GM. and rented vehicles must be A equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes and Standard Air Bags 1.1 112 . C larification: http://HSSE.1 Scope and Applicability This standard applies to all drivers operating vehicles for BP CGPU and NGLBU sites. contracted employees. these vehicles are referred to as “company vehicles”.2 2.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Dodge) authorized dealership while the vehicle is in the warranty period • ll BP.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=915 • lways refer to the vehicle owners’ service A manual for the proper maintenance inspections and required service • t is highly recommended that all vehicle mainI tenance be completed by the appropriate (Ford. Scope of Vehicle Standard Elements Vehicle Specifications-The vehicles must be fit for purpose and has been maintained in safe working condition with seatbelts installed and functional. contractors and other visiting personnel use vehicles in a safe manner.0 1. smoke. it is required that drivers turn on their headlights rather than relying on the vehicle’s daytime running lights.) 113 Vehicle and Road Practice . When traveling in the above conditions it is paramount to provide maximum visibility to third party drivers that may be traveling behind our vehicle • it for purpose also refers to using the right F vehicle for the right purpose.. snow. a bush guard will alter the effectiveness of the air bags. • onthly vehicle safety check sheets must be M filled out by the designated driver for that vehicle • ll drivers are required to complete daily vehicle A logs. lights and mirrors are clean • e vehicle must be equipped with tires properly Th selected and maintained for the driving conditions that could be experienced in the area. An example of this would be to use a 4 wheel drive truck to access a drilling rig at a remote site. • o alterations or modifications are to be made to N the vehicle that can affect the functionality of the vehicle safety equipment (E. dust or low light. During the period of November 1 to March 31 all BP vehicles and other vehicles being used on a full time basis within the Canadian Gas Performance Unit. complete monthly vehicle usage reports (per local area schedule) and report all personal and commuting mileage as requested • e driver will walk around their vehicle prior to Th each trip to check for potential hazards such as objects.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. people or other vehicles prior to driving and observe the condition of the vehicle such as tires and lights are in good working condition and that window. must be equipped with winter tires (see Appendix 2 Winter Tire Requirements in this Practice) • eadlights/Driving Lights – As a best practice H when driving in conditions that may include reduced visibility such as fog.g. 6 • ocal area management may determine that the L following items are appropriate based on risk assessment for that area: . tools or other cargo being transported in the cargo and passenger areas of all vehicles shall be secured to prevent serious injury to occupants.Auxiliary driving lights installed according to the Alberta Highway Traffic Act and Motor Transport Act . in the event of a sudden stop or an incident. NOTE: a cell phone or other two way communication device is not to be used when vehicle is in motion.3 114 .bpweb.High frequency deer whistles . and good adjustability of body position to provide ergonomically sound driving position • method of communication (cell phone A or radio) – may be portable or permanently installed. L oads-Loads are secure and do not exceed manufacturers specification and legal limits of the vehicle. All vehicles should be assessed to see if headache racks are needed and if so should be installed.A seat which provides good vibration dampening.bp. ‘ Exceptions will be allowed based on approval of local management . Vehicle and Road Practice • Additional vehicle specifications: - 4 Wheel Drive’ for all field service vehicles. lumbar support.2 Passengers-The number of passengers does not exceed the manufacturers specifications for the vehicle. All equipment. See section 2.Back up alarms 2. An exception would be when traveling on a road which requires the use of two way communication.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=916 2. C larification http://HSSE.com/files/showdocument.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. as this will cause side load • o not use a handle extender (cheater pipe) - see D instructions • o not attempt to close or open the binder with D more than one person . 2. safer ratchet-type load binder.Warnings and Application Instructions: • ailure to use load binders properly may result in F serious injury or even death to you or others • o not operate a load binder while standing on D the load • ove the handle with caution.Instructions . It may whip M – Keep all body parts clear • eep yourself out of the path of the moving K handle and any loose chain lying on the handle • ou must be familiar with state and federal Y regulations regarding size and number of chain systems required for securing loads on trucks • lways consider the safety of nearby workers as A well as yourself when using load binders • hile under tension.1 ecuring Of Loads (Load Binders) - BP CanS ada E&P has determined that the use of levertype load binders poses an unnecessary level of risk and shall be phased out of BP operations. .Ratchet Load Binders • anually unscrew the end hoods to get enough M reach • osition ratchet binder so it can be operated P 115 Vehicle and Road Practice .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. a load binder must not W bear against an object. Advances in equipment technology provide the opportunity for continual improvement by replacing lever-type load binders with the comparable.3. bp. re-tighten as needed .4 116 .bpweb. Vehicle and Road Practice from the ground. R cracks. If bending or cracks are present - Do not use load binder • outinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of R Lever Binders.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.Maintenance of All Load Binders • outinely check load binders for wear. check the tension of the load L binder frequently. S use clean gloves • Keep fingers and hands away from pawl and gear • aintain a buffer zone from the end of the M ratchet handle • ecure footing and stroke handle until desired S tension is achieved. handle extensions are prohibited • oads can shift.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=927 Operators of BP vehicles must provide proof of appropriate licence on annual basis. ideal placement is between waist & chest high • ttach one hook on the chain close to an anchor A point to minimize hook rotation • ake up as much slack as possible and hook the T chain to the opposite end of the load binder • et the pawl and start closing the load binder. bending.com/files/showdocument. trained and medically fit to operate the vehicle. nicks. or gouges. C larification:http://HSSE. and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend product life and reduce friction wear D river Training-All drivers are appropriately assessed licensed. After 2.g. On an exception basis drivers may be requested to provide a copy of the Driver’s Abstract (e. Areas must develop a plan for chaining requirements.): - Winter Driving .Backing . lease roads. etc.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and will be subject to discipline All drivers shall have their appropriate class of drivers licence and TDG or DOT certificate (if applicable) in their possession A risk assessment must be performed at each job site to determine what type of additional driving training is needed. Areas on roads must be identified which would be used for safe installa- - - - - 117 Vehicle and Road Practice .Sloped surfaces . a vehicle incident) It is the responsibility of the driver to inform their supervisor within the next working day of a drivers’ license suspension. mud. snow and ice.Reverse skidding - Fatigue and Journey Management - Deer and animal avoidance - Understanding 4 X 4’s All drivers shall have passed a BP approved drivers’ evaluation course (with skid control if available) prior to operating a BP vehicle. Failure to inform is considered a severe offence. The following are examples of the types to consider Adverse road conditions (gravel. All professional drivers shall complete a BP approved defensive driver training course as per the HSSE training matrix All areas within the BP Canada Gas Performance Unit will assess their roads as per Local Hazard Maps to determine which areas would require chaining on tires. 118 .bp. Things that should be considered are: o Winter driving conditions(November 1-March 1 minimum) 2.com/EMS/Competency%20Training/ FIELD%20TRAINING%20MATRIX.g. when moving oversized loads in a convoy with escort vehicles(s)Clarification: http://HSSE. pull over and take a break or a nap.com/files/showdocument.bpweb. recording pagers or other communication devices which are not intrinsically safe(explosion proof ). Drivers must not use a mobile phone or other two way communication device while a vehicle is in motion. voice mail devices. Only short duration calls on a radio are permitted by exception on roads which are radio controlled or required by regulation (e. bpweb.xls - 2. Vehicle and Road Practice tion of chains. C larification: http://HSSE. may not be used in classified areas where a hazardous atmosphere could exist.bpweb.bp. When a driver finds they are in this condition. 10% grade) D river Fatigue and Alertness-All drivers are appropriately rested and alert.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=917 Fatigue and stress are two common mental factors which affect a drivers’ ability to perform.6 M obile Phones-Driver. or pull over and stretch Professional drivers as defined by the BP Global Driving Standard must have fatigue training as per HSSE raining Matrix - http://gasiso14001. asp?tb=subcategory&ID=918 Cellular phones.5 o Muddy driving conditions o Grade of roads (e.bp.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.g.com/files/ showdocument. they should not drive. bp. THINK.com/files/ showdocument. 2. and posted in a conspicuous location All BP light vehicles within the CGPU will be equipped with VDR’s (Vehicle Data Recorders) - 2. Refer to BP’s Alcohol and Drug Policy. or any other substance or medication that could impair their ability to drive. All people in the vehicle must be wearing a three point seat belt. Consult your physician if questions 119 Vehicle and Road Practice .asp?tb=subcategory&ID=921: 2. Lap belts may not be used unless a hazard assessment has been completed and approved by the Area Authority. communicated to all drivers.bp.10 Read the label of all over-the-counter medications before considering driving.com/files/ showdocument. acquire a local road hazard analysis map - riving time should be taken into consideration D as part of the hours of travel and work for that day in order to address the issues of fatigue and journey management.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=919 - rivers will contact the local BP management D to be familiar with area specific regulations and policies and.bp.com/files/ showdocument.9 2.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=920 A lcohol and Drugs-The driver is not under the influence of alcohol or drugs.bpweb. C larification: http://HSSE. where possible. STOP.8 Seatbelts-Seatbelts are worn by all occupants at all times whenever the vehicle is in motion.bpweb.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.bpweb.7 Journey RequirementsC larification: http://HSSE. GO High risk road locations should be identified. C larification: http://HSSE. bp.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=1027 Additional Specific Requirements. R egulatory or posted speed limits shall not be exceeded and all vehicles must be driven in a manner that respects the road conditions. F irearms shall not be carried in company vehicles. quads.com/files/ showdocument. snow mobiles and similar types of vehicles. process vessel or tank containing combustible fluids unless required by a specific maintenance or operating function and an appropriate risk assessment and necessary hot work permit have been completed. Where ‘Bear Watch’ or other area specific wild-life expertise is needed on site.bpweb.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. it will be addressed in an HSSE Assurance Plan for the job and third party trained and competent experts will be used. N o vehicle shall encroach within 8 meters of any wellhead. site-specific procedures must be developed for the transport and operation of this equipment. drive-through parking is the preferred technique. Shotguns must not be used for flare guns.5 120 .11 Safety Helmet-Safety helmets are worn by riders and passengers of motorcycles. Vehicle and Road Practice arise regarding prescription medication 2. piping. A driver. C larification: http://HSSE.4 3.2 3. Where flare guns are required.3 3. Where space permits. pulling into a well/battery/drilling opera- 3. V ehicles must be backed into parking stalls where it is allowable or where drive-through parking is not possible.0 3.1 3. ice or debris to be thrown into the windshield by another vehicle.0 4. Th ere should be constant tension on the tow strap 3. Scope of Towing and Tow Straps T ow trucks are to be used as the first choice for towing. 3. Drivers will park in spaces where they can legally drive forward when leaving. THINK.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.4 4. A spotter shall be used to assist the driver during backing operations of heavy vehicles.7 3. GO (TOW). tion/compressor site or pump station. A Ditch Hitch is a recommended towing device which fits into the hitch receiver.2 4.5 121 Vehicle and Road Practice . V ehicles should be equipped with the manufacturers’ specified towing hooks or properly mounted towing hitch. and vehicles with limited visibility from their rear window.3 4. P ulling force on the tow hooks must not exceed the manufacturers’ specifications. must park the vehicle pointing towards the access road for a quick exit. I t is recommended that drivers wear their safety glasses while driving on gravel roads as there is a high risk of rocks. B acking - is to be avoided when practical.8 4. otherwise they will back into the parking space upon arrival. Nylon braided (flat) tow straps with loop ends (no hooks) are acceptable.6 P ets will not be permitted in company vehicles while traveling on BP business or while on BP CGPU and NGLBU premises. STOP. N ylon tow ropes or chains must not be used.1 4. vehicles with trailers. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Vehicle and Road Practice when towing, it should not be ‘jerked’. 4.6 B P vehicles are not allowed to pull a trailer device that is not company owned or leased. Scope of Boosting and Jump Starting When boosting or jump starting, both batteries must be the same voltage and the vehicles must not be touching. The vehicles must be in ‘park or neutral’ with parking brakes on and both engines and all accessories shut off. P ut the booster cables on the positive battery posts first, then put the negative cable on the good battery and finally ground the last cable to the engine block of the vehicle with the dead battery. Keep clear of the vehicles during the boosting operation and use the reverse procedure to remove the cables. Always wear eye protection when boosting or jump starting a vehicle. Scope of Vehicle Incident Reporting All vehicle incidents must be reported to drivers’ immediate supervisor immediately if possible but no later than within 24 hours or next business day. All vehicles incidents involving a third party, public or private property must be reported to Kendal Adjusters Inc. (John Bicknell 403-256-8400) within 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 6.0 6.1 6.2 122 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 24 hours. You will be required to fax a copy of the Incident Report, copy of the Police Report and any relevant cost estimates. Vehicles are not to be repaired until authorized by Kendal Adjustors or BP Fleet Management. 6.3 A ll vehicles incidents over $1000 are to be reported to the local Police authorities within 24 hours. V ehicles incidents that do not involve a third party or public or private property should be handled as follows: 1 estimate required for repair 2 estimates required for repair 6.4 < = $1000 damage $1001 - $3000 damage $3001 - $5000 damage 3 estimates required for repair +$5000 damage 3 estimates required for repair AND contact BP Fleet Management for authorization 6.5 All vehicle incidents involving rental vehicles should be reported to rental agency (Hertz) as soon as practically possible. The claim processing will be handled by their representative. 7.0 7.1 Scope of Material Handling Site-specific materials handling and transportation procedures may be required. T ransportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) certificate, the TDG applicable permits and the OMNIBUS permit must be carried in the vehicle where applicable. 7.2 123 Vehicle and Road Practice Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Vehicle and Road Practice 8.0 8.1 Scope of Safety Equipment All company vehicles including rental vehicles will have safety equipment that is appropriate for local risk assessments and conditions The following is suggested minimum equipment for vehicles going to field locations. Vehicles not travelling to remote sites or in adverse conditions may not require all of the equipment listed. - Regulatory acceptable first aid kit - Reflective warning devices - Bear kits where necessary - Fire extinguisher - Reflective clothing - xtra clothing or blankets – if applicable E based on geographic location - andle and matches– if applicable based on C geographic - Non-perishable high energy food - hovel. – if applicable based on geographic S location - xe or a hatchet– if applicable based on A geographic location - Flashlight (explosion-proof is recommended for field service vehicles) - Extra batteries for flashlight - Booster cables - Tow strap - Water, Caution Water may freeze. 9.0 Scope of Appendices Appendix 1- P CGPU and NGLBU All Terrain Vehicle B Practice Appendix 2- CGPU Winter Tire Reguirements 124 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 10.0 Reference Documents GLOBAL DRIVING STANDARD : http://HSSE.bpweb.bp.com/driving_safety/default. asp?cat=147 gHSSEr MS 430 - SSE Nonconformance and Incident H Reporting Procedure gHSSEr MF 86001 – onthly Vehicle Inspection M Checklist gHSSEr MF 86002 – Licence Verification Form APPENDIX 1 BP CGPU and NGLBU All-Terrain Vehicle Practice 1.0 1.1 Scope and Applicability This practice provides guidelines for the safe operation of All-Terrain Vehicles (ATV) defined as Quads and snowmobiles. Th is practice applies to all CGPU and NGLBU employees, contract employees and contractors who operate all-terrain vehicles (Quads and Snowmobiles) while working for the CGPU and NGLBU. Th is practice addresses the practices, conditions and behaviors that have the largest impact upon safe driving. (Driving all-terrain vehicles is one of the highest risk tasks performed by our staff.) Training All operators of all-terrain vehicles are required to pass a recognized certified all-terrain vehicles rider course. Ground Rules 1.2 1.3 2.0 2.1 3.0 125 Vehicle and Road Practice Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Vehicle and Road Practice 3.1 3.2 3.3 D rivers will at all times adhere to the ground rules provided in this section of the standard. No horseplay while operating all-terrain vehicles. S ite specific procedures must be developed to address communication needed to meet working alone requirements. This may involve radio/cellular contact, check in location and times, travel routes, etc. A ll-terrain vehicles must not be overloaded with personnel or equipment. Manufacturers guidelines must be followeed for load restrictions. A ll-terrain vehicles must not be operated while under the influence of drugs or alcohol. Firearms will not be carried on all-terrain vehicles. C SA approved helmets must be worn at all times while operating an ATV. DOT/Snell approval in the US. A regular maintenance program following the manufacturers guidelines must be implemented to ensure the ATV’s reliability and safe operating condition. Pre-trip checklists must be developed. 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 Operator must be familiar with the owner’s manual. 3.11 TV’s must be operated in a manner so as to miniA mize disturbance to all wildlife. 4.0 4.1 Licensing P rovincial Regulations require that all-terrain vehicles must be licensed and insured while traveling on public lands. E very All-Terrain Vehicle being operated by CGPU and NGLBU employees, full time equivalent con- 4.2 126 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. tractors and contractors doing work for CGPU and NGLBU must be licensed and insured. 5.0 Minimum Equipment • ounted winch for appropriate load ratings M (quads) where local management deems it appropriate • Regulatory acceptable first aid kit • 5Ib A B C fire extinguisher • Axe/Hatchet or folding pruning saw • Approved tow strap • Tire repair kit, air pump ( quads ) • Operators manual • Mounted carrying case • Explosion proof flash light • epper spray, bear scare, air horn ( quads ) where P local management deems it appropriate • Water proof matches • mall container of gas line antifreeze where apS plicable • Tool kit • Small tarp • Emergency food source • pare drive belt and spark plugs where appliS cable. • Whip flag antennae Personal Protective Equipment • SA approved helmet. DOT/Snell approved in US. C • Goggles or safety glasses • Gloves • Appropriate CSA approved footwear • Reflective clothing • Transporting Proper procedures must be developed and followed 6.0 6.1 127 Vehicle and Road Practice Vehicle and Road Practice BP Canada Energy – Gas Performance Unit 7.0 PROCEDURE TITLE: PROCEDURE #: DATE ISSUED: PREPARED BY: LOCATION: DATE REVISED: APPROVED BY: Control Code CGPU JANUARY 21/06 gHSSEr COMMITTEE QUAD LOAD-OFFLOAD PROCEDURE NOV. 11TH, 2005 ATV STANDARD COMMITTEE Job Steps Control Statement(s) 1 All operators of quads MUST have certification of successfully passing a recognized all-terrain vehicle operators course. The Components of the training must be consistent with MS-860, Appendix 1, section 2. T/S MS-860 Transporting of quad units Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Standard Safety Practices Manual while loading and off-loading ATV’s, which can be a very hazardous task. 128 T/S MS-860 Potential Hazards/Loss In-experienced quad operators may not have knowledge of the proper use of a quad, its limitations etc and may not know the specific site specific tools and procedures to ensure safe operation of a quad 2 The following procedure has been developed to provide operators of both quad and 6x6 units a safe tool to load and offload the units from a transport unit (out of the back of a truck box, from a trailer unit or from a quad deck.) First and foremost the operator of the referred quad / 6X6 unit must have successfully passed a recognized all-terrain vehicle course. Ensure that the operator of the Quad has been trained in all site specific procedures involving the proper use and operation of the unit in his specific area. Same as above Must have reviewed and been trained in all the site specific procedures involving quad use. Documentation of this must be in place. The Components of the training must be consistent with MS-860, Appendix 1, section 2. Job Steps 3 Potential Control Statement(s) Control Hazards/Loss Code The unit may not be The transportation unit must be of an approved type and must be T/S designed to safely approved by the Foreman of the area, before its use. This approval MS-860 transport a quad due to must be documented. its size, shape, layout The transport vehicle must meet the requirements with MS-860, etc, and could result in Appendix 1, section 9, 10, or 11. injury to the operator and or equipment. T/E 4 If the quad has to be loaded onto a transport unit and moved to a location prior to its use, the operator must be trained in the proper use of the transport unit, the minimum requirements of the transport unit and the procedure to load the quad onto the unit. Ensure that an adequate approved ramp is available to perform the loading task. Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Standard Safety Practices Manual 129 T T/ E T Due to the transportation unit design and the ramp design they may not be compatible and could lead to personal injury or equipment damage. 5 Position the transport unit as best possible using the profile of the terrain to decrease the angle of the ramps. Ramps must be approved by the Area Foreman, who will ensure that all users are aware of its proper operation and that they (the ramp users) properly inspect them prior to use to ensure that they are in good repair. Document inspection on the transportation unit checklist – refer to MS-860, Appendix 1, section 9.90 Recommendation is the Fulton Trifold Ramp (SR77) - refer to MS860, Appendix 1, section 12.2. Complete a site walk around prior to positioning the transport unit to load the quad (s). Ensure the ground is level and use the terrain to lessen the slope of the ramps. 6 7 Test the brakes on the quad before attempting to load to ensure adequate operation. An approved ATV helmet and work boots must be worn whenever the quad is in motion. More angle of the ramps, the greater the risk for an incident to occur during the loading operation. Unable to stop the quad when loading. Brakes must be in good operation condition. Ensure the Quad Pre/Post Trip Inspection Check List (CH-A-0002) is completed prior to operating the quad. Ensure the transportation unit is clear of any debris or other equipment, prior to loading. May cause unit to be unstable. The load area must be free of any material, tools or supplies and the deck must be clean of any slippery surfaces. Vehicle and Road Practice Vehicle and Road Practice Job Steps 8 Install the ramps to the transport unit ensuring that the ramps are safely secured to the transport unit. 9 Potential Control Statement(s) Control Hazards/Loss Code Ramps may become de- Ensure the ramps are designed for the quad weight and size. T tached from the Ensure the ramps are in good condition with all securing mechanisms transportation unit, or in place and in good repair. not be designed for the Refer to the Quad Pre /Post Check list referred to MS-860, Appendix use that is required. 1, section 4. Drive the quads to the ramps, A loading incident Operators must wear an approved helmet - refer to MS-860, T/E/S stopping just short of ramps. could occur where the Appendix 1, section 6. Ensure that the quad is in the operator could sustain 4X4 mode and in the lowest personal injury or the Low gear and in the 4X4 mode will ensure required power and gear. Stand on the quad’s foot quad / ramps could be traction is available. Standing on the pegs and leaning forward, the operator will have the best control of the quad. Proceeding slowly pegs and leaning slightly damaged. reduces the risk of not being able to stop in the desired position. forward with knees bent slightly; slowly proceed up the ramp. T 10 Once the quad has cleared the ramps and is on the transportation unit’s deck, slowly move the quad to its desired location, stop, engage the park brake and shut off the engine. T The unit could inadvertantly move off the transportation unit. Park brake must be engaged and the unit left in gear and the engine shut off. Consider a cushion type device for the front of the truck. Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Standard Safety Practices Manual 130 T 11 Secure the quad with a minimum of four nylon tiedown straps (ratchet type) to the transportation unit’s deck. Unit could leave the transportation unit and cause damage. Use proper nylon tie-down straps and secure the straps to the quad and the transportation unit’s tie-down points. The quad unit must be secured on all four corners. DO-NOT use the winch cable as a tie down. 12 Complete a walk around of the transportation device to ensure that the unit is properly secured and that the transportation unit can be safely moved. Other hazards could impede the unit’s movement resulting in injury or equipment damage. Complete a unit final inspection and an area walk around. Choose an egress path free of obstructions and hazards. Job Steps 13 Transport the quads via the transportation unit to its desired location. Control Code T 14 Potential Control Statement(s) Hazards/Loss Driving hazards, road Complete a safe journey management plan prior to starting the trip. conditions, weather, etc. may contribute to an Take the time to safely stop and check the secured load during the incident and or injury transportation trip. due to the unfavorable conditions for the transport vehicle. Once at the desired location, Equipment damage may Prior to spotting the transportation unit, complete an area hazard choose a spot to offload the occur in spotting the assessment, choose a level location free of any hazards and with safe quad, again using the terrain as transportation unit and access and egress. an advantage to lessen the slope or during the offload of the ramp(s) and to ensure the procedure. unit is level. Complete a hazard assessment of the offload area. T T 15 Once the transportation unit is secured (park brake set on the truck), ensure the quad’s park brake is still engaged and prepare to offload. T Unit could inadvertently move causing personal injury or equipment damage. Ensure the quad’s park brake is engaged. Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Standard Safety Practices Manual 131 T 16 Install the ramps transportation unit. to the Ramps may become detached from transportation unit, or not be designed for the use that is required. 17 Check to see if the park brake is still engaged and shift the quad into neutral. Safely remove the tie-down straps and store the straps in an area that will not impede with the safe offload of the quad unit. Quad unit could move resulting in personal injury or equipment damage. Ensure the ramps are designed for the quad weight and size. Ensure the ramps are in good condition with all securing mechanisms in place and in good repair. Check the offload area and see if you require a stopping device (ensure the quad cannot free wheel into a stationary object or hazard.) A stopping device could be a small log or a 4X4 post. Re-check the park brake and ensure that there are no obstructions in the quad’s path that will impede a safe offload. Vehicle and Road Practice resulting in a personal injury. . Once the quad is positioned about two thirds on the ramp and you are still standing well on the transportation unit. T Potential Control Statement(s) Control Hazards/Loss Code Worker could fall off of Ensure that you can safely get to the front of the quad (select the T the transportation unit easiest and safest route.Vehicle and Road Practice Job Steps 18 Position yourself to the front of the quad and release the park brake.) Worker could fall off of Conduct this task slowly and if you loose control. release the brakes and allow the quad to descend the rest of the way on its own (free wheel. 132 19 Once the quad is partially down the ramp and wanting to move downward on its own. let go of the quad the transportation unit and ensure that you prevent yourself from injury. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Plant feet firmly and slowly push the quad toward the ramps. use the hand brakes to slow the progress.) Ensure of good footing. resulting in a personal injury. 0 Trailer Checks (Pre / post use) • railer decking must provide adequate unobT structed surface area to provide safe load offload of the ATV unit • itch safety chains and securing pin (lock. 8. clean free of mud / ice) Suggested manufacturer: Fulton Trifold Utility model SR77 • atchet straps and securing points are in good R working condition • railer must be regulary maintained to the T manufacture’s specifications such as (axle bearings. damage.0 133 Vehicle and Road Practice .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. corrosion and wear • nsure that the tailgate hinges and latches are in E safe working condition • atchet straps and securing points are in good R 9. suspension) Truck Box • ruck box must provide adequate unobstructed T surface area to provide safe load / offload of the ATV unit • ailgate cables and attachment points must be T inspected for damage. ramp securing devices. welds. wheel lug torque. pin. hitch wear. hinge joints. H bolt) • Trailer ball / reciever compatability • Tire conditions • Spare tire • Trailer jack • Lights working condition • Licence plate and registration • General trailer condition • railer ramps must be checked for working T condition (cracks. 3 1. clean free of mud / ice) Suggested manufacturer: Fulton Trifold Utility model SR77 • o ATV units are to be carried on the tailgate N due to the unrated load capacity of the tailgate APPENDIX 2 BP CGPU Winter Tire Requirements 1.0 1. It is also expected that long term contractors (those working on our sites in excess of 30 days) will abide by this policy. This policy provides requirements and guidance for winter tire and studded tire usage for BP vehicles.0 134 .5 2.4 1.1 Scope and Applicability Th is policy applies to BP Canada Energy BP Canada Gas Performance Unit(CGPU) vehicles operated on BP business within the November 1 to March 31 timeframe. ramp securing devices. Vehicle and Road Practice working condition • ortable ramps must be checked for working P condition (cracks. welds. damage.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. hinge joints. A ll BP owned vehicles operated within the Canada Gas Performance Unit will be equipped with Winter Tires during the winter months as described above. Definitions 1.2 1. Th e purpose of this policy is to ensure that all BP vehicles are equipped with the most appropriate tires for winter driving conditions. 2 S tudded Tire – These tires are designed for ice and snow conditions.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If driving conditions deteriorate before November 1 it is recommended that snow or studded tires are installed at that time. Tires not baring this symbol are not considered a snow tire. Studless winter tires (typically Q-rated with a mountain-snowflake symbol shown below) are now available to motorists as a substitute for studded tires.1 Snow Tire -These tires have tire tread composed of special rubber compounds and tread designs that enhance their performance in snow and ice conditions. 3. They can be used alternatively to Snow Tires.1 t is the responsibility of the manager at each site to I ensure that all of the BP owned vehicles are equipped with snow or studded tires during the mandatory period of November 1 through March 31. 2. Also it is recommended that snow or studded tires are kept on the vehicles until March 31 and until winter conditions subside. Only Snow Tires and Studded Tires are considered acceptable. 135 Vehicle and Road Practice . Scope of Responsibility 3.2 S now tires are manufactured and supplied by a number of manufacturers. CertainTire brands can be purchased with the PHH card and these should be used if possible. Any tire that displays the mountain snowflake symbol on it is considered a snow and ice tire and is acceptable provided it meets sizing and rating requirements specified by the manufacturer. 2.0 3. 0 Scope of Training and Qualification 4. contract personnel conducting work for or on behalf of BP.1 Snow Tire requirements and guidelines.0 1.1 http://www.gc. Working at Heights 4.2 h ttp://www. 5.1 It is the responsibility of each area manager to review the Winter Tire requirements with the working group in the fall before winter driving conditions set in.htm WORKING AT HEIGHTS PRACTICE 1.ca/roadsafety/tires/wintertires/ tirelist.0 5. all other visiting personnel who are participating in working at heights activities on BP Canada premises or work sites. and.gc. Transport Canada and the Rubber Association of Canada recommend that you install winter tires in sets of four.0 6. Scope of References 6.1 Scope and Applicability This Practice applies to BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees. The purpose of the Practice is to eliminate or mini- 1.2 136 .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.ca/roadsafety/tires/wintertires/ menu.tc. I nstall four winter tires – To help maintain control and stability of your vehicle in icy conditions. At BP CGPU this is mandatory.htm 6.tc. 6 2. “ Deceleration Device”: Any mechanism which serves to dissipate the force of the fall which would otherwise be imposed on the worker. It consists of 2.1 2. 1. permit the release or further lowering of the individual. suitably trained and with sufficient experience to safely perform work with minimal or no supervision (Alberta OH&S SR 13.7 137 Working at Heights mize fall hazards and ensure personnel are protected while conducting working at heights activities. “Fall Arrest System”: The system utilized to minimize the chance for injury during a fall.0 2.3 2. . “Competent Worker”: One who is adequately qualified. by itself.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.5 2.3). “ Engineered”: Designed and/or approved by a Registered Professional Engineer. “CAN/CSA”: Canadian Practices Association. and subsequent to the arrest of the fall does not. for example an OH&S approved energy absorber. certified by a professional engineer. “ Fall Arresting Device”: A device that provides a means of arresting the accidental vertical or near vertical fall of an individual.2 2.4 2. Scope of Definitions Anchor Point: any point of attachment for the purposes of fall protection.3 Th e Working at Heights Practice states when fall protection is required and describes the necessary expectations and responsibilities in the preparation and execution of conducting work at heights. commonly referred to as an anchor point. 11-M92) “Fall Restraint System”: A system of components designed to eliminate the chance of an accidental fall. This may be accomplished by use of barricades and hand railing. 2.12 “Shock Absorbing Lanyard” Shock Absorbing Devise used in combination with safety harness designed to limit the fall arrest forces so they do not exceed the injury threshold of the human body. (Harness CSA Standard Z259.9 2. It is usually composed of the safety harness.11-M92) 138 . and a body supporting device (such as a full body harness).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. “ Free Fall Distance”: The distance a worker may fall before a fall arrest system engages and begins to slow the fall. Belts or 3 point harnesses are not allowed. 2. (Lanyard CSA Z259. a connecting means (such as a lanyard).10 Personal Fall Protection Equipment”: Any equip“ ment that is personally fitted issued and forms part of the fall protection system.1 0-M90) (Lanyard CSA Z259. The 5 point full body harness is required. (Harness CSA Standard Z259.11 “Safety Harness”: A device used to transfer the forces experienced during and after a fall to the torso or upper legs of a worker. connecting means and a full body harness body holding device and shock absorbing lanyard.0-M90) 2. or may utilize an anchor point.8 an engineered anchor point. Working at Heights 2. care.A documented fall protection plan is developed as part of the task hazard risk assessment prior to the work being performed - ll workers are trained in STOP-THINK-GO and A Time Out for Safety and feel comfortable being able to exercise these tools Scope of Training and Certification A ll workers working at heights must be trained and competent in fall protection equipment application. ANSI or CSA Practice . Recommended Fall Protection training is OSSA Certified (OIL SANDS SAFETY ASSOCIATION) as this training is currently the best industry practice training for oil and gas.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2 - mergency Response Plans are in place when fall E protection equipment is utilized - aintenance of an adequate inventory of Personal M Fall Protection Equipment meeting an OSHA.1 E ach worker has the responsibility to recognize fall hazards and take corrective measures by ensuring this Practice and the written fall protection program are followed. Th e on-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure that: .0 4. The training shall be conducted by a qualified trainer.1 139 Working at Heights 3. use. and maintenance of fall protection equipment and including established procedures or practices relating to the use and care of the equipment 3. 3. 4. use. and limitations. care.Workers are trained and verified competent in the hazards.0 Scope of Responsibility . maintenance. 140 .2 A ny worker responsible for performing rescue activities must be trained in the proper techniques for the rescue system. Scope of Expectations General: .0 5.3 5. an OH&S approved travel restraint system to prevent a worker from reaching an edge from which the worker could fall.1 o A travel/fall restraint system o A safety net o A control zone. Working at Heights 4. temporary.Acceptable fall protection can be provided by permanent. or o nother system approved by a Director of A Inspection Note: An employer’s first choice should require the use of adequate guardrails to protect personnel. or o At a height less than 2 meters if there is an unusual possibility of injury from a fall .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.Fall protection system is identified as: o A personal fall arrest system 4.All workers must ensure that a fall protection system is utilized when work is to be conducted at height’s that are: o At or greater than 2 meters. or personal CAN/CSA approved fall protection equipment systems. T raining or retraining is necessary when an employer has a reason to believe a worker does not have the necessary understanding and/or skill required. The guardrail must meet the design requirements listed in AB OH&S section 315 or. . or lift platforms or loads.1.2 meters and there is an unusual possibility of injury because of additional hazards.2 hen Personal Fall Protection Equipment W is used. 1. 5.1.2 m without a shock absorber when added distance of an extended shock absorber creates a greater risk.2 kn. or if a worker could fall less than 1..10- M90) . 5.3 ll Personal Fall Protection Equipment A must be connected and used in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and instructions.1. 5. personnel must wear a CAN/ CSA approved full body harness.2 Permanent & Temporary Platforms A written fall protection plan is required as part of the risk assessment/pre-job task analysis for working at heights of 1. these systems must be attached properly to engineer approved anchor points with an ultimate load capacity of at least 22. (5000 pounds) per person in any direction the load can be applied. suspend.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.4 ersonal fall arrest systems will be rigged to P minimize the free fall distance to less than 2 meters or the manufactures specification with a shock absorber and.1. Anchor points used for the attachment of personal fall protection equipment must be independent of any anchorage being used to support. or twice the maximum arrest force. (CSA Standard Z259.2 meters or greater from a permanent work platform or 2 meters and greater from a temporary work area. The deceleration force will not exceed 8 Kn and the personal fall protection system must allow for an unobstructed fall. 5.1 hen Personal Fall protection Equipment W is utilized. 141 Working at Heights 5. vertical aerial platforms.11-M92) 5. Working at Heights 5.3 Lifts A fall restraint system is required when conducting work at heights greater than 2 meters from Scissor lifts. The lanyard if at all possible should be the length to prevent the worker from being ejected from the platform but not restrict their work or compromise the function of the fall arrest system.4 Boomed Lifts A worker working from a boomed Arial Platform or Genie lift shall be protected from falling by using a personal fall arrest system consisting of full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard meeting CSA requirements and a manufacturer engineered anchor point. (CSA Z259.5 Man baskets Under normal circumstances. or Boomed Genie lifts if the platform being using is operated on firm. a worker working from a man basket shall be protected from falling by using a fall arrest system such as a vertical lifeline and rope grab combination or a self-retracting lifeline. However. substantially level surface with the entire manufacturer’s guardrails and chains in place and meet Alberta OH&S Sec 315. Alberta OH&S section 350 requires that: 142 .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. In the event that it is impracticable to provide a personal fall arrest system for one or more workers in a man basket. The lifeline shall be secured to an anchor point on the boom of the crane from which the man basket is suspended. then the manufacturer’s specifications take precedence and must be followed. 5. An effective written Emergency Response Procedure using task hazard analysis / risk assessment must be developed as part of the Fall Protection Plan as an alternate to mechanical lift equipment failure.10 M90 & CSA Z259. if the manufacturer’s specifications require the use of a fall arrest system when the vertical aerial platform is being used. 5. functions as a fall arrest system.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. in combination with worker attachment to the man basket. To limit a fall distance and the arresting force experienced by a falling worker. the secondary man basket support must be as short as possible • An effective written Emergency Response Pro cedure using task hazard analysis / risk assess ment must be developed as part of the Fall Protection Plan as an alternate to Man basket equipment failure Above Water or Liquids 5.6 A fall protection system in combination with a life jacket is required at any height if personnel are to conduct work above/beside cold or moving water. • ach worker within the man basket wears a full e body harness with lanyard securely attached to the man basket • The separate or secondary man basket support.2 metes from the ground or E safe work platform • as only one person attached unless other wise H designed by manufacture 143 Working at Heights • A separate man basket support be attached between the suspended man basket and the hoist line above the hook assembly and .7 Vertical Lifelines Vertical lifelines used in a personal fall arrest systems installed and utilized shall comply with the following: • s made of wire rope or appropriate material suitI able for all relevant work site hazards and secured to an anchor point capable of withholding 27 Kn and engineer approved • xtend to a least 1. or other liquids that pose a drowning hazard to workers other than work from a boat. the Emergency Response ProceA dure will identify: o Rescue equipment available o Trained rescue personnel o Job specific rescue procedures o Requirement for procedure to be reviewed during each Pre-job / permit issuance - - - 6.8 • s effetely protected to prevent abrasion and I secured to minimize swing Horizontal Lifelines Horizontal lifelines used in a personal fall arrest systems installed and utilized shall comply with the following: Is made of wire rope at 12 millimeters in thickness. the system must be engineer approved The horizontal line should extend to no less than 6 meters and no greater than 18 meters and be at least 2 meters above the working surface Secured to an anchor point capable of withholding 71 Kn and engineer approved Personnel’s free fall distance should be no more than 1.2 meters with at least 3.1 144 . splice free.0 6. capable of withholding 89 Kn and connecting hardware with a tensile strength of at least 71Kn. Working at Heights 5.5 meters of clearance between the work surface and ground No more than three personnel shall be connected to the same horizontal line at any time Scope of Emergency Procedures General: • written Emergency Response Procedure as part A of the task hazard analysis / risk assessment must be developed as part of the Fall Protection Plan and identified on the Pre-Job / permit process • s a minimum.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 3 7. 6.2 Man Baskets & Lifts A written Emergency Response Procedure using task hazard analysis / risk assessment must be developed as part of the Fall Protection plan to retrieve personnel in case of equipment failure when utilizing Man Baskets and mechanical lifts. repairing and maintenance: The components of a fall protection system must be cleaned repaired and maintained according to manufacturer’s instructions.1 Scope of Inspection and Maintenance I nspection: Fall Arrest Systems (FAS) must be inspected by a trained and competent worker before and after use in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. dry conditions and sunlight. Recertification and inspections of Fall arrest equipment must be planned and conducted formally according to manufacturer’s specifications. Storage: Fall protection equipment must be stored according to manufacturers recommended practices.0 7. Regulations and References 7.4 7. Special attention must be given to temperatures. R emoval from service: Any component of a fall protection system that has been involved in a fall arrest must be removed from service and tagged as such or destroyed. C leaning. clean.0 145 Working at Heights .2 7. Scope of Equipment Practices.5 8. 7.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 298 Forms • gHSSEr MF 34004- PreJob Risk Assessment • Maximum Tie Off Points 8.2.1-95 (R1999) • Linemen’s Harnesses. Descent.1 -98 • Connecting Components: Z259.0 146 .10 M90 (R1998) • Fall Arrest. or Ontario Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments and Regulation 213 Construction Projects.2 • Shock Absorbers: Z259.11 M92 (19998) • Vertical Lifeline: Z259. Straps: Z259.2 9. Working at Heights 8.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.99 • Self Retracting Device’s: Z259.3 M1998 • Full Body Harnesses: Z259. as amended CAN/CSA Practices include but are not limited to: • Safety Harnesses.2.12.01 • utomatic and manual decent device:: A Z259.3.1 All components of a fall protection system must meet the material and assembly specifications set forth in local regulations and known Practices (see Alberta OH&S Code 145 or British Columbia Occupational Health and Safety Regulation and Guidelines 296/97 as amended).2. Lanyards: Z259. Lifeline Devices: Z259. or when the oxygen content is less than 19.asp ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING PURPOSE: To establish guidelines for providing a safe work environment through atmospheric monitoring. Refer to gHSSEr MS 920 Asbestos Code of Practice (BP Guidelines for Handling Asbestos and ManMade Vitreous Fibers)http://gasiso14001.com/index.bp. or greater than 23% by volume. or may become hazardous due to the presence of combustible or toxic gas.5%.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The O2 reading must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly. APPLICATION: Any area where the work environment is. ASBESTOS For information on asbestos contact your PU Industrial Hygienist.bpweb. 147 Asbestos Atmospheric Monitoring . DEFINITION: Atmospheric Monitoring includes: • O2 Monitors • H2S Detectors • Combustible Gas Detectors • Toxic Gas Detectors • Carbon Dioxide Monitors PRECAUTIONS: Some atmospheric monitoring equipment requires minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to manufacturer specifications. where combustible gas is. calibration and documentation. care. tank or related equipment. • ll worksite locations that have portable A and permanent atmospheric monitoring equipment must develop site specific procedures that govern instrument use. Atmospheric Monitoring POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Lack of oxygen • Combustible Gas • Toxic Gas: H2S. benzene and other toxic • Substances PROCEDURES: • Detection Equipment: • ll work locations must have combustible gas. hot work or any other permit required testing should be function tested prior to each use. prior to and during work procedures. repairs and training. • ll survey equipment used for testing confined A spaces. • H2S Gas Detectors: H2S gas detectors are used to measure the concentration of H2S in a work area. • ombustible Gas Testing: C A combustible gas test shall be taken when Hot work is performed within 8 meters of any well. SCBA/SABA must be worn by the individual 148 . as required. for monitoring the atmosphere. function testing.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A toxic gas and oxygen detection equipment available. process vessel. or may be present. NOTE: D When monitoring in an unknown concentration. maintenance. There are two basic types of detectors: • rager and Gastec Sampling Tubes. Safe operating procedures must be written and followed should circumstances preclude such installation.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. continuous monitoring is required for combustible gas. and oxygen deficiency. toxic gas. The advantage of this type of unit is that monitoring can be continuous. and oxygen-deficiency tests must be performed prior to a confined-space entry and at frequent intervals during the work period. . Respiratory protection must be worn while the initial tests are being performed. identifies the H2S level on a gauge. If the hot work is being performed within a confined space. H2S visual alarm will be a blue beacon and LEL / General visual alarm will be a red beacon. [See: H2S Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] • is method is considered to be accurate Th plus or minus 25% when proper sampling procedures are used • lectronic Sensor. Electronic sensors measure E the airborne concentration of H2S on an electronic circuit. • Confined-Space Entry: Combustible gas. [See: Confined-Space Entry] [See: Respiratory Protection] • Hot Work: All hot work requires monitoring of the atmosphere for combustible gas prior to and at frequent intervals during the work. or permanently mounted in areas where H2S could accumulate • Monitoring Units: A ll buildings where H2S may exceed 100 PPM should have fixed monitoring units set to give an audible and visual alarm at 10 PPM. which can also be used to set audible and visual alarms at specific concentrations.If there is a potential for the atmosphere to change un- 149 Atmospheric Monitoring . The unit may be carried on a belt (personal monitor). The signal. toxic gas. Equipment specifications should be verified for equipment operating conditions prior to installation and use. Industrial Hygienist.U.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. BENZENE: For information on benzene. the atmosphere must be continuously monitored. 150 . Atmospheric Monitoring predictably after a worker enters the confined space. contact your P. The O2 reading must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly. Refer to the sites-specific Code of Practice and BP Guidelines for Handling Benzene. as necessary] TRAINING: All personnel that use or are responsible for atmospheric monitoring equipment shall be properly trained in the operation and use of the equipment and the site specific procedures that were written for the particular equipment. [See: Safe Work Permits] • Precautions: Some atmospheric monitoring equipment requires minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to manufacturer specifications. [Contact Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist for advice. • Oil Spills: Additional atmospheric monitoring may be required at spill sites. Re-entry to a worksite must be accompanied by gas detection before work resumes. etc POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Exposure to radioactive sources. radiographic inspection of vessels. wireline logging. piping and pipelines. APPLICATION: All worksites where Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission (CNSC) regulated isotopes may be handled. i. PURPOSE: To establish the requirements for the safe handling of CNSC isotopes. PREPARATIONS: • CNSC Certification: Contractors must have a valid license issued by the Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission to per form all work involving CNSC regulated isotopes. See: BP Canada Welding Quality Control Manual [ for radiographic inspection requirements] • Work Planning Work planning for use of CNCS licensed isotopes must include consultation with the CNCS licensed Contractor. radioactive isotope use. • Pre-Job Safety Meeting: Must be conducted prior to commencement of operation.e.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Safety Meetings] [See: TDG-Packaging and Safe Transport of Radioac tive Material] [See: Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission Act and regulations] PROCEDURES: 151 CNSC Isotopes CANADIAN NUCLEAR SAFETY COMMISSION (CNSC) REGULATED ISOTOPES . isolated. RESPONSIBILITIES: 152 . thus a Hot Work Permit is required. PRECAUTION: Radioactive isotopes may affect some LEL monitors and fire detection systems. Fire detection systems sensitive to radiation may have to be by-passed when radioactive sources are in use in the immediate area. etc. Station shutdown could result when using a highly energetic radioactive source in the vicinity of a detector. CNCS licensed radioactive source shall not be left unattended at the jobsite unless it has been isolated to prevent any accidental exposure.e. responsible for the operaTh tion. [See: Equipment Shutdown Systems] Radiation survey meters are not explosion proof. and unauthorized entry of personnel banned. In no event shall a pregnant employee be allowed in the vicinity of CNSC Licensed radioactive operations. Equipment and worksite must be properly prepared (i. Care must be taken to reactivate the detection system when the work is completed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. depressured. A risk assessment must be performed to determine the scope and risk from radioactive sources. Safe handling procedures should include: CNSC Isotopes • Specific job procedures to be followed • certification of the type and quantity of CNCS A licensed radioactive sources furnished and used • e expected effluent concentrations and methTh ods of control if applicable • e person in charge. made accessible. Radiation warning signs must be posted.) The worksite should be roped off. in the area affected by the work. line. instruments. Valves that are blocked in should be tagged.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Depressuring should be done only by qualified personnel. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Static Electricity- [See: Electricity] • Combustible and Toxic Fluids • Environmental Impact PRECAUTIONS: Draining and Depressuring should be carried out in a controlled fashion. Valves should be opened slowly. DRAINING AND DEPRESSURING PURPOSE: To provide safe precautions for the draining and depressuring of toxic or combustible materials. has been completely isolated. or piece of equipment to be depressured. • Depressuring: Caution should be exercised to ensure that any vessel. The BP Canada Representative is responsible for ensuring that only CNSC licensed operators are used when handling CNSC licensed radioactive sources and that all procedures are supplied and followed. He is also responsible for ensuring that all applicable protective equipment. APPLICATION: All plant and field operations. rescue and decontamination facilities are on hand and in operable condition before the job commences. Pressure gauges should not be relied 153 Draining & Depressuring . The CNCS licensed Contractor performing work with licensed isotopes is responsible for ensuring that safe handling procedures and contingency plans have been developed which comply with all government regulations. If it is necessary to leave. hen draining. Before draining. 3. APPLICATION: All plant and field operations. certain precautions must be followed: 1. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Static Electricity: Sparks resulting from the accumulation of static electricity often cause fires. 2. Pressured vessels should not be drained through hose.e. and the situation at that area (i. welding in the vicinity. how it is being contained). steam.. or if it is a liquid. making them 154 . vapor.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. on for assurance of complete depressuring. moving belts of flywheels or rubbing clothing. secured piping or existing drain lines should be used. Static electricity can also be caused by the flow of air. or steam passing through a hose. water. A static charge can be generated from friction resulting from the passage of oil through a pipeline. [See: Energy Isolation] Electrical • Draining: When draining a vessel. he should close the valve. The hazard is more severe in dry cold weather than in humid weather when most surfaces are coated with a film of moisture. ELECTRICAL PURPOSE: To provide a general understanding of the hazards associated with electricity. the worker should not leave W the area. the pouring of liquid from one container to another. the worker must know where the material is going. Temporary. before plugging into the explosion-proof receptacles • hen the job is completed. good conductors and draining off static charges. in many instances. the following procedures must be followed: • ll electrical equipment not approved for use in A hazardous areas. Another source of potential static electricity is the use of portable plastic flammable liquid containers (1 - 5 gallon containers used for removing. PROCEDURES: Most power tools and portable electrical test equipment are not rated for use in hazardous areas. It is necessary. storing on a plastic pickup box liner). taking the necessary gas checks and obtaining Hot Work Permits . and are equipped with standard U-ground plugs.[See: Safe Work Permits] • ll extension cords used must have explosionA proof ends (connectors) • ll “cheater cords” must be less than 2 feet in A length with one male explosion-proof end and one female standard U-ground plug. and must be used only at the immediate location of the tool or test equipment • ll connections at standard U-ground plugs A must be made and adequately taped (to prevent them from pulling apart). filling. to use a “short cheater” cord to adapt for explosion-proof electrical receptacles. must be treated as “hot work”. Steam. or hydrocarbons rushing through hose or pipe. Due to the hazards of arcing electrical equipment or connections. or issuing from open end pipes. The operator should refrain from opening sample lines or drains any wider than necessary.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. connections must be W Electrical 155 . can generate a large static charge. a blast of sand. or extension cords to the non-explosion-proof tool or test equipment. This cord must be rated for extra hard usage as per the Canadian Electrical Code (re: rule 18-122) Where an electrical hazard exists because of dampness (i. 156 . Bonding eliminates a difference in potential between objects. Suitable guards must be provided for portable lamps Grounding/Bonding: The terms “bonding” and “grounding” should not be used interchangeably.e.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • hen samples are taken in a container.. the filling nozzle must be in contact with the liquid in the bottle. the truck/equipment must be grounded and bonded. When drawing samples in a glass bottle. Bonding and grounding systems should be inspected regularly for good mechanical condition. because the two processes have distinctly different functions. but does not eliminate a difference in potential between these objects and the earth. boilers being cleaned). or that permitted by local regulations. Grounding eliminates a difference in potential between an object and ground. portable lighting units should be used. broken at the explosion-proof receptacle first Electrical • ll portable electrical equipment that is approved A for use in hazardous areas (such as some pumps and air movers driven by explosion-proof motors) must have cords equipped with explosionproof ends. the W operator must ensure the container is in contact with the filling nozzle or bonded by cable. Portable lighting units must have heavy-duty extension cords with ground fault interrupter. • efore loading or unloading any fluid/material B by hose or piping. The usual precaution to avoid static electricity sparking is proper bonding and grounding: • onding and grounding are effective only when B applied to conductive bodies. the container must be bonded to the drain and depressuring valve. PRECAUTION: • lectrical Grounding: E Serious harm can result from electricity with relatively low voltages if equipment is not properly grounded. Electrical power cables should be shut-off whenever possible. Suitable guards must be provided for portable lamps. or that permitted by local regulations. As a result. Work in the Vicinity of Underground Power Cable: No person shall commence excavation work until the vicinity has been checked and underground electrical power cables located. the cathodic protection must be shut off or disconnected.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 157 Electrical • hen Draining or Depressuring fluid/material W into a container. and the equipment bonded and grounded before work is started. boilers being cleaned). prior to commencing work. to prevent external corrosion. Cathodic Protection: The nature of a cathodic protection system is to put an electrical charge on the pipe or equipment in question. Portable lighting units must have heavy-duty extension cords with ground fault interrupter. . All underground power cables shall be located by hand digging method or Hydrovacing methods..e. portable lighting units should be used. • Portable Lighting: Where an electrical hazard exists because of dampness (i. • ll equipment and buildings must be grounded A according to the applicable electrical regulations. This should be done on a routine basis or before any major shutdowns. Appropriate signs should be posted on electrical switch gear cabinets.24 (2) subsection (1).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Sealed. D anger – An “Equipment Starts Automatically” sign must be displayed on equipment which starts automatically. Above Ground Clearance: PRECAUTION: Minimum clearance from an overhead power line is as follows: The employer must accurately determine the voltage of any energized electrical equipment or conductor and the minimum distance from it required by 19. Electrical • Batteries: B atteries used and/or stored in enclosed spaces must be vented to remove hydrogen gases. Safe limit of approach distances from overhead power lines for persons and equipment 158 . maintenance free batteries are excluded from this requirement. sub-stations and rooms to warn personnel of electrical danger. • dentification: I All electrical panels should be identified as to the equipment they control. • Inspection: Th ermography (infra-red scan) is a recommended practice on electrical equipment to locate potential problems. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Alberta - Refer to OH & S sections 225. vertical or horizontal.0 meters 7. 144 kilovolts 230 kilovolts. authorization shall be obtained from the utility 159 Electrical . 72 kilovolts 138 kilovolts. If it is necessary to work closer than the minimum distance.0 meters 3.0 meter 1.0 meters 5.5 meters 4.5m Over 250 kV: 6m These clearances apply to any direction.0 meters British Columbia - Refer to OH & S Table 19-1 for further information Voltage Phase to phase Over 750 V to 75 kV Over 75 kV to 250 kV Over 250 kV to 550 kV Minimum distance Meters 3 4.5 6 Feet 10 15 20 Ontario: Over 750 V to 150 kV: 3m Over 150 kV to 250 kV: 4. uninsulated Above 750 volts Insulated conductors 750 volts – 40 kilovolts 69 kilovolts. 226 schedule 4 for further information Operating voltage between conductors of overhead power line 0-750 volts Insulated or polyethylene covered conductors 0-750 volts Bare.0 meter 3. 260 kilovolts 500 kilovolts Safe limit of approach distance for persons and equipment 300 millimetres 1. or equipment. When utility company approval or authorization is required. may work on equipment rated at more than 750 volts. as soon as practicable. Only Journeyman Electricians or.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Vehicle load clearance shall not be of a height that would be in violation of the safe limits of approach from overhead power lines. competent individual from the utility company. [See: Electrical Protection Branch Regulations] TRAINING: Only the following trained and BP authorized personnel will be allowed to do Electrical work on BP Facilities and Pipelines: a) Journeyman Electricians b) Electrician Apprentice c) Refer to the Provincial Electrical regulations. RESPONSIBILITIES: Only company-authorized personnel may work on electrical equipment. No excavations or similar operation shall be carried out in the vicinity of overhead power lines that would reduce the original support of the power line. The area directly under or adjacent to an overhead power line shall not be used for storage of material. Any person who knows of a fire of electrical origin or suspected electrical origin shall. Earth or other material shall not be placed under or adjacent to an overhead power line in such a manner that the minimum ground clearance would be reduced. Electrical company. the operating line voltage must be verified by a designated. contact or fire to a technical Administrator for the electrical discipline or to a safety codes officer and the safety codes officer shall notify a technical Administra- 160 . report the accident. Apprentices under the direct supervision of Journeyman Electrician. no person shall remove or interfere with anything in. go indoors or as a second option into I a non convertible vehicle. Refer to Safety Codes Act Section 16 (1-3) for further information. Lightening hits I the tallest object.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. on or about the place where the accident occurred until permission has been granted by a safety codes officer in the electrical discipline.. Plan your day. • f possible. • void contact with plumbing.. • f possible unplug electronic equipment before I the storm arrives and avoid contact with electrical equipment or cords during the storm. 161 Electrical . Get down if you are in an exposed area. After an accident described in subsection (1).Most homes. • f outdoors. ELECTRICAL STORMS GUIDELINES TO STAY SAFE DURING ELECTRICAL STORMS: • ach morning check local weather websites for E severe weather forecasts. business and process buildings are grounded as per regulatory requirements. • f you can hear thunder you are still in the strikI ing distance of lighting. office. including sinks. stay away from windows and O doors. • f a potential electrical storm is approaching. • o not use corded telephones except for emerD gencies. to protect property or to restore service. go to a low point. unless it is necessary to do so to prevent death or injury. I outside work must cease until safe to resume. • Stay away from trees. A baths and faucets. • nce indoors. tor for the electrical discipline. APPLICATION: All Production Equipment DEFINITION: Equipment shutdown systems are: a) Electrical b) Pneumatic c) Mechanical POTENTIAL HAZARDS: If equipment shutdowns are left disabled. 162 . EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN SYSTEMS. Crouch down and cover your ears. metal tools. PROCEDURES: Equipment protection devices must not be altered. TEMPORARY BY-PASS OF PURPOSE: To provide for the safe use of temporary bypasses of shutdown systems. and seek medical attention. except by qualified persons designated by the supervisor in charge.. • Don’t stand close to other people - spread out. lightning may be about to strike.. the potential for damage to equipment or injury to personnel exists. • Stay away from all sources of water or wet grass.. adjusted or repaired. tampered with. • ictims of lightning strikes should be given CPR V if necessary. Equipment Shutdown • void metal objects such as golf clubs.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • f you feel a tingling sensation or your hair I stands on end. fishing A rods. RESPONSIBILITIES: Responsibility lies with the Supervisor and employees installing. Where the exposure cannot be eliminated. The piece of equipment should be taken out of service to make necessary repairs. PREPARATIONS: Each worksite must be evaluated to determine the need for emergency eyewash stations and safety showers. enclosed systems or bulk storage should be the first line of defense. However. moderate or low in accordance with BC Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 5. operating. . EYEWASH STATIONS & DELUGE SHOWERS PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for the provisions and placement of eyewash stations and deluge showers in BP Canada worksites.88: 163 Eyewash Stations Equipment shutdown systems. whether electrical. or mechanical should not be by-passed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. In all areas the potential hazards must be evaluated and a site-specific procedure developed to maintain safe operation. APPLICATION: All BP Canada worksites where personnel exposure to injurious chemicals exists. Minimizing exposure through the use of alternative chemicals. pneumatic. the risk should be categorized as high. or repairing equipment. there are situations where it becomes impractical or impossible to work with a piece of equipment without some manner of by-passing or jumping the shutdown system temporarily. while shutdown systems are by-passed. o Where specified. or of illness resulting from absorption of a toxic substance through the eyes or skin. • Emergency eyewash and shower facilities must : o e designed so that once activated. Note: Special care must be exercised in the selection of personal protective equipment at worksites where large volumes of water are not readily available. freezing and from high heat exposure. Personal protective equipment must be supplied. • Low: risk of mild eye or skin irritation. Equipment Shutdown • igh: risk of irreversible tissue damage to the H eyes or skin or of serious illness resulting from rapid absorption of a toxic substance through the eyes or skin. or where the risk of igniting clothing is present.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. o Be protected from all potential chemical contamination. PROCEDURES: Location: High Risk Tempered continuous flow eyewash stations and deluge showers must be placed within 5 seconds walking distance 164 . o Clearly identify their location and provide directions for use. provide tempered water (15 – 30°C) unless non-tempered water is recommended by a Doctor to reduce the risk of worker injury. • oderate: risk of irritation or other reversible M harm to the eyes or skin. The use of this equipment is mandatory. the flow of B water will continue without requiring the use of the operator’s hands. Moderate Risk Tempered emergency eyewash and shower equipment must be within 10 seconds walking distance but no further than 30 m (100 ft) unless: • irst aid services are maintained to start treatF ment within 5 minutes of an accident. • rench hoses must be capable of delivering a D 165 Eyewash Stations but no greater than 6 m (20 ft) from high-risk areas.1-1981. Low Risk Effective means to flush the eyes and skin within 10 seconds walking distance but no further than 30 m (100 ft). For high risk corrosive gases such as ammonia or chlorine. . the facilities must not be located in the gas storage or use area. • drench hose is located with 10 seconds walkA ing distance but no greater than 30 m. emergency eyewash stations and S portable self-contained units must be capable of delivering sufficient water for not less than 15 minutes (or more if required by the nature of the material).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Showers may be located further than 6m if: • non-tempered drench hose is within 5 seconds A walking distance but no greater than 6 m. • yewash stations must be capable of delivering a E minimum of 1. Volume of Water Required: • afety showers and/or emergency eyewash S stations must meet the requirements of ANSI standard Z358.5 L/min of water with a pressure not exceeding 175 kPa (24psi) and with a spray pattern designed to effectively flush both eyes. • afety showers. but rather adjacent to it. • tempered shower facility can be reached within A 5 minutes of the accident. Employees should immediately go to the nearest available source of potable water to continue flushing for a minimum of 15 minutes. approved portable or self-contained safety showers and/or eyewash units are recommended. If potable water systems are available. Where potable water systems are not available. Eyewash Stations minimum of 11. Eyewash and shower stations should be: • ested upon initial installation in accordance T with manufacturer’s instructions. should be available at all worksites. the entire contents must be used or disposed. one liter size. eyewash and showers should be permanently installed. PRECAUTIONS: Alarm devices should be considered for remote or large worksites.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Upon opening or breaking the seal of the one liter eyewash bottle. and ensure a 166 . • hecked weekly to ensure access is not blocked C by material or equipment. Only bottles with an identified expiration date are approved for use at BP Canada worksites. and to obtain medical help as soon as possible.4 L/min. This may require a bottle in each vehicle. This will verify they are operational. This precaution will signal others that the shower or eyewash unit has been activated. • e flushed weekly (note BC – requires monthly) B for a minimum of 5 minutes to completely flush the branch of water line supplying the unit. Eyewash Bottles: As a minimum. • Permanently plumbed eyewash stations should: • Use only potable water. Back-up personnel can then proceed to the location. emergency eyewash bottles. TRAINING: Employees in charge of handling or working with injurious chemicals must be instructed in the proper use and location of all emergency eyewash and safety shower units. to ensure a clean supply of water. specific work areas with the proper type of protection relative to classification. All operational checks and flushes should be recorded. RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Supervisor in charge. to assess the need and provide emergency eyewash or safety shower units where required. FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT PURPOSE: To provide information on reliable fire suppression equipment. Fire Protection • ortable or self-contained eyewash or shower P units should: • se only potable water or an isotonic saline U flushing solution. and all employees. and a method of inspection and training to ensure that equipment is properly maintained and functional at all times. clean supply of water. APPLICATION: All BP Canada field locations. • ave the water replaced regularly or as per H manufacturers’ specifications. PROCEDURES: Classification of Fires: • Class A Fires – Occur in ordinary combustible 167 .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and water fog may be used as extinguishing agents. but require extensive clean-up of equipment after the fire. BC type dry chemical (Ansul Purple- K). as well as create a safety hazard. • Class B Fires – Occur in the vapor-air mixture over the surface of a flammable liquid such as grease. carbon dioxide. Carbon dioxide is the most suitable extinguishing agent. Fire extinguishers that are of the external cartridge type or wheeled units must be recharged by personnel trained in recharging. cloth. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) guidelines. and the guidelines included in the chart later in this section. Chemicals used for 168 . Fire Protection materials such as wood. • lass C Fires – Occur in electrical equipment. Recharge: All fire extinguishers must be recharged with the proper chemical immediately after use. as the resulting chemical reactions may damage the extinguisher. Only a certified technician can recharge a fire extinguisher in non emergency situations. Specialized techniques. and paper. zirconium. • Class D Fires – Occur in combustible materials such as magnesium. Chemicals must never be mixed. Location and Placement of Extinguishers: Fire extinguishers must be placed in accordance with local fire regulations. extinguishing agents. foam. Extinguishing agents most commonly used are water and type ABC dry chemical agent (Ansul Foray).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. C Non-conducting extinguishing agents must be used. and extinguishing equipment have been developed to control and extinguish fires of this class. or oil. and sodium. titanium. gasoline. Dry chemical agents can be used. The most commonly used agent is MET-LX. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • ABC Extinguishers – Foray • BC Extinguishers – Purple-K LOCATION AND PLACEMENT OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS RECOMMENDED Inspection and Maintenance: All maintenance must be performed by a competent person in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. (A competent person is one who has been trained in the required maintenance procedure.) The following inspections are the minimum requirement. The findings of inspections must be documented and retained on file at each BP Canada location. Monthly Inspection Requirements: 1. All units must be in the designated location and visible. 2. All units must be checked to ensure operational reliability (i.e., seals in place, nozzle and hoses unobstructed, easy access to units). Annual Inspections must be performed as per manufacturer’s specifications and applicable government regulations. TRAINING: The effectiveness of fire-fighting equipment may increase by as much as 40% when it is used by a trained employee. Regular fire training is a requirement under occupational health and safety legislation, and is also in the company’s best interest to prevent loss to people, property, and process. [See: Training] RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of BP Canada to ensure that 169 Fire Protection recharging must be of the type used by the manufacturer of the extinguisher. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Fire Res. Workwear adequate, properly maintained fire protection is available at each worksite. The contractor is responsible for the proper operation, inspection and maintenance of their fire protection equipment according to Government Regulations. FIRE RESISTANT WORKWEAR PRACTICE 1.0 Scope 1.1 This practice applies to all BP Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) and Canadian Natural Gas Liquids BU employees, contracters, and other visiting personnel doing work on BP premises and work sites. 2.0 Purpose 2.1 e fire resistant workwear (FRW) program is designed Th to emphasize and enhance employee safety, through ensuring the use of appropriate personal protective workwear in potentially hazardous areas, by reducing the risk of thermal burns. 3.0 3.1 General Provisions F ire resistant work wear must not be used as a substitute for proper job planning or minimizing potential hazards. Th is policy is based on material contained within the Canadian General Standards Board, **CGSB 155.20, “Work Wear for Protection Against Hydrocarbon Flash Fire” and **CGSB 155.21, “Recommended practices for the Provision and Use of Work Wear for Protection Against Flash Fire”, and the Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers 3.2 170 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 3.3 Th e outermost garments must be fire resistant and shall have reflective striping as per the specifications outlined in Appendix IV of this policy. BP Canada requires that all employees, contractors wear fire resistant/retardant outerwear with reflective striping while working on BP worksites. Visibility is a safety requirement. See Alberta OH&S GSR Section 18, or B.C. WCB OH&S regulations section 8.24, 8.31., and Saskatchewan and Ontario Applicable Regulations. FRW coveralls are prone to damage from sparks, welders and welder’s helpers may wear FRW CarHarts or Leathers but the recommended garment for welders is FRW Excel Brown Duck. Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments section 84, and Regulation 213 Construction Projects, sections 21 and 25 Limitations of Fire Resistant Work Wear: 4.0 4.1 e protective garments addressed in **CGSB 155.20, Th and outlined in Appendix II of this policy, provide a measure of protection against unplanned exposure to hydrocarbon flash fire (approximately 84 kw/m2) for relatively short periods of time, typically three seconds or less. Protective garments may serve to reduce the severity of burn injury as a result of a flash fire and may not completely prevent an injury. Garments that continue to burn after a flash fire incident are hazardous. 5.0 5.1 Use of Protective Work Wear The protective work wear should provide a good functional fit for maximum protection and comfort 171 Fire Res. Workwear (CAPP), Consumer Guideline for the Selection of Fire Resistant Work Wear for Protection Against Hydrocarbon Flash fires. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Fire Res. Workwear on the job. Users should be aware that the fit of the garment could have a direct influence on how much protection can be provided by a particular garment. For example, a garment that is too loose or too tight will not offer maximum FR protection. 5.2 The protective work wear must be worn properly. The zipper must be worn closed and sleeves and cuffs worn down and secured. For maximum protection collar should be worn closed. 5.3 ingle layer protective garments are more effective S when worn over an additional layer of clothing (See Appendix I) 5.4 rotective neck, head, hand and foot coverings P should be worn if the occupational hazard warrants their use. 5.5 Certain synthetics or synthetic blends worn as undergarments may not be appropriate for use under fire resistant work wear, as the transferred heat from a flash fire may cause them to melt. Undergarments with melt resistant properties are required (e.g. cotton, aramid, wool). See Appendix I. Rainwear, high visibility vests and garments shall be in accordance with applicable sections of **CGSB155.20. Applications where disposable garments could be used are to protect regular FRW from extremely dirty jobs (e.g., tank cleaning, equipment tear down), or other fabric degrading jobs (e.g., painting). 5.6 5.7 WARNING: Disposable garments shall only be worn over fire resistant garments and must meet the flame resistant 172 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. NOTE: The outer most primary garment in any protective ensemble shall not be made of any fabric that burns, melts, or drips. The use of a garment that burns, melts, or drips that is worn over a Fire Resistant garment may contribute to the severity of a burn injury. 6.0 6.1 Where Fire Resistant Workwear Is Required Fire resistant work wear shall be worn whenever an employee enters a BP worksite where there is foreseeable exposure for a hydrocarbon flash fire or an explosion from combustible gas or natural gas liquids is present. These foreseeable hazardous areas include but are not limited to: • Service rig operations • Gas plants • Pipelines, pump stations • Oil batteries • Natural gas liquids facilities • Aircraft refueling operations • Laboratories • Wellheads • Construction sites • Drilling rig operations 6.2 6.3 If, following a documented (e.g. MOC) site specific hazard evaluation, by the BP representative or designate in charge, it is determined that there is no foreseeable exposure to an accidental release of explosive, or flammable mixtures, (e.g. an office setting or while driving company vehicles), these areas 173 Fire Res. Workwear test and be approved as outlined in**CGSB 155.20. They are not intended to be the primary garment for workers. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Fire Res. Workwear or tasks of exception where fire resistant work wear is not required, will be exempt. 7.0 Fire Resistant Work Wear Material Selection and Ordering BP Canada identifies the preferred material and garment selection for its workers, through contractual agreements with a garment manufacturer. (See Appendix II). All fire resistant work wear selected for use must meet or exceed the requirements established in the Canadian General Standards Board, **CGSB 155.20, “Work wear for Protection Against Hydrocarbon Flash Fire”. U se form GHSSER MF 90001 to order work wear. Obtain appropriate approval prior to faxing to supplier. Fire Resistant Work Wear Provisions 7.1 7.2 7.3 8.0 8.1 anagement, either local or within a Performance M Unit, must develop a site specific policy that addresses the following points: • Employee eligibility for FRW • Type of garments (See Appendix II) • Quantity of garments • requency of replacement and process for handling F • Approval process for purchasing FRW garment(s) • How garments will be repaired in their area • Handling of garment maintenance, and • Other sections of this policy as applicable 174 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 9.1 nsures that all work is conducted in accordance with E approved procedures, equipment and training. 9.2 aintains assigned fire resistant work wear in a proper M manner, e.g. sleeves rolled down, to ensure maximum protection. 10.0 Employee Training 10.1 As an important part of using personal protective equipment employees must be familiar with: • When and why FRW is required to be worn • The capabilities and limitations of FRW use • Proper garment care • The proper wearing of the garments • e potential hazards associated with the use of Th non-fire resistant work wear in a flash fire sit tion As with all employees’ training, this should be documented on individual training records or safety meeting attendance minutes. Contractor and Visitor Requirements 10.2 11.0 11.1 Contractors are required to wear fire resistant work wear at all times and under the same conditions as that of BP staff. 11.2 Fire resistant work wear worn by contractors must meet or exceed the requirements of **CGSB 155.20, or as outlined in local area site-specific requirements for contractors. 11.3 nless prior contractual arrangements are made with U BP, contractors are required to have a fire resistant 175 Fire Res. Workwear 9.0 Employee Responsibilities Pre-treat oily stains by either rubbing liquid detergent or powdered detergent mixed with water into the stain or use a 176 .3 dequate decontamination of protective work wear. Workwear work wear policy that complies with the applicable safety regulations as detailed in Operating Policy. 11. at company expense. 12.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. which could reduce flame resistance. 12.2 Repairs should only be made with components. repairs and approved alterations to fire resistant work wear will be handled on a local basis. Fire Res. 12. which comply with the original garment’s specifications and construction.1 To ensure proper repair and maximum garment longevity. The site-specific FRW policy should also address this item.5 Visitors unless otherwise instructed by a local area site specific fire resistant work wear guideline. Where oily soil is present. as required. periodic dry cleaning of garments may be necessary in order to remove flammable contaminants or contaminants which may impair the flame resistance.4 nless defined in the site-specific fire resistant work U wear policy. by laundering or dry-cleaning is imperative in order to maintain flame resistance and thermal protection. 12.4 hen laundering protective garments. a visitor is defined as a person who normally is not employed at the specific work location. 11. launder sufW ficiently to prevent build up of hard to remove stains. must wear fire resistant work wear at all times. A according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.0 Maintenance of Protective Work Wear 12. Workwear pre-wash product recommended for oil stains. 12. It is important to minimize the build up of static electricity on workwear in order to prevent the 177 Fire Res. It is harder to remove oily soil with cool wash water . There are products which will lessen the effectiveness of the flame resistance.0 Static Electricity 13. It is imperative that in situations where static electricity poses a significant hazard that the body be grounded regardless of the type of clothing worn.7 ee Static Electricity section for additional mainteS nance recommendations. Clothing can generate static electricity of sufficient energy to ignite combustible atmospheres. in particular: a) hether the use of chlorine bleach is advised W or should be avoided b) hether a heavy-duty soap can be used or W laundering must be limited to a heavy-duty synthetic detergent 12. the responsibility for keeping issued FRW reasonably clean and free of flammable or combustible materials that could degrade the fire resistant characteristics of the clothing will remain with the employee. Use a heavy-duty liquid or powdered laundry detergent and the hottest water recommended on the garment label.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.5 Follow all laundry precautions on the garment. 13. 12.6 Unless otherwise decided by local management.1 e major static hazard is the body which can store a Th large static charge. All cleaning must be done in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. 13.2 orkers should be grounded before entering a W high-risk area to minimize the possibility of static build-up and discharge. The antistatic treatment must be added during each laundering according to the manufacturers directions. 13. Appendix I Clothing Worn Underneath Fire Resistant Work Wear Other material worn in conjunction with fire resistant work wear (e. Friction of one fabric against another may contribute to the generation of electrical charge.g. While the outermost layer of work wear worn must be of fire resistant material clothing worn underneath shall be of a nonfusible type.5 ver drying in the dryer should be avoided to miniO mize static build up. clothing that does not melt. Workwear clothing from becoming a source of ignition for a flash fire. 13.4 ne approach to reduce the static build up on O garments is to use an antistatic treatment during laundering. Fire Res. 13. This treatment works by trapping water on the fabric to distribute the static charge through conductivity.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. That is.3 orkers should also avoid removing any garments W while in the high-risk area. clothing worn underneath) should not contribute to the injury of a worker in a hydrocarbon flash fire situation. Examples of acceptable nonfusible materials that can be worn underneath fire resistant outerwear include: 178 . Use form gHSSEr MF 90001 to order work wear. Workwear .. located in Edmonton. Alberta supplies all Fire Resistant Work Wear to BP Canada Gas PU and NGL BU employees.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The material garment selection (see below) and contractual arrangements have been approved by BP’s Fire Resistant Work Wear Committee (see Appendix III). Approved Material and Garments Listed below are the Blue colored garments that can be purchased as standard issue garments. 179 Fire Res. Cotton Kermel Nomex Linen Viscose Proban Appendix II Wool Leather Fire Resistant Work Wear Supplier Bulwark Protective Apparel Inc. Any other garments purchased must have management approval. Workwear Style CLB6RB CNB6RB CLC8RB BLC8RB SLU2LB SLU2NV SND6RB SND6NV PLJ8NV PNJ8NV PNJ8RB JLP8RB JLR8RB JNR8RB JLJ8RB JNJ8RB SEH6NV LNS2NV KEL2LB HLH2RB HNL2NV HNM2NV HNB2NA BLF8BD BLN4BD JLC2BD KNV20RB SEL2NV SEK2NV Fabric Mesh or Solid Excel FR Royal Nomex IIIA Royal Excel FR Royal Excel FR Royal Excel FR Light Blue Excel FR Navy Nomex IIIA Royal Nomex IIIA Navy Excel FR Navy Nomex IIIA Navy Nomex IIIA Royal Excel FR Royal Excel FR Royal Nomex IIIA Royal Excel FR Royal Nomex IIIA Royal Excel FR Navy Nomex IIA Navy Excel FR Light Blue Excel FR Royal Nomex IIIA Navy Nomex IIIA Navy Nomex IIIA Natural Excel FR Brown Duck Excel FR Brown Duck Excel FR Brown Duck Nomex IIIA Royal Excel FR Navy Excel FR Navy Appendix III BP Canada’s Fire Resistant Work Wear Committee: Chairman – Dennis Steciw Office Cell Office Cell Office Cell 403-233-1292 403-803-3085 403-233-1981 403-815-7215 403-233-1426 403-874-4375 Members - Jason Groot Bill Adam 180 . Product One Gas Monitor Pocket Unlined Coverall Unlined Coverall Insulated Coverall Insulated Bib Coverall Button Front Shirt Button Front Shirt Button Front Shirt Button Front Shirt Pant Jean Style Pant Jean Style Pant Jean Style Insulated Parka Insulated Bomber Jacket Insulated Bomber Jacket Lined Bomber Jacket Lined Bomber Jacket Men’s Navy Fleece Hooded Jacket Insulated Vest Shopcoat Hard Hat Hood Hard Hat Liner Hard Hat Face Mask Balaclava Brown Duck Unlined Bib Overall Brown Duck Lined Bib Overall Brown Duck Lineman’s Coat Traffic (orange) or Visitor (blue) vest Mock styled neck long sleeved FRW shirt Regular Style Neck Long Sleeved FRW Shirt.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Fire Res. com/Publications/OHSRegulation/WCBStandards. section 69. Workwear Appendix IV Refer to the table below for the minimum configuration for reflective striping on outermost garments for use by workers working for BP or on behalf of BP.ca Due to the fact that welders wear leathers on the upper portion of the chest. This will ensure that the minimum required amount of striping shows when they are wearing leathers.alberta.pdf Welders Ontario Regulation 213 Construction Projects.asp?ReportID=30947 AB OH&S Personal Protective Equipment – Flame Resistant Clothing Part 18http://employment.gov.on. .worksafebc.1 BC WCB Standard Protective Equipment Standard 2-1997 – High Visibility Garment - http://www2.e-laws. 181 Fire Res.1 - Retro-reflective and fluorescent garment requirements http://www. Type of Worker: Alberta BP Employee Alberta Full Time Equivalent Contractor working in BC Contractor working in AB Minimum Striping Requirements based on legislation below: Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia Occupational Health and Safety Worker in Ontario: Regulation 213 Construction Projects.ca/documents/WHS/WHSLEG_ohsc_2006. section 69. their garments will need to have an additional band of striping around the waist of their garments.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. e.18(2)) RESPONSIBILITY: It is the responsibility of the BP Employee in charge to ensure that adequate First Aid Equipment is available. and strategically located for ease of availability.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. during all working hours • e service and attendant should be accessible Th where the attendant can reach injured workers within 10 minutes walking time or driving time to render first aid. off-site communications • e attendant must not be assigned or undertake Th activities that will interfere with the attendant’s ability to receive and respond to a request for first aid • e attendant should be present in the area Th served. First Aid Equipment FIRST AID EQUIPMENT AND MEDIC PURPOSE: To establish practices and provide equipment and emergency conveyance to ensure that adequate medical first aid treatment is available at all BP worksites. APPLICATION: All BP Canada worksites where employees or other workers are present on a temporary or permanent basis. i.. As per provincial regulations employees must be familiar with their location 182 . (BC First Aid Regulation G3. PROCEDURES: Equipment: • tandard first aid equipment requirements must S be available and maintained for each worksite in accordance with provincial regulations • mergency conveyance must follow provincial E regulations • ach worksite should have access to occupational E medical advice. APPLICATION: All facility and field operations. the valve should be opened slowly. • hen sampling or checking is being done at a W bleed valve.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. minimum requirements are set out in Regulation 1101 First Aid. under the Workplace Safety and Insurance Act. 183 Gas & Liquid Sampling . In Ontario. and adequately trained as per provincial regulations to render first aid.” They must not be completely liquidfilled. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: The sampling of gases and liquids represents a danger to personnel and equipment due to the nature of the fluids and the conditions of temperature and pressure present. and has a pressure rating sufficient to handle the working pressure. GAS AND LIQUID SAMPLING PURPOSE: To provide a guide for the safe sampling and handling of gas and liquids samples. • pecific procedures are necessary when sampling S propane and butane in special sampling “bombs. • pplicable personal protective equipment shall A be worn while sampling. as they are not designed to withstand the extreme pressures of liquid expansion. the approved container P must be checked to ensure that it is of suitable construction for the gas or liquid being handled. • All sample containers must be properly labeled. Static Electricity – [See: Electrical] PRECAUTIONS: • rior to sampling. TRAINING: Only properly trained personnel should be taking samples. APPLICATION: All plant/field activities and equipment. resulting in a sudden release of energy. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: All rotating equipment. belts. Guards If no flow occurs. a blockage could blow loose when the valve is opened wide. sour gas) [See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Personal Protective Equipment] [See: Permits] [See: Safety Standby] • Transportation and Handling: • e handling and transportation of samples must Th comply with Government regulations for the transportation of dangerous goods (TDG) and the requirements of WHMIS.. etc. GUARDS PURPOSE: To provide safe work practices for protection of personnel from rotating equipment and heat sources. pulleys. that present a hazard to personnel must be guarded. (i. This could result in fire and/or injury due to the escape of gas at high pressure. grinder.e. Any openings that could present a hazard to personnel must be guarded..Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • ite-specific procedures shall be developed to S identify the hazards associated with sampling. 184 . 1 Scope and Applicability This practice is applicable to all Canada Gas Performance Unit employees. the equipment must be marked and suitably illuminated to identify and minimize the hazard. equipment may have to be operated without guards in place. contractors. must be insulated. clad. The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all reasonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety of personnel who are or may be required to work with their hands. [See: Energy Isolation] PROCEDURES: The guarding requirements and design for various aspects of oil and gas operations are covered in Provincial OH&S Regulations. HAND PROTECTION PRACTICE 1. In this case. Guards should be re-installed prior to start-up.2 1.0 1. Guards must be replaced as soon as possible. PREPARATIONS: Before any guards are removed from rotating equipment.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. sub-contractors and visitors to CGPU work sites. The requirement set forth in this practice will act as the minimum requirements. 1. . Specific contractors. the equipment must be locked out and tagged.3 185 Hand Protection All piping and equipment operated at a temperature that could cause personnel injury. guarded or otherwise protected. PRECAUTIONS: Under some maintenance circumstances. subcontractors and visitors on any (BP Canada) controlled sites. conditions present. punctures. Other types of PPE for hands include barrier creams. Hand Protection manufacturers or plants may have more stringent requirements. shield or isolate personnel from chemical and physical hazards.0 Purpose Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is intended to protect. chemical handling. the more stringent requirements will prevail. welding). not including any hot work (i. cuts or lacerations. In event of any discrepancies. finger guards. Drilling and Well Service activities are granted an exception to use cotton Green King gloves.e. • Chemical Resistant - Neoprene/Nitrile Gloves/ atural Rubber/Polyvinyl Alcohol PVA / Polyvi N nyl Chloride PVC/Viton 186 . This practice outlines the type of gloves that personnel must wear when performing jobs that expose the hands to absorption of harmful substances. and duration of exposure. 2. cots and palm pad mitts alone or in combination with Gloves. leather palm gloves will serve as the minimum requirement for all (BP Canada) employees. potential hazards identified and performance characteristics of glove material. sheet metal handling and electrical work. scrapes and cuts associated with the day-to-day activities on construction sites. 3. abrasions. Selection of hand protection is based on evaluation of the task being performed. contractors.0 Glove Selection • eneral Purpose - Leather Palm Gloves G For general construction work. This practice addresses the proper selection of gloves for activities. thimbles.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. chemical or thermal burns and harmful temperature extremes. Leather palm gloves will provide protection against abrasions. or lock blade knives. Additional information on the proper selection and use of chemical resistant gloves is available from the chemical manufacturer. sheet metal handling and insulating. When working with chemicals. (jack knife blades that do not use a lock blade mechanism are not allowed). jack hammering. use of utility. but also the dexterity and sensitivity that the gloves provide. Other Some specific tasks might require special and specific protection i. unlined. understood and the protective measures as prescribed by the Manufacturer is followed. chemical compatibility and gauge. • Electrical Work - Rubber Gloves Important to ensure the gloves being used has the correct voltage rating for the specific task. i. lined vs. banana. requires gel padded antivibration gloves.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) When working in areas where NORM could be present gloves should provide protection from physical hazards not chemical and most importantly must be disposable. ensure that the applicable Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) is available. has been read.e. 187 Hand Protection . abrasion and cut resistant gloves shall be worn. length. • Heat/Temperature Resistant - Welding Gloves Important considerations when selecting welding gloves are not only the heat protection it provides. glove manufacturer and occupational hygiene. • brasion/Cut Resistant - Kevlar/Kevlar- ComA posite Gloves In applications where the potential for cuts and abrasions to the hands are high.e. Important things to keep in mind when selecting gloves are cuff style. Launching / Retrieving Pipe / Tubing Handling. Chiseling.. lubricants. paints. 188 . Threading Pressure Washing Process Equipment Modifications – Pressuring / de-pressuring lines & line breaking Inserting / removing blinds.0 Tasks not normally requiring hand protection While this practice requires the use of hand protection while conducting work it is recognized that some job tasks must be performed without an individual wearing hand protection.If retrieving or Glove Selection Chemical Resistant Leather (per MSDS)1 Welders / Thermall y Insulated Cut Resistant (e. hydrocarbons. Although a thorough evaluation of the types of hand protection available should be carried out prior to making this decision.. Hand Protection Table 1 gives examples of job tasks and the proper selection of gloves for that task Table 1 Example Job Tasks / Work Activities Requiring Hand Protection Abrasive Blasting Biological Substances – Chemical Handling (e.g. & fuels) Compressor / Pump / Engine / Crane – Maintenance Chipping.g.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Grinding. solvents. engine oils. Hammering. orifice meters & controllers If using chemical additives . & gauges Operating valves. additives. Scraping Electrical Work on Energized Equipment Heaters / Reboilers – Lighting of Housekeeping (moving equipment & debris) Ladders – Use of NORM – Exposure to Pigging . sight glasses. Cutting. Kevlar®) Voltage Rated (per NFPA 70E)2 4. smoking. respirators.g. etc. In order to comply with this practice. wiring connections. computers etc. SCBA's. Examples of job tasks that may not require the use of gloves are listed in Table 2 Table 2: Example Job Tasks / Work Activities Not Normally Requiring Hand Protection Activities conducted inside of living quarter.. etc. multi-meters. Teflon tape. eating. cleaning safety glasses. the minimum required hand protection defined in this practice must be worn by all employees. gas meters.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Second the task being performed requires micro/ precise movement of hands fingers and the use of gloves cause a loss of dexterity. etc. control room and break room settings Specific Examples office work. tube fittings and ferrules. two-way radios. Kevlar®) . contractors and visitors to (CGPU) sites unless a properly performed and documented hazard assessment shows that hand injury hazards can be eliminated or controlled. Table 1 Example Job Tasks / Work Activities Requiring Hand Protection Respirable Fibers – Handling of Rigging Scaffolding – Erection and use of Sharp Objects / Materials – Exposure to Tank Gauging Temperature Extremes – Exposure to Tool Use (non-powered and powered) Welding / Cutting / Brazing Voltage Rated (per NFPA 70E)2 or or Fitters & Helpers Welders The justification is two fold. cameras. Using fine instruments and electronics Donning PPE 189 Hand Protection Glove Selection Chemical Resistant Leather (per MSDS)1 Welders / Thermall y Insulated Cut Resistant (e. hearing protection. Pride Route meters. Working with small hardware and equipment ¼” bolts/nuts/screws/pins. fall protection. adjusting programmable flow meters. First the task being performed is considered low risk with respect to hand/finger injury potential. attach a list if necessary: Name.0 Hand Protection Hazard Assessments OH&S Regulations require that an employer shall ensure that a known hazard which cannot be readily controlled or eliminated and that has the potential for causing serious injury be identified and brought to the attention of workers who may be exposed to the hazard. Step 3 - Document and maintain the hazard assessment at the work site (Attachment 1 or similar forms may be used for the assessment). Complete hazard assessment below and maintain document on site Location: List the tasks to be performed: Identify and list the hazards associated with the task: List the control measures (if any) taken to reduce the risk of hand injuries: List the hand protection required: List of personnel performing task(s). For individual jobs the hazard assessment may be approved by the permit issuer. signature and title of personnel conducting assessment: Reviewed by BP Project Manager or Designate: Date: Approved Not Approved Date: 190 . the minimum required hand protection must be worn by all affected personnel. Hazard Assessments may be performed on tasks to determine if hazards may be present that necessitates the use of specific hand protection. Step 2 - Develop procedures that will eliminate or control identified hazards to the hands. 5. If identified hazards cannot be adequately addressed. Step 1 - Determine what specific job tasks hazards are present.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. For repetitive jobs the hazard assessment will be approved by the plant/facility supervisor. 1 2.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.0 Scope of Forms 7. 1.0 2. Communication topics should be adjusted to focus on the scope of work for the day and the site specific HSSE issues associated with the project.2 3.0 3. It is the responsibility of the job team lead to reference this practice while developing and reviewing Job Safety and Environmental Analyses.1 191 .2 2.0 Key Responsibilities Field Visits Operating supervisors are responsible for implementing and enforcing this practice. whereas all personnel are responsible for complying with it. 6. It is the responsibility of each employee to follow this procedure when preparing for a field visit. General Procedures H SSE issues at a site location will vary based on the daily activities.0 1. This procedure applies to all Gas Performance Unit activities. Responsibility I t is the responsibility of each team leader or his/ her designate to review this procedure as part of employee training and awareness. 7.1 gHSSEr MF34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment GUIDELINES FOR FIELD VISITS 1.1 Scope and Applicability This procedure identifies the steps needed to promote HSSE issues during field visits by CGPU staff. 4 3. HSSE opportunity cards). safety training tickets as required (e.H2S alive) and proof of indoctrination. If you wish to participate in a meeting with the work group. don’t stop the regular flow of work.3 3.g.6 192 . W hile at the site.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. go.2 Field Visits P rior to the visit. stop. I t is recommended to review the 8 golden rules of safety and identify relevant issues for the scope of work at the location before proceeding to the location. T ogether with the foreman or the site supervisor. contact the relevant HSSE coordinator and/or project manager and/or OCM and/ or foreman to identify any functional group HSSE issues. consult the person in charge of the site prior to your visit to determine what time pre-job operations or HSSE meetings are held. HSSE tools (SOC cards if trained in SOC. Take time to ensure familiarity with HSSE awareness programs (e. conduct a site walk around that can include any of the following components: • Evaluate housekeeping • Talk to workers about their activities • Carry out Safety Observation Conversations (SOCs) • eview compliance with one or two practices or R relevant HSSE issues as identified by the group HSSE coordinator • eview status on follow up of actions on gHSSEr R notifications and alerts for that location 3. green hand. P rior to the site visit ensure all people traveling to the site have the appropriate PPE. site specific gHSSEr notifications or alerts and any current HSSE. think. ISO 14001).g. 3.5 3. 4.8 3. contractors and facilities POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Slipping 193 Housekeeping • eview compliance with applicable permit R conditions .0 Documentation 4.1 afety Observation Conversation (SOC) cards S (C-15) and HSSE Opportunity cards (C-1518) should be utilized during field visits. 3. They are available through all HSSE representatives in Calgary. HOUSEKEEPING PURPOSE: To outline the requirements for housekeeping from the point of view of safety of workers.10 resent your findings to the functional group manP ager or OCM as appropriate upon returning to the office. APPLICATION: All BP Canada employees. 3.7 H old a debrief meeting with the foreman or site supervisor to discuss your findings and suggestions before leaving the site. L eave completed HSSE opportunity cards and SOC cards with the foreman or site supervisor or provide to the HSSE representative in Calgary to ensure inclusion in the monthly HSSE statistics.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. buildings.. Housekeeping • • • • • Tripping Fire Falls Crushing Caught Between (Pinned) PROCEDURES: • • • P oor housekeeping practices are responsible for many accidents in the work place. trash. is not considered to be adequate T ools and materials shall not be scattered around the walking or working surfaces while the job is in progress. even for a short period of time. and approved for continued operation S harp and pointed tools shall be stored properly. oil or other substances shall be cleaned up immediately. is dangerous W aste rags. All of it should be properly disposed of as soon as possible • • • • • 194 . scrap and waste materials disposed of. equipment and materials are an invitation to an accident N o job is complete until tools have been cleaned and properly stored.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Periodic cleanups. and the equipment and work location is in good orderly condition. With a little effort. equipment. materials. Leaving such tools lying around loose creates an unnecessary hazard S lick spots on the walking surface caused by water. Allowing this condition to exist. this problem is easily eliminated G ood housekeeping practices include keeping tools. must not be permitted to accumulate. Haphazardly scattered tools. or cleanups when time permits. and properties clean and in good order G ood housekeeping is the day-to-day responsibility of all employees and is a continual process. etc. ice and snow build up. shall be cross-tied or otherwise secured so it will not fall over. Worker’s must use caution in these conditions and apply immediate mitigating hazard controls such as: keeping walkways and stairs clean. They shall be removed immediately when found M aterial which is to be stacked.0 Purpose/Scope The purpose of this document is to describe the requirements and limitations for hot bolting and odd bolting in E&P operations for the North American Gas SPU. • P rotruding nails. 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • • • HOT AND ODD BOLTING PRACTICE 1.1 General The removal and replacement of flange bolts on live equipment is practiced for several reasons including: • Repairing corroded or damaged bolts • pgrading the material specification/grades of U bolts • inimizing time spent freeing bolts during plant M shutdowns 195 Hot & Odd Bolting • M aterials or equipment delivered to the job site shall be kept well away from the working area until needed . straps. spreading de-icer / sand / nut plug to improve traction and or barricading off unsafe areas to prevent workers from entry. Rolling stock such as pipe should be secured so it cannot roll onto an employee A isleways and walking surfaces shall always be kept clear of materials and equipment I t is each worker’s responsibility to take action and manage slipping hazards including that of mud. or wire shall not be permitted to exist in the work place. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2. Note: The scope of application is covered in Section 3. Hot & Odd Bolting Note: Hot and Odd bolting can be performed safely if planned.0 Definitions • ccountable Person is the person in the organizaA 196 . Due to the potential risk. and executed properly. planning.2 Potential Hazards 1.2.2 Odd Bolting In odd bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by: • educed gasket compression during bolt R removal • Inadequate tightening on bolt replacement • nadvertent re-pressurization of the equipment I during and subsequent to odd bolting.1 Hot Bolting In hot bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by: • educed gasket compression during bolt R removal • asket failure from over-tightening of bolts G on replacement • ailure of bolts due to the increased stress F resulting from adjacent bolt removal 1.0 of this document. engineered. Performance Unit Leaders should carefully consider whether to allow Hot and Odd Bolting in their operating areas and retain the right to prohibit Hot and Odd Bolting. replacing or retightening bolts on live piping and equipment is potentially hazardous but can be performed safely. Warning: Removing. 1. and carrying out these operations. The risk associated with performing Hot and Odd bolting should be evaluated against the risks associated with the start-up and shut-down of process equipment that would be required to depressure the flange in question and the lower risk option selected. Extreme caution needs to be exercised when assessing. 2. and operation of mechanical pressure systems 197 Hot & Odd Bolting tion that has the ultimate responsibility. as appropriate • esponsible Person is a suitably trained and R experienced individual who has been formally assessed as competent in Hot/Odd Bolting and has been given specific actions or areas of responsibility by an Accountable Person • ubject Matter Expert is an acknowledged expert S in mechanical engineering. use and updating of documents used in the management of a site • ot bolting is the sequential removal. This person is usually the SPU Mechanical Engineering Technical Authority • echnical Reviewer is a facility engineer or T subject matter expert competent in the design. • ompetent Person (CP) is the on-site BP C representative that is competent to supervise the Hot/Odd Bolting operation. cleaning. or replacement of one bolt at a time in a flanged joint. isolated and at low pressure or depressurized but not necessarily gas-free • e words bolt(s) or bolting includes bolts. stud Th bolts. when the system is pressurized or if the flange acts as secondary containment • dd bolting is the sequential removal of alterO nate bolts from a flanged joint when the system is shut down. H lubrication and refitting. maintenance. nuts and washers. This person is usually the Operations Center Manager or the Decommissioning Manager . The CP shall have a demonstrated knowledge and understanding of the process system that is to be Hot/Odd Bolted. studs. The CP shall be designated by the Accountable Person • ocument Control Management System is an D established means of controlling the issue.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. C toxic chemicals.0 Applicability 3.g. These joints shall be subjected to a full engineering assessment • re associated with transmission pipelines or A 198 . and for these flanges the lower rating shall be used • ave an operating temperature greater than H 0°F(-18°C) and less than 140°F(60°C) • Contain hydrocarbon liquids. tube sheet or shell joints. or asphyxiates • Are in cryogenic service • nvolve clamped flanges (e. or other nontoxic gases 3. and bolt count specified in the Tables 1 and 2. Hot & Odd Bolting 3. produced water.2 Specific Exclusions This procedure specifically excludes hot and odd bolting activities on piping systems and piping connections at vessels that: • ontain steam. etc.) • re non-standard flanged joints and/or all A those found on heat exchanger head. sweet natural gas. toxic oil or gas (sour gas). pressure rating. Grayloc. Older flanges may have a lower rating than those in Tables 1 and 2.1 Applicability This procedure applies to hot and odd bolting activities on piping systems and piping connections at vessels that: • re standard joint types on weld neck flanges A such as raised face (RF) or ring type (RT) joints in accordance to Tables 1 and 2 • ave steel flanges meeting the applicable H ANSI or API specifications • eet the pipe size. VictauI lic.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. flange M type. glycol. A PUL may decide to prohibit Hot and Odd Bolting in their area.0 4.3 Restrictions • nly one hot bolting operation may take O place in a facility at a time unless approved by the Accountable Person or his designee.1 ontrol of Hot Bolting Work that Conforms to the C Allowable Guidelines within this Practice The overall practice of Hot and Odd Bolting is prohibited in a PU until approved by the Performance Unit Leader (PUL) using the Management of Change process. An approved SIMOPS plan and MoC system must be in place • f the flange has an insulating kit. Th e Hot / Odd Bolting Work Form in Attachment 1 shall be used to verify and approve work in conformance with this practice. in the event of an insulation washer / sleeve failure • langes that have been sealed or patched shall F not be hot or odd bolted • o hot bolting shall be done at pressures N higher than those listed in Tables 1 and 2 Control of Work and Exception Process 4. 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 3.2 pproval for Hot Bolting Outside of the Guidelines A or any Odd Bolting In circumstances where the Accountable Person believes that hot bolting might be safely performed 199 Hot & Odd Bolting regulated gathering lines due to regulatory restrictions and the potential for high external loadings . a replaceI ment kit must be available onsite prior to the commencement of work. Hot bolting and hot work are not allowed within 100 ft (30 m) of each other. and flanges. drains.0 Hot Bolting allows for the replacement of one stud at a time until all the studs have been replaced on a weld neck flange. all existing studs shall be checked for tightness by torquing the flanged joint to the manufacturer specifications. Prior to removing any studs. emergency response plan. fire hoses etc. All new studs and nuts shall be torqued according to the manufacturer specifications. Bolts should then be removed and replaced one at a time in accordance with a specified cross bolting sequence/pattern. an MoC is required that includes: • full engineering assessment of the flange A • Risk Assessment outlining rigorous control A measures must be conducted (i. SIMOPS plan. Degradation due to corrosion must be assessed by the Subject Matter Expert before the procedure is allowed to continue. nuts. The risk assessment should include: a) s-built design of the flanged joint including A 200 . A BP Competent Person shall be present during all hot bolting activities. Hot & Odd Bolting outside of the applicability criteria in Section 3. Careful consideration must be given to corroded studs. mitigation measures.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Working on live piping and equipment should normally only be contemplated when the advantages have been assessed against the risk.) • recommendation from the Subject Matter A Expert and approval from the Accountable Person Procedure/Process 5.0 and/or outside of the requirements specified within Section 5.0 and where there is no other practicable alternative. Hot bolting of corroded nuts and studs is prohibited.e. the C flammability and/or toxicity of the process fluid).check that the pressure in the piping/equipment will be at the specified reduced value and that the process conditions can be held stable for the duration of the hot bolting operation. documented and discussed with all involved personnel prior to commencing the work. h) Maintenance history of the joint. b) ontents of the piping or equipment (e. . f ) osition and functionality of pipe supports P relative to the flanged joint - From a mechanical standpoint. c) esign and actual operating pressures and D temperature conditions . There should be no significant vibration of the piping at the joint. g) osition and type of flexible expansion joint P affecting the flanged joint. it must be established that there are no unacceptably high external loads and/or bending moments acting on the joint.g. i) ersonnel access and egress as part of a comP pleted Emergency Response Plan for this work activity. e) e location and condition of the nearest upTh stream and downstream isolation valves relative to the joint should be identified. d) e possibility of process upsets occurring. j) ethod of removing seized nuts - Hot work M cutting or burning of seized bolts is prohibited on flanges in hydrocarbon service due to the flammability hazard and/or the toxic fumes hazard when cadmium or zinc coated fastenings are burned. Cold cutting is permissible with the 201 Hot & Odd Bolting bolting and gasket specifications.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. the Th consequences of the upset and control measures that can be put in place to minimize/eliminate process upsets. 1 Hot Bolting Procedure Cold cutting of bolts on non-hydrocarbon lines can be used. and replacement shall be as follows: (1) efore the work starts. e. Use Table 1 and Table 2 in conjunction with local hot-bolting safety practices to enhance personnel safety and insure code compliance. k) ossible degradation of the bolts. and personnel are onsite b. examination. Bolt removal. P stress corrosion cracking. 202 . authorized personnel shall B check that: a. equipment. H P otential Hazards – In hot bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by: • educed gasket compression during bolt R removal • Inadequate tightening on bolt replacement • asket failure from over-tightening of bolts G on replacement The practice of hot bolting shall only be allowed for those flanges indicated in Table 1 (ANSI class flanges) and Table 2 (API class flanges). but the blowout potential of the gasket and its ability to be retightened should be considered and included in the work plan. All necessary materials. NOTE: Some flanges require a decreased pressure rating during hot bolting (from 9% to 72% less than normal pressure rating) or are not allowed at all (ANSI 150 class flanges).g. 5. All relevant procedural requirements have been met including all relevant HSSE requirements. l) Possible degradation of the gasket. corrosion. fatigue. Hot & Odd Bolting appropriate permit to work. m) idden or unseen anomalies or corrosion.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. (6) fter all the bolts have been replaced. If there is any doubt as to the integrity of the bolting. (4) Each bolt complete with nuts will be removed and examined. Damaged bolts and nuts will be disposed of and replaced by new items of the correct specification. ach of the existing bolts is tight to the correct E torque to ensure that bolts have not relaxed in service. such as loose bolts. Appropriate safeguards are in place . bolt type. (3) ot bolting shall be carried out on only one bolt H at a time. a final A tightness check will be carried out in the sequence specified in Figure 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and condition. material. it shall be replaced. d. e work form for Hot /Odd Bolting is Th prepared (see Attachment 1). Initial retightening of the bolts shall not introduce additional local compression of the gasket. Any abnormal conditions. e. Any comments shall 203 Hot & Odd Bolting c. The pressure in the piping and equipment is at the specified pressure and that process conditions are stable. b. (5) e bolt shall be correctly tightened and Th tensioned to specified torque figures obtained prior to starting the task. (7) e Competent Person shall inspect the comTh pleted job and sign the Hot/Odd Bolting form and other required permits. shall be reported to the Competent Person. or by other approved job-specific instructions. The torque figures shall be consistent with the flange design. in a sequence specified in Figure 1. Nuts and bolts found to be in reusable condition shall be cleaned and lubricated prior to reuse. (2) The authorized personnel shall check that: a. Exposed flange surfaces must be cleaned and the area under the nuts thoroughly lubricated. 1 e pressure in the piping and equipment Th is at the specified pressure and that process conditions are stable. odd bolting is preceded by hot bolting N (to ensure that bolts to be removed are in good condition and reasonably free to move).8.8. and replacement shall be as follows: (1) efore the work starts. Th e sequence of bolt removal will be specified 5. Hot & Odd Bolting be attached to the form. Appropriate safeguards are in place (2) ormally. (4) B olt removal shall be carried out according to the methods specified in the approved job procedure.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.2 ach of the existing bolts is tight to the E correct torque to ensure that bolts have not relaxed in service. 3. equipment.2 (5) 204 . (8) n completion of work. 3.8. c.3 ny abnormal conditions. (3) The Competent Person shall ensure that: 3. All relevant procedural requirements have been met including all relevant HSSE requirements. Odd Bolting Procedure Bolt removal. All necessary materials. shall be reported to the Competent Person. authorized personnel shall B check that: a. the completed Hot/ O Odd Bolting form should be filed within the Document Control Management System. such as loose A bolts. and personnel are onsite b. examination. The Competent Person should check the signed Hot/ Odd Bolting form for any comments that could be relevant to the odd bolting activity. Any comments should be attached to the Hot/Odd Bolting form.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. . O n completion of work. the completed Hot/Odd Bolting form should be filed within the Document Control Management System. Use 2ANSI 1500 23% pressure reduction 40% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force 10% pressure reduction 10% pressure reduction 10% pressure reduction 30% pressure reduction 40% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force 9% pressure reduction 9% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force Insufficient gasket-seating force 10% pressure reduction 10% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force Insufficient gasket-seating force 205 Hot & Odd Bolting as in Figure 2 or other job specific instructions. (6) Th e Competent Person shall inspect the completed job and sign the Hot/Odd Bolting form. (7) Table 1 (ANSI Class Flanges) Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1) (Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3) Under Operating Pressure) Normal Pipe Size 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 4” 4” 4” 4” 4” 4” 6” 6” 6” 6” 6” 6” 8” 8” 8” 8” 8” 8” 10” 10” 10” 10” 12” 12” 12” 12” ANSI Class 150 300 600 600 900 1500 2500 150 300 600 600 900 1500 2500 150 300 600 600 900 1500 150 300 600 600 900 1500 150 300 600 600 900 1500 150 300 600 600 150 300 600 600 Flange Type (4) Normal Bolt Count 4 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 12 16 20 20 Normal PSI Max 285 740 1480 1480 3705 6170 285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705 6170 285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705 285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705 285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705 285 740 1480 1480 285 740 1480 1480 RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RJ RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RJ RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RF RF RF RJ RF RF RF RJ 740 1480 1480 2850 3700 740 1325 1325 1975 575 3680 740 1350 1350 2220 3705 740 1480 1480 2220 3705 740 1325 1325 2220 3705 740 1480 1480 740 1480 1480 Hot Bolt PSI Max Hot Bolt Allowed No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Comments Insufficient gasket-seating force Not available. 2. Calculations are in accordance with ANSI B31. F is raised face type and RJ is ring joint type. Temporary is defined as no more than 10 hours at any one time and no more than 100 hours per year.3 code for “Occasional Variations”. R All flanges are weld neck. and with A193 Grade. B7 bolts.3.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. per ANSI B31. 206 . Hot & Odd Bolting Table 1 (ANSI Class Flanges) -Continued Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1) (Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3) Under Operating Pressure) Normal Pipe Size 16” 16” 16” 16” 18” 18” 18” 18” 20” 20” 20” 20” 24” 24” 24” 24” ANSI Class 150 300 600 600 150 300 600 600 150 300 600 600 150 300 600 600 Flange Type (4) Normal Bolt Count 16 20 20 20 16 24 20 20 20 24 24 24 20 24 24 24 Normal PSI Max 285 740 1480 1480 285 740 1480 1480 285 740 1480 1480 285 740 1480 1480 RF RF RF RJ RF RF RF RJ RF RF RF RJ RF RF RF RJ 740 1350 1480 740 1250 1480 740 1300 1480 740 1300 1480 Hot Bolt PSI Max Hot Bolt Allowed No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Comments Insufficient gasket-seating force 9% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force 16% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force 12% pressure reduction Insufficient gasket-seating force 12% pressure reduction 1. 3.5 flanges made of R American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-105 material at -20° F to 200° F. atings are for ANSI B16. 4. nly a single flange bolt can be removed at a O time. per ANSI 6. Calculations are in accordance with ANSI B31. References BP GoM Safe Practices Manual UKCS-SOP-075.3 code for “Occasional Variations”. Tools.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. atings are for API 6B & 6BX flanges made of R American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-105 material (for API 6B flanges 5K rating or less) or AIS 4130 (for API 6BX flanges 10K & 15K rating) at -20° F to 200° F. RJ is ring joint type. 2. Temporary is defined as no more than 10 hours at any one time and no more than 100 hours per year. nly a single flange bolt can be removed at a time. BP Amoco Piping Joints handbook 207 Hot & Odd Bolting Table 2 (API Class Flanges) . 3.3. O 4. Issue 2) D/UTG/054/00. Hot and Odd Bolting Procedure (April 2005. Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1) (Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3) Under Operating Pressure) Normal Pipe Size 1-13/16” 1-13/16” 2-1/16” 2-1/16” 2-1/16” 2-9/16” 2-9/16” 2-9/16” 3-1/8” 3-1/8” 3-1/8” 4-1/16” 4-1/16” 4-1/16” 5-1/8” 5-1/8” 7-1/16” 7-1/16” 7-1/16” API Class 10K 10K 5K 10K 15K 5K 10K 15K 5K 10K 15K 5K 10K 15K 5K 10K 5K 10K 15K Flange Type (4) Normal Bolt Count 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 Normal PSI Max 10000 15000 5000 10000 15000 5000 10000 15000 5000 10000 15000 5000 10000 15000 5000 10000 5000 10000 15000 RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ RJ Hot Bolt PSI Max 4100 5700 2900 3350 4650 3150 3350 4400 2850 3300 4400 2750 2800 4400 3075 3100 3300 3400 4650 Hot Bolt Allowed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Comments 59% pressure reduction 62% pressure reduction 42% pressure reduction 67% pressure reduction 69% pressure reduction 37% pressure reduction 67% pressure reduction 71% pressure reduction 43% pressure reduction 67% pressure reduction 71% pressure reduction 45% pressure reduction 72% pressure reduction 71% pressure reduction 39% pressure reduction 69% pressure reduction 34% pressure reduction 66% pressure reduction 69% pressure reduction 1. Key Documents. and with A193 Grade B7 bolts.0 B31. All flanges are weld neck. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Hot & Odd Bolting Figure 1: Hot bolting removal and tightening sequence. 208 . 209 Hot & Odd Bolting .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Figure 2: Odd bolting removal and tightening sequence. (No visual damage or signs of bending stress in joint) Joint free from vibration Operating Temperature <140�F (60�C) Flange type as per Section 5.2 are not violated YES NO 3) PREPARATION CHECKLIST (If NO is the correct answer (condition status) of any of the below items. The BU Management of Change Procedure shall be followed to document the exception process required by Section 4. Number of bolts as per Table in Section 5. then a full Engineering Assessment shall be completed as per Section 4.1 are met YES NO Pipe supports inspected and found satisfactory Adequate access for safe work Pressure of system at or below specified value as per Section 5.1. the work shall NOT proceed) YES NO YES NO Bolt removal sequence issued Provision for bolt cutting (if allowed) – Hot cutting is NOT permitted on hydrocarbon service.0 Applicability exclusions in Section 3. Bolt removal methods issued Bolt tightening procedure issued All requirements of Procedure met (4) CONDITION CONFORMANCE TO SPU HOT / ODD BOLTING PROCEDURE TECHNICAL REVIEW COMPLETE: TECHNICAL REVIEWER APPROVAL TO PROCEED: RESPONSIBLE PERSON FINAL INSPECTION: COMPETENT PERSON Emergency Response Plan prepared Equipment/materials available at site Signature Date Signature Signature Date Date 213 210 Hot & Odd Bolting Attachment 1 .al Standard Safety Practices Manual Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.0 Applicability requirements in Section 3. Piping Specs.0 Flange rated as per Section 5. Hot & Odd Bolting Attachment 1 HOT / ODD BOLTING WORK FORM HOT / ODD BOLTING WORK FORM (1) DESIGN CONDITIONS (from P&ID’s.0 Joint inspected and found satisfactory and free from leaks. Current Operations) Line/Vessel Number Normal Operating Pressure (psig) Line/Vessel Service/Fluid Joint Location(s) Gasket Type/Specification Number of Joints to be Hot Bolted Number of Bolts in Flange Bolt Diameter Line/Vessel Contents Normal Operating Temperature (�C/�F) Flange Standard/Rating Piping Specification Location Sketch Attached: YES / NO Grade of Bolt Material Torque Loading (max/min (2) SITE INSPECTION (If NO is the correct answer (condition status) of any of the below items. Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Maintenance History.1 of the Procedure with the appropriate approvals prior to proceeding.0 Operating Temperature > 0�F (-18�C) Ambient Temperature > 0�F (-18�C) Risk assessment completed as required by Section 5. Pressure should only be reduced to a point below the hydrate curve. the hydrates may plug the line and trap pressure as well as dissolve and release hydrocarbons and toxic gases after de-pressuring: • High pressure • Propelled solids • Explosive forces • Flammable fluids • Toxic products Hydrates NOTE: 1. they can pack solidly to form a restriction resulting in partial or no flow. In pipelines. This is referred to as “line freezing. IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for the proper identification and safe removal of gas hydrates. Some of the light hydrocarbons that are components of natural gas. is being de-pressured and opened. APPLICATION: All BP plant and field facilities.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.” POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Caution must be exercised when a line where hydrates are suspected. Hydrated lines should never be totally depressured. 2. DEFINITION: Gas hydrates are solid compounds formed by the reaction of a gas with water. form hydrates under pressure at temperatures above 0 degrees Celsius. Hydrates may occur as single or multiple plugs. HYDRATES. 211 . These hydrates form as crystals and look like snow. a site specific procedure must be developed following the Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers guidelines for the safe handling of hydrates. but not be limited to the following: 1. Removal: Prior to removal. Supervisor or designate must be notified when a hydrate is identified. a potential exists for sudden rapid movement of the hydrate which may result in damage to piping or vessels. A drop in flow should not be solely attributed to liquid hold-up. all threaded piping is to be no more than 1/2” NPT. particularly if the wellhead temperature and pressure are dropping. hen de-pressuring. A pipeline system should not be run when hydrates are forming. The same applies to flowing wells. 4. 2. All hydrates must be considered to be safety hazards. Depressuring valves must be needle or globe valves. the hydrate must be deW pressured from both ends with the differential pressure on both sides of the hydrate not to exceed 10%. hydrates must be considered as the possible cause. 3. 212 . unless methanol is being injected or the flowing temperature is being increased over a short period of time. Site specific procedure must include. PROCEDURES: Identification: Hydrates Static pressure spiking on pipeline systems is the first indication that hydrates are beginning to form. ll piping/equipment used for de-pressuring A will meet BP Process Piping specifications. If pressure is relieved on only one side of the hydrate.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. PROCEDURES: Properties and Toxicity of Hydrogen Sulfide: • ll personnel entering a facility where H2S may A be present must be aware of the properties and toxicity of hydrogen sulfide gas. A sign stating the legal description of the surface location. The two tables on the following pages show the properties and toxicity of hydrogen sulfide Identification of Sour Sites: • t each BP Canada work lease. • ll leases where H2S exists must have a form of A wind direction indication. all sources and A concentrations of H2S must be identified. PURPOSE: To set out safe work practices for the safe handling of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas by identifying the potential sources. They must be able to recognize its presence. and developing and applying special work procedures. 213 Hydrogen Sulfide HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) SAFETY . and know how to protect themselves from its lethal effects. Entrance roads to the lease must be considered part of the lease for posting purposes.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. name and telephone number of the licensee or operator must also be posted. The lease must be fenced in accordance with the applicable government regulations. training of employees. All areas where concentrations may exceed 10 PPM must have a sign posted at the lease entrance showing the poisonous gas symbol. APPLICATION: All personnel who may be exposed to Hydrogen Sulfide gas. 3 – 46. Hydrogen Sulfide PROPERTIES: • Color - Colorless • dor - Very offensive.0) H2S is heavier V 1 than air (thus low-lying areas may be more severely contaminated) • Boiling Point -60 Degrees C • xplosive Limits: 4. similar to rotten eggs in O small quantities • apor - Density .189 (air 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.0 percent by volume E in air • Auto Ignition Temp 260 Degrees C • ater Soluble Yes (4 volumes gas in 1 volume W water at 0 Degrees C) • lammability Forms explosive mixture with air F or oxygen TOXICITY Indoctrination Requirements for Work on Sour Sites: • t locations where H2S is present. 214 . H2S Alive A certification is required. ny duties other than routine shall be accordA ing to a site-specific procedure. 5. • efore any person enters the immediate area B where a system contains H2S in sufficient concentration such that the occupational exposure limits could be exceeded. Complete risk assessment to determine if respiratory protection and emergency back-up personnel are required. The atmosphere in and around all buildings and equipment located on a worksite must be controlled within the occupational exposure limits. 4. This limit cannot be exceeded at any time without respiratory protection 2. ontinuous monitoring equipment is present C in all buildings to be accessed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Communication monitoring. [See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Safety Standby] H2S TRAINING DEVIATION Workers that are required to perform work in potential 215 Hydrogen Sulfide Entry to Sour Work Sites: . or it has been checked according to a site-specific procedure. All employees who work in operations where they may come in contact with hydrogen sulfide gas in excess of the occupational exposure limits should be equipped with a personal hydrogen sulfide gas detector that is capable of alarming at 10 PPM unless continuous atmospheric monitoring is conducted or checked according to a site-specific procedure. all of the following conditions must be satisfied: 1. entry and work procedures are in place. 3. The exposure limits are as follows: 1 5 PPM – ceiling exposure limit. or having the potential to result in injury or property damage. or witness to. are responsible to: • revent further injury and property damage if P this can be accomplished without endangering their safety 216 . or witness to the incident. The worker being provided with the deviation is required to be accompanied with a BP representative for the duration of time on lease. Incident/Accident H2S atmospheres require current H2S Alive training. The deviation must also be supported with the individual being escorted 100% of the time on site with a worker with valid H2S training. an incident resulting in. the employees involved in. Refer to Form MF 91001 – Deviation from Standard/ Practice Form INCIDENT/ACCIDENT REPORTING PURPOSE: To provide incident/accident reporting requirements. Workers that are part of tours / inspections that want to enter potentially low risk conditions for H2S exposures and are not expected to engage in physical work activities may be provided with a temporary deviation to enter the site without having H2S Alive Training. (Refer to BU specific reporting guidelines) APPLICATION: All employees involved in. PROCEDURES: When an incident occurs.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A completed hazard and risk assessment with deviation form must be filled out in its entirety and signed by the OCM or his / her designate prior to entry. field.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. is not acceptable. he/she will initiate the Emergency Response Plan. • og all pertinent data for inclusion in inci L dent/accident report • Secure evidence If the BP Canada Supervisor or designate in charge of the worksite believes further action is needed to prevent loss of life or property. pipelines facilities or work locations where work is being conducted on behalf of BP Canada. vessels.. Leaving ladders leaning against equipment. LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDING – PORTABLE PURPOSE: To outline precautions for the safe usage of portable ladders and scaffolding. PROCEDURES: Storage: • adders must be removed and properly stored L after each use. 217 Ladders/Scaffolding • Report immediately to supervisor or designate . Site-Specific Procedure: • ach Performance Unit/Service Unit shall have a E written incident/accident reporting procedure. APPLICATION: All plants. etc. [See: gHSSEr MS 430] Note: Contact your HSSE representative for assistance with incident investigation and report preparation. and be secured from movement.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.5-2000. It must be positioned so that 218 . PRECAUTIONS: Portable Ladders: • n employer must ensure that a portable ladder A complies with: o SA Standard CAN3-Z11-M81 (R2001). C Portable Ladders o NSI Standard A14. American NaA tional Standard for Ladders – Wood – Safety Requirements o NSI Standard A14. Metal ladders must not be used in this application o When in use. the ladder must extend 1 meter past any platform or landing.2-2000. Ladders/Scaffolding Inspection: • adders and scaffolding shall be inspected prior L to each use. American A National Standard for Ladders – Portable Reinforced Plastic – Safety Requirements o adders must be equipped with non-slip feet L and be secured against movement o xtension ladders must be equipped with suitE able extension locks o Wooden and fiberglass ladders may be used only when working near or with electrical circuits.1-2000. tagged and replaced. Maintenance: • adders and scaffolding must be properly mainL tained to allow safe and trouble-free use. American NaA tional Standard for Ladders – Portable Metal Safety Requirements. or o NSI Standard A14. Defective ladders or scaffolding in need of repair must be removed from service. 5 meters. the top must be secured. scaffolding is recommended as an alternative 219 Ladders/Scaffolding it is no more than one quarter of its height away from the well or structure against which it stands. it should be handled with a rope o Only one person shall be on a ladder at a time • or heights over 6. If material must be transported. o In applications between 2 and 6. o The ladder should be moved as the work progresses o When on ladder the worker muster ensure three-point contact while climbing or stationary o When working from a ladder at a height over 2 meters. or (b) e manufacturer’s specifications for the Th stepladder permit • constructed portable/temporary ladder will A meet all material and construction specifications outlined in the Alberta OH&S Code Section 134 Scaffolding: • Standards and Applications: o AN/CSA S269: approved scaffolding must C be used when constructing and erecting scaffolding structures to work from. scaffolding must be in place • worker may not work from the top 2 rungs.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and the worker must have fall protection o Both hands should be free when climbing up or down ladders. A steps or treads of a stepladder unless: (a) e stepladder has a railed platform at the Th top. a ladder must not be F used.5 meters. and is secured and placed on a base that is level and stable . o caffolding must be constructed/installed in S accordance with all applicable regulations and as outlined in OH&S Code Part 23. o caffold erection and construction will be S conducted by a certifier competent person.FIXED PURPOSE: To provide direction for the design and installation of fixed ladders. o ll Work conducted from scaffolding will A require Toe boards. pipeline. or there is no tagging present. stairs and platforms. top rails. o caffold must be equipped with acceptable S access and egress. Ladders/Scaffolding to a ladder. rigs and field facilities. o caffolds must be constructed in accordance S with the manufacturer’s specifications. [See: Working from heights] [See: BP Golden Rule ‘Working at Heights] LADDERS. midrails and ladder well protection specifications prior to work commencing. PROCEDURES: 220 . o caffolds must be tagged appropriate to the S current inspected usable condition. tagging has expired. with appropriate documentation and time of inspection o o person shall utilize a scaffolding unit that N does not indicate by tagging safe for use or. APPLICATION: All plant. STAIRS AND PLATFORMS .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Canadian Standards Association] [Occupational. and c. The width of the treads and the height of the rise of a stairway are uniform throughout its length. c. Is between 800 millimeters and 920 millimeters above the front edge of the treads. Health and Safety Regulations] [See: BP Engineering Specifications] Lease Spacing Requirements (Reference only) PURPOSE: To outline the guidelines for working with fixed ladders and platforms on all facilities. SPECIFICATIONS: Stairways: o Facilities with Stairways utilized for access must ensure: a. and BP Engineering Specifications. and b. stairs and platforms shall comply with government regulations. . A stairway with 5 or more risers has the appropriate handrail required by this Code. Prior to the design of a permanent installation these documents should be consulted. Extends the entire length of the stairway b.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A stairway with open sides has a handrail and an intermediate rail or equivalent safeguard to each open side. and d. The treads of a stairway are level. Is substantial and constructed of material with 221 Ladders/Scaffolding The design and usage of fixed ladders. o Facilities utilizing stairs with 5 of more risers must ensure the stairway is equipped with a handrail that : a. A securely attached cover designed to support an anticipated load. or b. is provided at ladder way floor openings and platforms of fixed ladders. then they must ensure a temporary cover or other means of protec- 222 . published by the Construction Industry Institute. service stair or stile shall be at least 55 cm in width. c. If a fixed ladder is made of a material other than steel. When working on a platform with an opening or hole through which a worker can fall personnel shall be protected by: a. b. Guardrails and toes boards. Work Platforms: o Covering Openings : a. Ladders/Scaffolding properties the same as or better of lumber 38 millimeters by 89 millimeters d. Fixed ladder shall meet the requirements of PIP Standard STF05501 (February 2002). Fixed Ladders: o Design criteria: a. Fixed Ladders and Cages. or part of them. Post supporting a railing are spaced not more than 3 meters apart at their vertical centers. the facilities must ensure that the design is certified by a professional engineer as being as strong as or stronger than that required by PIP Standard STF05501. this does not apply at landings. Facilities shall ensure that a self-closing double bar safety gate. b.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If personnel remove a cover. or equally effective means. protecting an opening or hole for any reason. guardrail or toe board. A fixed walkway. o An facility must ensure that: (a) toe board required by this Code is not less A Toe boards: 223 Ladders/Scaffolding tion replaces it immediately. . (b) horizontal intermediate member spaced A mid-way between the top member and the base. and (d) espite subsection (1). a temporary guardrail D does not require a horizontal intermediate member if it has a substantial barrier positioned within the space bounded by the horizontal top member. Is posted near or fixed on the cover.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. toe board and vertical members that prevents a worker’s falling through the space. an employer must ensure a warning sign or marking clearly indicating the nature of the hazard: a. (c) ertical members at both ends of the horiV zontal members with intermediate vertical supports that are not more than 3 meters apart at their centers. If a temporary cover is used to protect an opening or hole. s not removed unless effective means of I protection is immediately provided. materials or equipment. and b. c. Guardrails: o Facilities must ensure that a guardrail required by this Code has: (a) horizontal top member installed between A 920 millimeters and 1070 millimeters above the base of the guardrail. (e) guardrail is secured so that it cannot move A in any direction if it is struck or any point comes into contact with a worker. runway or other permanent surface where guardrails are installed. walkway. o An facility must ensure that toe boards are installed at the outer edge above the work area if a worker may be under a permanent floor. or b) o have the side rails extend not less than T 1050 millimeters above the point at which the workers go on or off.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Ladders/Scaffolding than 140 millimeters in height above the surface of the work area. 224 . or materials can fall more than 1.5 meters A facility must ensure that toe boards are installed around the top of a pit containing a machine with exposed rotating parts if workers may be working in the pit This section does not apply to the entrance of a loading or unloading area if the employer takes other precautions to ensure that materials do not fall from the permanent surface while loading. o o o Rest platform exemption: o If each worker working on a drilling rig or service rig on a fixed double ladder is equipped with and wears a climb assist device that complies with the manufacturer’s specifications or specifications certified by a professional engineer.8 meters A facility must ensure that toe boards are installed at the outer edge above the work area of temporary scaffolding or a temporary work platform if materials can fall more than 3. and (b) e space between the bottom of the toe Th board and the surface of the work area is not more than 6 meters high. an employer is not required to: a) Provide the ladder with rest platforms. ramp. mezzanine. This practice outlines the types of safer heat mediums available to assist in thawing lines and the hazards associated with each application.0 Scope and Applicability Line Thawing 1.1 The purpose of this practice is to establish a safe means to provide a sufficient heat source to thaw frozen liquids inside of steel piping. Specific contractors. contractors. 1. the more stringent requirements will prevail. sub-contractors and visitors to CGPU work sites.2 This practice is applicable to all Canada Gas Performance Unit employees.3 The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all rea sonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety of personnel who are or may be required to participate in these types of activities.0 Purpose Thawing of frozen liquids in steel pipe is a high risk task that should never include the use of an open flame such as a “tiger torch” to transfer direct heat to the steel pipe. may provide a most dangerous fuel source for an open flame. Also included in the practice are considerations to prevent freezing in steel piping as 225 . 2. manufacturers or plants may have more stringent requirements. LINE THAWING PRACTICE 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 1. In event of any discrepancies. 1. Frozen hydrocarbon lines may have reduced pipe wall integrity and when the frozen hydrocarbon is heated and changes state to a gas.4 e requirement set forth in this practice will act as the Th minimum requirements. 0 Electrical Heat Trace – Portable generator or purchased power A good option is to strip insulation off of the frozen line and install electrical heat tracing. The heat trace 226 .0 Pre-work required prior to heating of frozen steel lines • rior to applying a heat medium to a frozen P line. Line Thawing well as options to consider during construction to assist in thawing lines once the lines are put into winter service. workers must ensure that the line does not have a differential pressure greater then 2800 kpa(g) • perations should attempt to carefully depresO surize both sides of the frozen section of the line • sing methanol carefully pressurize (manually U operated Baker pump) the upstream side of the ice plug without exceeding the MOWP of the line or 2800 kpa(g) differential across the ice plug. If at all possible the upstream product feed valve should be isolated • e work area must be flagged off to prevent Th unauthorized workers from entry • ensitive instrumentation and non steel fitS tings must be protected prior to applying heat to a steel line Type of heat mediums available for thawing frozen lines 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Consult the methanol MSDS to verify proper PPE • onsideration must be made to allow for liqC uid and vapor expansion as the ice plug begins to change state. 3. must be installed as per both CSA and the Electrical Code requirements. There are different options with the types of electrical heat trace being that it is available in both AC and DC supplies. The frozen line must have the insulation removed prior to applying steam to the bare pipe. and connect the stainless tubing to the steam supply and then carefully controlling the discharge out of the tubing with a control valve. Prior to construction. Caution must be used if applying steam vapor near insulation as moisture directed inside the insulation may in fact lead to external pipe corrosion. A recommendation rather then applying steam directly to the pipe is to use heat conduction by strapping stainless steel tubing to the suspected section of frozen pipe. If the heat trace is installed it does not have to be put into service and will provide an excellent option for assisting in thawing the line in the event of future freezing. insulation fibers (glass foam. selective piping should be evaluated during the HAZOP study to consider installing electrical heat trace lines before to the insulation is installed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. sharp or damaged insulation. Saturated steam – utility low pressure With the availability of mobile steamer units (field operations / well servicing) and onsite low pressure boilers (drilling rigs / large service rig operations) provide a good option to provide heat for the thawing of frozen lines. and if using a portable generator maintaining to the hot work permit and 8 meter rule for potential ignition sources. Hazards include electrical energy. There is minimal cost of doing this at the time of construction versus having to remove the insulation to apply a heat source. After the installation of the electrical heat trace the line is wrapped with insulation to maintain the heat to the pipe wall. Caution with regards to hot burner surfaces 227 Line Thawing . fiberglass or silicate). When utilizing purchased power the electrical connections must be explosion proof for a Class 1 Division 1 area. re-bundle the coupled lines with quick-wrap insulation. This type of application is dangerous and can only be used in open spaces and never used inside buildings due to the carbon monoxide concern. 5. A flexible rubber exhaust hose is connected to the tailpipe and directed to the frozen line. With this option it is more challenging to direct heat directly to the surface of the pipe without wasting heat. Operations must maintain a continuous LEL monitor upstream of the unit (when the heater is in operation. Step 1 - etermine what specific job tasks D 228 .) Hot air .) Hot engine exhaust – Internal combustion engine Another option that may be available is using the hot exhaust off of an internal combustion engine such as a field technician’s truck. Line Thawing and steam burns must always be controlled in addition to the hazard of the open flame ignition source of the boiler (hot work permit and adhering to the 8 meter rule.0 Hazard Assessments OH&S Regulations require that an employer shall ensure that a known hazard which cannot be readily controlled or eliminated and that has the potential for causing serious injury be identified and brought to the attention of workers who may be exposed to the hazard. The heater unit must again be positioned a minimum 10 meters from any process piping or building.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.supplied by a Herman Nelson type of heater Another option for heat medium is using hot air directed from a gas fired heater unit. An additional hazard is ensuring that the vehicle is safely parked outside of the 8 meter minimum. Hazards include: hot surfaces of the heater and open flame ignition sources as well as refueling requirements. The hot air is directed off of the discharge of the heater with the utilization of a series of flexible heater ducts. Key Responsibilities 6. Manual Lifting Step 2 - evelop procedures that will D eliminate or control identified hazards when required to thaw frozen lines. APPLICATION: This policy applies to all BP employees. 7.1 gHSSEr MF34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment MANUAL LIFTING AND HANDLING HEAVY OR AWKWARD LOADS PURPOSE: To establish guidelines for lifting. It is the responsibility of the Area Authority to reference this practice while developing and reviewing Job Safety and Environmental Analysis. contractors and third parties who have a responsibility for ordering or carrying out manual handling activities. whereas all personnel are responsible for complying with it. hazards are present.0 Scope of Forms 7.0 Operating supervisors are responsible for implementing and enforcing this practice. DEFINITION: The identification of manual handling activities that pose a risk to health and safety and the development of workplace 229 . Step 3 - ocument and maintain the hazard D assessment at the work site.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. moving or handling of any item. etc. refer to Guidance for Assessors Manual Handling Programme: HSSE Group Resource Occupational Hygiene and Environmental Health Team.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 230 . shipping and receiving goods on pallets. The evaluation should include identifying any manual lift or carrying tasks that have a potential to injure. Examples of common. Manual Lifting modifications are achieved through implementation of the procedure ‘Identifying and Assessing Manual Handling Risk’. PROCEDURES: SOC’s and/or Critical Task Analysis should have been completed for common and routine manual lifting and moving tasks. For help on identification. PREPARATIONS: All work involving manual lifting or moving must be evaluated before work begins. if available. perform a risk assessment and identify risk control measures that includes considering job redesign. However. Manual Lifting and moving forces should not exceed 20 kg or 4. routine tasks are: barrel moving. weight held close to the body. small pump lifting. perform a risk assessment before commencing work and detail risk reduction methods on the Safe Work Permit. furniture moving. PPE should also be considered such as gloves. risk assessments and risk mitigation. unrestricted lifting posture and a good grip. If it is not a routine task and procedures are not available. Refer to the site specific procedure. mechanical lifting equipment and/or training. this maximum force limit standard may be lowered to account for individual physical characteristics. protection from chemicals.5 kg during seated work. These weight restrictions only apply to ideal lifting conditions such as smooth lifts. valve replacements. straighten legs and body. as if to sit. eep your back straight but inclined forward far K enough so that your arms can lift vertically. Plan the lift. Do not twist your back while lifting the load. moving arms to a comfortable position. consider using the proper moving equipment. PROPER LIFTING TECHNIQUES: All workers should use mechanical means to lift objects heavier than 20 kg. Get help for difficult loads. Know your K limits. Safe manual lifting requires the following steps: 1. 8. 7. eep the object close to your body. Answer the following questions: • s it an awkward shape or have rough or sharp I edges? • oes it have to be carried greater than 10 meD ters? • Does it involve twisting of the body? • o you have to bend down or reach for it when D picking it up or putting it down? Manual Lifting • Is the item to be moved greater than 20 kg? If the answer is yes to any of the questions. 3. 2. eep your feet flat and 30-40 cm apart for a K solid stance. 9. Bend your legs half way. If circumstances are such that is not possible to use equipment to lift heavy or awkward loads. 6. To lift. then an alternative documented plan using a hazard assessment and site specific procedure must be developed to ensure an adequate level of safety to prevent injuries. Check your path is clear to where the object will rest. Grasp the object firmly.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 4. 5. Take a deep breath. 231 . NOTE: Meter Proving • ll manual lifts should be planned to elimiA nate any twisting of the back during the lift.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • hen in doubt. use mechanical means to W make the lift or move. if tests indicate such protection is needed. However. the meter prover operator must wear breathing apparatus when crude or products containing poisonous gases are handled. [See: Safety Standby] • ppropriate personal protective equipment must A be worn. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Static Electricity [See: Electricity] • Combustible/Toxic Fluids • afe work Permits should be issued for all meter S proving • ttention should be paid to lease lay-out to proA vide safe and accessible prover connections.[See: Respiratory Protection Equipment]. A safety standby may be required.[See: Lease Design] • nder most conditions. [See: Personal Protective Equipment] • roving lines and connections must be properly P identified according to government regulations. respiratory protection U will not be required. APPLICATION: All BP Canada Plant and Field locations. METER PROVING PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for safe Meter Proving operations. PREPARATIONS: 232 . Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. the bonding and grounding cable shall be properly placed so that the meters and prover are bonded together and grounded. all electrical connecManual Lifting 233 . 4. 2. 7. In order to protect against the build-up of static electricity. when using a prover that employs an electronic counter system. i. 5. and in position for immediate use. Also the wheels shall be chalked with park brake set. be sure the hoses are rated to stand the operating pressure. They must be visually inspected prior to use and replaced if their condition indicates a possibility of failure. TDG PROCEDURES: 1. Connections should not be drained on the ground. Always open the proper valves to relieve the pressure on dust covers before attempting to remove these covers. [See: Draining and Depressuring] 6.. In all cases. hen using flexible hoses to connect the prover W to the meter unit. Extreme care should be used when breaking connections or purging hoses and piping. This shall be the first thing hooked up at the beginning of a proving and the last thing disconnected at the end of the proving operation. WHMIS.C. the fire extinguisher should be removed from its holder and placed on the upwind side.e. ach portable meter prover must be equipped E with a minimum of 1 – 30# LTK B. When proving meters. t is recommended that the vehicle should not be I left idling while proving operations are underway. 3. Catch all drainings in a suitable container for proper disposal. A bonding and grounding cable shall be provided for each meter prover. dry chemical fire extinguisher. The BP Canada employee in charge is responsible for ensuring that safe meter proving operations are conducted. making it a possible hazard to the operator. PRECAUTIONS: When meter prover leveling jacks are used. so that the additional weight of the liquid will not unbalance the trailer frame.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. the power shall be turned off before the electrical connections are disconnected. MOBILE STEAMERS PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for safe use of mobile steaming equipment. 3. and job procedures adhere to all applicable government and BP Canada regulations and practices. RESPONSIBILITY: 1. they should be supported with blocks or firm footing. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: 234 . the prover operator is responsible for the safe operation of the meter proving unit. personnel. TRAINING: Meter Prover Unit operators must be properly trained in the safe operation of their equipment. APPLICATION: All BP Field facilities and leases. Mobile Steamers tions shall be made before the power is turned on. Th e Service contractor is responsible for ensuring that equipment. After the meters have been proved. For BP Canada-owned proving units. 2. . and electrical or sensitive equipment are not steamed. PRECAUTIONS: 1. Caution must be exercised to ensure that catalytic heaters. The steamer must be positioned a minimum of 25 meters from any wellhead. or process vessel. tank. and an appropriate work permit must be obtained. Caution must be exercised with respect to the expansion of metals and trapped fluid. He must conduct and document a pre-job safety meeting. instrument recorders. Any operation within 25 meters must be treated as Hot Work. • Steam Burns • hemicals Hazards: Any chemicals used with the C water must have the applicable MSDS available on-site and the appropriate labeling requirements must be met. instrumentation panels. i.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Permits] PROCEDURES: 1. an authorized BP Canada Representative must be on-site. 235 Mobile Steamers • Combustible Fluids . • Static Electricity [See: Electrical] PREPARATIONS: Where steaming could generate a hazard to personnel or equipment. All protective equipment required by government regulations and BP Safety Requirements must be worn during all steaming operations. WHMIS.e. fire and H2S detection heads. gas. and pointed towards the access road for quick exit. The Steamer should be upwind of any potential source of combustible gas. This equipment should be protected prior to steaming to prevent damage. where possible. [See: Personal Protective Equipment] 2.[See: Service Rig Safety] 2. Face to face communication with the person in charge of the site must occur before the pick up or unloading of equipment on the job site. 2. eavy Equipment includes pump trucks. Construction Sites and areas of heavy traffic. pickers. PREPARATIONS: All routine job procedures and practices must be followed before the heavy equipment is moved on to BP property. PROCEDURES: 1. tracked equipment (i. graders. Moving Heavy Equip. rig H trucks. MOVING HEAVY EQUIPMENT ON BP WORKSITES PURPOSE: This safety practice provides guidelines for the safe moving of heavy equipment on BP Canada worksites. etc. If no one is at the site. Dozers). APPLICATION: BP Canada Plants. Heavy traffic areas include highways and secondary roads and construction sites.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • erious injury or death [See: Personal Protective S Equipment] • ontact with piping or stationary equipment C [See: Ground Disturbance] • ontact overhead power lines [See: Electrical C Equipment] • ack of co-ordination with other operations [See: L Permit to Work] 1. Field Operations.e. the supervisor in charge or DEFINITION: 236 . quipment operators must wear provided seatE belts in equipment when equipment is in motion or engaged in an operation where the equipment may become unstable. 6.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Before operating powered mobile equipment. 8.e. hand wave. This person will be wearing distinguishable PPE 237 Moving Heavy Equip. etc. nod. call on a radio…) prior to entering the hazard area 9. . wellhead.) and the ground guide must be visible at all times. e right of way or lease boundary must be Th well flagged or otherwise defined such that the equipment operator will not enter into a trespass situation. all lights on the equipment must be operational or there is an alternate light source available. power lines. If the equipment operator is using a ground guide. 2. 7. 4. designate must be notified. f unloading or picking up equipment in I darkness. All employees must establish eye contact and have conformation of contact from the equipment operator (i. pipelines. 5. the communication hand signals at the end of this section should be used (See: Heavy Equipment Hand Signals at the end of this section. very piece of moving equipment shall have only E ONE individual directing it on the work site. The pre-job meeting and a safe work permit must detail the specific instructions of where the equipment is to be loaded or unloaded on the job site and the potential hazards on the job site i. 3. the equipment operator must complete a visual inspection of the equipment and the surrounding area to ensure that the powered mobile equipment is in safe operating condition and perform inspections periodically in order to ensure the continued safe operation of the equipment.e. Elbow at 90° Index Finger Pointing Up Making Circular Motion. Both Fists Clenched Together Initially. PRECAUTIONS: 1. Stop 10. Raise Attachment (bowl. Move Fists Apart in a Lateral Motion. unless under the direction of a ground guide. 2. Elbow at 90° Index Finger Pointing Down Making Circular Motion. 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Palms of Hands Turned Down with a slight Up and Down Motion Raise Hand to Head Heights with the Palm of Hand Towards the Machine. orkers on the worksite must wear reflective W striping on the FRC that are visible day and night while working around heavy equipment. Spread 3. Heavy equipment operators should be able to prove their competency operating the equipment. RESPONSIBILITIES: Responsibility lies with the BP supervisor on site to ensure the above procedures are followed. Emergency Stop Note: These signals are Intended for All Heavy Equipment Other Than Cranes. Unload 9. Heavy Equipment Hand Signals 1. Push First of One Hand Smacking into the palm of the Other. Quick Motion of the Arm with Fingers Curled and Thumb Extended. 3. Fingers Curled with Thumb Pointing Down. 238 . blade) Fingers Curled with Thumb Pointing Up. blade) 2. Moving Heavy Equip. quipment must maintain 8 meters separation E form wellheads and facilities.Lower Attachment (bowl. Standard Riggers’ Signals are to be Used for Cranes. Hands Sideways. Pull 5. Lower the Load 6. Raise the Load 7. Slow Down 8. APPLICATION: • ll BP operating facilities and associated personnel A • elected contractors may be included in audioS metric testing and noise exposure monitoring • ll other contractors are expected to comply A with provincial regulations regarding Hearing Conservations Programs Noise Exposure POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • oise levels in excess of the allowable 85 dBA N time-weighted average (TWA) for an 8-hour shift or 82 dBA TWA for a 12-hour shift • Key Performance Indicators • e hearing loss rate target for each work group Th is zero confirmed abnormal shifts and 7% confirmed early warning shifts PROCEDURES: 1.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. This noise map must be reviewed with onsite personnel and be posted at a prominent loca- 239 . NOISE EXPOSURE & HEARING CONSERVATION PURPOSE: To prevent the occurrence of occupational noise induced hearing loss. All employees whose noise exposures equal or exceed the allowable exposure levels shall be included in the Hearing Conservation Program. Refer to the BP Canadian Gas Hearing Conservation Code of Practice for more details. The sound level data shall be plotted on a diagram to generate the noise map of the surveyed area which includes buildings and outdoor areas. Area Sound Surveys: (Format Section) • ll facilities will have an initial sound level A survey conducted to establish a baseline. • f the employee’s exposure equal or exceed the I 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA or 12-hour TWA of 82 dBA. tion and accessible for worker review. W units. Areas where sound levels equal or exceed 100 dBA. • osimetry monitoring shall be repeated D whenever a change in production. Noise Exposure • reas shall be re-surveyed at a minimum of A every five years or shortly after a change in production process. process. etc. Temporary Worksites: • t is the responsibility of the BP Canada suI pervisor in charge. must be marked with signs that identify it as a high noise area and requiring the use of appropriate hearing protection. Identification of High Noise Sources: • here noise level in any location (buildings.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. equipment or controls which may increase/decrease the noise levels. the employee shall be included in the Hearing Conservation Program. 4. or his designate. to ensure adequatehearing protection is worn on all temporary worksites where noise levels exceed 240 . Employee Dosimetry Monitoring: • representative sample of employees. appropriate double hearing protection devices (earmuffs over earplugs) are required. 3. equipment or controls increases the noise exposures. may be monitored to determine the time-weighted average (TWA) noise exposure of a work shift.) or outdoor areas that exceeds 82 dBA. 2. • ll employees or contractors who enter areas A where the sound levels are 82 dBA or greater shall wear appropriate hearing protection. whose A work tasks may be exposed regularly to high noise sources. e. engineering and HSSE.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. docuN mented Noise Reduction Review must be conducted for all existing areas where noise levels exceed 100 dBA. 5. This review must include representatives from operations. within six months of their hiring date. or as per jurisdiction regulations. An acoustical engineer must also be included. RESPONSIBILITIES: • t is the responsibility of each supervisor and I site Safety Coordinator to ensure that noise controls and hearing conservation are implemented and enforced • ontractors are required to comply with these C 241 . • ll employees who are included in the HearA ing Conservation Program and are exposed to noise levels equal to or exceed 82 dBA TWA for a 12-hour shift or 85 dBA TWA for an 8-hour shift must have an audiometric testing every two years. Noise Exposure Audiometric Testing: • ll new employees must have a baseline A audiogram (hearing test) in conjunction with their pre-employment medical or. at the latest. • oise Reduction Reviews:A formal. 82 dBA. A formal review must be completed for all new facilities expected to have noise levels exceed 100 dBA in the facility design phase. fitted and used. i. Contact Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist to ensure appropriate hearing protectors are selected. rig operations. Hearing Protection Equipment: • ar plugs and/or ear muffs must be made E available at all worksites. APPLICATION: All personnel working on BP Canada worksite. These should be part of their Safety Program PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PURPOSE: To outline the requirements for the selection. PROCEDURES: 242 . noise controls and hearing conservation measures with the exception of the Audiometric testing and noise monitoring. These exemptions must be communicated to all applicable worksites. vehicles.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. control rooms. inhalation. [See: MSDS for hazardous material requirements. Personal Protective Equip. other non-hazardous areas. and use of personal protective equipment. POTENTIAL HAZARD: • xposure to physical and chemical hazards E can occur through contact of the skin. and ingestion • ll workers on BP Canada worksite must wear A approved personal protective equipment as identified as needed in the hazard assessment that is appropriate to the work being done. and the nature of the hazards involved. and casual visitors from some provisions of this section. as required and a deviation from standard completed. field tours.] PREPARATIONS: The Local Area Manager may exempt certain offices. care. eyes. For further information see applicable provincial regulations. An employer must ensure that. a hair net or other means of confinement for the hair must be used Eye Protection: • .A C approved side shields must be worn by all personnel at BP worksites where required. specifications.S. the worker is advised of the hazards and the alternatives to wearing contact lenses.S. When the nature of the work might result in an eye or facial injury. such as a face shield or goggles.S. Permeable contact lenses are recommended over non-permeable An employer must determine the degree of danger to a worker at a work site and whether the worker needs to wear respiratory protective equipment if: (a) worker is or may be exposed to an airborne a contaminant or a mixture of airborne Respiratory Protection: 243 Personal Protective Equip. is required.-approved safety glasses with C.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.A. Head Protection: Approved industrial protective headgear must be worn by all personnel on field worksites. NOTE: • Metal hard hats must not be worn • f hair is deemed to be of excessive length and I may constitute a safety hazard. if wearing contact lenses poses a hazard to the worker’s eyes during work. additional protection. Prescription glasses must meet C. Types of eye protectors are shown in the table at the end of this section • mployees wearing contact lenses must E wear all applicable safety eye protection. .A. boots and suits (both partially and fully encapsulating). Personal Protective Equip.5 percent by volume. [See: Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation] Fire Resistant Clothing: Fire resistant work wear shall be worn on all BP worksites.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.[See: BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program] Whenever noise hazards exist at BP Canada worksites. Refer to Material Safety Data Sheet for recommended CPC • n situations where CPC is required. it will be provided by BP Canada and worn only by trained and competent personnel. or (b) he atmosphere has or may have an oxygen t concentration of less than 19. Whenever special clothing is required for handling dangerous chemicals or for fire-fighting. Chemical Protective Clothing: • hemical Protective Clothing (CPC) includes C chemically resistant gloves. in consultation W with the CPC manufacturer. See FRW Practice. CPC shall be selected specifically to provide protection for the particular chemical or chemical material in use. when CPC Hearing Protection: 244 . aprons. contaminants in a centration exceeding their occupation exposure limits. Hand Protection: See Hand Protection Practice. all personnel entering will be provided with and must wear appropriate hearing protection. deconI tamination procedures must be utilized that enhances the removal of the particular chemical • rocedures should reflect the type of CPC needed P • orksites should determine. e. barge. neck chains and exposed body piercing are considered jewelry.11-M88.-Grade 1 (green triangle) approved C footwear must be worn by all workers entering field worksites. • A n aggressive tread designed for snow/ice or the use of boot grippers are required in winter conditions to reduce the risk of slipping on ice or snow pack. Medic Alert devices are not considered jewelry.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.e. • Sole puncture protection is required • afety footwear must be maintained in good S safe working condition. i. life jacket that meets the Canadian General Standards Board Specifications 65. bracelets. Personal Floatation Device: • ll personnel working from a boat. (i.7-M88 or • 5.S. watches. Additional safety equipment such 6 as safety harnesses and lifelines should be used when working on ice or near cold. from the bottom of the heel to the top of the boot to provide ankle support. no steel toes exposed) JEWELRY Wearing exposed jewelry on BP worksites is prohibited with the exception of office buildings. Rings. . fast moving water 245 Personal Protective Equip. should be replaced Foot Protection: • . no holes in upper material or soles.A. • oot style is recommended minimum 150mm B (6”) high. Drilling and Completions move onto and off of metal surfaces very frequently and are permitted to use sanding. The use of boot grippers is only required for Operations. or A in an area where a fall into water could result in drowning must wear a personal floatation device. contractors and visitors). Vilton Thin Glove Butyl Natural (5 mils) Rubber (latex) Vilton Summer Nitrile Viton/Neoprene Chemical Protective Glove Selection Chart Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Vilton Nitrile Viton/Neoprene Brand Name Acklands Order Number Best N-Dex Gloves(Nitrile) (BEM 723) Ansell Edmont Touch and Tuff (Nitrille powder free)(ANL 92-600-10) 1. 2. Task Thin glove (4-5 mil) Chemicals Glove Material Type of Glove Lube oil Glycol Condensate Gasoline/Diesel Fuel MIDEA/DEA Frac Oil/Inver Muds Methanol Ansell Edmont Duratouch Sheer (latex) (ANL 34-525) 1. 3.Personal Protective Equip. Vilton Summer Butyl Natural Rubber (latex) . 246 Methanol 1. 2. 3. 2. Lube oil Glycol Condensate Gasoline/Diesel Fuel MDEA/DEA Frac Oil/Invert Muds Winter Fine work requiring light gloves Engine overhauls Head changes Piston/liner replacement Seal changes/pump repairs Sample collection Orifice plate changes Rough or abrasive work requiring heave gloves Manual material handling Pulling or stringing joints Line pigging Vac trucking Frac or will completions Best Answer Nitrile laminated (BEM 2735) Best Nitri-Pro Nitrile coated (BEM 7166) Ansell Edmont Hycron General Purpose gloves Nitrile coated (ANL 24-805-10) Ansell Edmont Hycron Nitrile coated jersey lining – Winter (ANL 52-590-10) Best Nitty Gritty natural rubber coated (BEM 65NFW) 1. 2.e. and the appropriate protective equipments are worn by all (i. RESPONSIBILITY: It is the responsibility of all BP Canada employees to ensure potential exposure hazards are identified. employees. Chemical Protective Glove Selection Chart Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Vilton Fluid at 2. Butyl Natural hot/cold temp Rubber (latex) Ansell Edmont Solvex Soft Lined Chemical Resistant Gloves Nitrile (ANL 37-175) MAPA Stansolv Nitrile Heavy Weight Z Grip (PIP 480420) (good for solvent wash) MAPA Stansolv Knit Lined Nitrile Gloves – cold/hot temp (PIP 381410) Ansell Edmont Lined Natural Latex Chemical resistant Gloves (ANL 208-10) . 247 Methanol 1.Submersion of hands into chemical Filter changes Parts washing Piston/liner replacement Vilton Nitrile Viton/Neoprene Fluid at hot/cold temp Lube oil Glycol Condensate MDEA/DEA Frac Oil/Invert Muds Varsol Gasoline/Diesel Fluid at room temp Personal Protective Equip. other solid deposits. pipelines. n all areas a site-specific procedure must be used I and it must address the following: 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 7. depending on product line M [See: Radioactive or Normal Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM)] • High Pressure • Static Electricity [See: Grounding and Bonding] • Hydrates [See: Hydrates] PROCEDURES: 1. Draining and ventilation. Proper receiving and launching techniques. 8. Pigging operations in gas and oilfield operations represent a serious hazard. Characteristics of the fluid to be pigged. Proper isolation and depressurization. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Combustible/Toxic Fluids • ay have Toxic Vapour [See: Benzene. Pigging of Pipelines PIGGING OF PIPELINES AND FLOWLINES PURPOSE: To provide safe practices for pigging operations of pipes. and trapped fluids. APPLICATION: All BP Canada Field operations are affected. 3. 6. e hazard of potential plugging of the bleed-off Th valves and gauges. 5. and flowlines for the removal of wax. A safe work permit must be issued before pigging begins. HydroM gen Sulphide] • ay have NORM. 248 . 2. All quick opening closures on pig launchers and receivers must be equipped with a pressure interlocking warning device with a safety catch. • ll diesel powered equipment includes pick up A 249 Positive Air Shut-off stressing potential hydraulic shock. [See: BP Environmental Guidelines] PRECAUTION: a. including those used to load or unload flammable liquids or gases at all BP Canada sites. barrel and seals. Contractor or BP A owned. Purging – [See: Purging] NOTE: Proper disposal methods must be used for pigging wax and fluids. 9. APPLICATION: • ll diesel powered equipment. Where the receiver is vented to a proper drain or flare system. Routine inspection of the cap.35] POSITIVE AIR SHUT-OFF REQUIREMENTS (PASO) PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for the requirement of positive air shut-offs on diesel powered equipment. b. 10.[See: ASME Code VIII. 11. Ensure vent valve is free and clear by some means. . Paragraph UG . No worker shall position themselves in front of the pig launchers or receiver at any time during the pigging operation. the barrel must be vented to atmosphere prior to opening the receiver or launcher. Individual marking or identification of pigs and logging with respect to launching and receiving times.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. g. • ASO operation may be either automatic or P manual. DEFINITION: A positive air shut off (PASO) is a device that cuts the air supply to diesel engines resulting in immediate engine shut down. and diesel powered heavy machinery used within 25m of a wellhead OR where there are piping. (E. • ersonal injury from exploding engines or P exploding hydrocarbon mixtures. e. • equirements for PASO’s should be included in R pre job meetings. process vessels or tanks containing combustible fluids or gasses that may release hydrocarbons to atmosphere within 25 m of diesel powered equipment. Positive Air Shut-off trucks. PROCEDURES: • hen loading or unloading flammable liquid W or gas products at all BP facilities using dieselpowered equipment. • Equipment damage because of engine overspeed. this equipment must be equipped with a PASO. they are open or being worked on or with) POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • ncontrolled engine operation resulting in an U explosion. pump control panels. • ll positive air shut offs must be in good workA ing condition and tested monthly. • anual PASO’s must have the capability to be M operated from normal workstations around the vehicle.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.g. 250 . 3. • ccountability for verification is with the BP site A supervisor or designate. as well as regulatory requirements for the maintenance and calibration of portable gas test equipment.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.1 2. Scope of Definitions Competent person . . This practice applies to any work area where personnel have the potential to be exposed to combustible gas. contracted employees.2 251 Combustible Gas Envir. 1. RESPONSIBILITIES: • esponsibility for installation.2 rovide requirements for the training and P qualifications of personnel conducting combustible gas tests.1 o establish practices for providing a safe work T environment while working with or around combustible gas. maintenance and R testing of PASO’s lies with the owner of the equipment with a PASO.A test conducted by 1. The purpose of this practice is to: 1.3 2. contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on CGPU premises and work sites.2 1.0 1.one who has completed training. as per manufacturer specifications and site specific procedures. Function (Bump) Test .1 Scope and Applicability Th is practice applies to all BP Canada Energy Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees.0 2. PRACTICE FOR WORKING IN A COMBUSTIBLE GAS ENVIRONMENT 1.3. The percentage of LEL represents the amount of combustible gas present between 0 and 100.2 252 . Combustible Gas Envir. 100% being the Lower Explosive limit. Th e on-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure that: • egular documented surveys (“sweeps”) are R conducted annually of all facilities including wells and pipeline risers to detect excessive LEL levels and meet EUB Directive 60 LDAR requirements. The detector must read within +or-20% of known concentration and to ensure that the 10% LEL alarm on the detector is functioning properly.0 3. introducing a known concentration of gas (Pentane) to the sensor of the combustible gas detector.3 LEL - The Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) is the lowest concentration of combustible gas in air at which an explosion could occur. • ny excessive atmospheric release greater than A or equal to 10% is detected. roped off and will be repaired as soon as possible following a proper risk assessment • or any LEL reading greater than or equal F to 20%.4 3. With Methane approximately 5% in air is equal to 100% of the LEL.For the purpose of this Practice an atmospheric release is defined as 20 % LEL 8 inches (20 cm) from the source as per the GCBU Reporting Practice gHSSEr MS430.1 3. Scope of Responsibility A proper functioning approved combustible gas detector will be used for every task being performed on a BP CGPU site that has potential exposure to a combustible gas environment. 2. Atmospheric Release . the equipment should be shutdown until repaired 2.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. . (Appendix 2 Training and Exposure sections of this document) Scope of General Expectations O nly personnel who are trained or have received instruction may conduct gas tests. Otherwise.4 4. Detectors must be 4.2 4.3 4.0 4. Th e person conducting the gas testing for permiting must sign or initial the permit and the results must be kept on file for a minimum of 1year (see Permit to Work Practice gHSSEr MS 880). Th e gas detection devices must have a documented Function (Bump) Test at the beginning of each shift. C ontinous gas tests will be conducted where ever CGPU employees. The detector must have a current calibration sticker to be in use. the detector must be taken out of service.1 4. contractors and other visiting personnel will be entering an area that has the potential for the atmosphere to contain combustible gas. contracted personnel. tagged as defective and sent for calibration.5 253 Combustible Gas Envir. (See Sample Lease entry procedure) • All workers have received instruction in the use of combustible gas detection equipment and understand the hazards associated with combustible gases. If the detector fails the bump test. • ny LEL reading exceeding 20% LEL is an A incident classified as an Atmospheric Release under CGPU Reporting Practice gHSSEr MS430 and followed up with an incident investigation to prevent re-occurence. O nly CSA approved combustible gas detection equipment (see appendix 1) shall be used. any gas release exceeding 10% LEL is reported as an HSSE opportunity • ll workers have read and follow a safe buildA ing\lease entry procedure.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If while working. Other toxic contaminates such as benzene or H2S may exist in concentrations above the exposure limits Entry into these areas is permitted. a gas test must be done (see attached lease entry procedures). The test must also be done before and during entry into lease buildings. Fixed combustible gas detectors should alarm at 10% LEL and shutdown at greater than or equal to 20% LEL. personnel must leave the area immediately to determine the appropriate action. calibrated as per manufacturers specifications. The detector is to be kept in the work area while personnel are conducting their work to ensure that personnel are not exposed to over 10% 4.9 5. vessel.<10% LEL>10% Guidelines Area may be entered. or may be present. where combustible gas is.7 4. P ortable Combustible Gas Detector alarms must be set at: Low alarm 10% LEL and High Alarm 20% LEL.0 Scope of Occupational Exposure Limits LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) Hazards % of Lower Explosive Limit LEL 0% LEL >0 .8 4. process buildings.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A risk assessment must be conducted to determine appropriate action. B efore entering a lease where combustible gas may be present. Combustible Gas Envir.6 C ombustible Gas Monitoring must be conducted before any work taking place within 8 meters of any well. no entry into area permitted. the combustible gas detector alarms. tank or related equipment. Evacuation of personnel. 254 . 4. 2 –0.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.0 7.4 % H2S the greater health risk is H2S as the exposure limit will be exceeded before the LEL concentrations reaches 10%. and errors in judgment and in some cases loss of consciousness. If the stream concentration is greater than 0.3 8. • ombustible gas containing light hydrocarC bons may cause symptoms such as dizziness.1 7. . Occupational Health and Safety Regulations and Guidelines 296/97 as amended gHSSEr MS880- Permit to Work Practice Forms • gHSSEr MF 34004- Pre-job Risk Assessment • HSSEr MF 88001- BP Canada Energy Company- g Cold Work Permit/Hot Work Permit 6.C.0 7.0 255 Combustible Gas Envir.2 7. headaches. If the stream concentration is greater than 0. These symptoms known as a ‘narcotic effect’ may occur at 10 % of the LEL • ombustible gas concentrations may contain C other potentially harmful substances such as hydrogen sulfide H2S and benzene.1% benzene the greater health risk is benzene as the exposure limit will be exceeded before the LEL concentration reaches 10% • EL detection equipment must not be used to L try to determine H2S or benzene concentrations Scope of Appendices APPENDIX 1- Equipment Type and Care APPENDIX 2- Training APPENDIX 3- Lease Entry Procedure Scope of References A lberta General Safety Regulations AR 448/83 as amended B. Appendix 1 Equipment Type and Care Approved Equipment Gas detection equipment must include a LEL detector and oxygen sensor and should include a carbon monoxide and hydrogen sulfide sensor. Gas detection devices must be “Bump Tested” before each daily use and documented in a bump test log. Equipment Testing and Care Each area must ensure that an inspection and testing program is implemented whereby all combustible gas detection equipment is inspected by a qualified technician on a frequency consistent with manufacturers requirements and with prevailing regulation requirements (minimum every three (3) months.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. A test would also be required if the detector comes in contact with water is over ranged or suffers trauma ie: dropping the detector. The oxygen reading must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly 256 . A tag must be attached to the gas detectors showing the latest inspection/due date. Combustible Gas Envir. Precautions: The bump test must be conducted by introducing a known concentration of gas (Pentane) to the sensor of the combustible gas detector. Records of all calibrations must be maintained. The detector must read within +or-20% of known concentration and to ensure that the 10% LEL alarm on the detector is functioning properly All gas detection equipment requires a minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to manufacturers specifications. and after 12 hours of continuous use. All gas detection equipment must be CSA approved. Each area in the CGPU is responsible to ensure that all BP and Full Time Equivalence workers have a satifactory course available to teach the proper methods in the use of combustible gas detection equipment including: • Operation • Calibration • Storage • Limitations • Alarm settings • Site specific procedures Personnel training records will be maintained on site. Appendix 2 Training All employees and contractors must be knowledgable on the hazards of combustible gas and the use of detection equipment being used. 257 Combustible Gas Envir. .Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Training is to be conducted every (3) years and is expected to include passing a documented test to ensure personnel are qualified. Step Hazard Control Lease Entry Procedure 1. Visual inspection 2. fire or spills Appendix 3 Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. proceed High H2S or LEL to the MCC / RTU (Scada) building.) Before entering lease: 1. H2S or hydrocarbon exposure Before entering lease: 1. explosions (IF NO RTU OR MCC IS PRESENT or spills GO TO STEP 6. H2S or hydrocarbon exposure. oxygen deficiency. Check for H2S and LEL alarm and flashing beacon . Check wind direction 3.LEASE ENTRY PROCEDURE Combustible Gas Envir. If safe for vehicle entry. Verify personal monitoring equipment is operational once per shift. Standard Safety Practices Manual 258 3. Check wind direction 3. Visual inspection 2. concentrations. Check for H2S alarm beacon and flashing . . fire. explosions. Register personnel entering the site though the use of an automated system (VMS) or by notifying the control room. Stop at lease entry and conduct a visual inspection of area High H2S or LEL concentrations.Bump test personal monitoring equipment prior to the beginning of the shift. STOP-THINK-GO 4.Ensure that system accepts the input or that control room staff records the time of entry in the log. .Calibrate multi-head gas monitor as per manufacture’s instructions 2. Evaluate risk of other atmospheric hazards such as benzene. 259 6. Use multi-head gas detector to check for high LEL or H2S gas levels in the vicinity of MCC/RTU. H2S > 10 ppm LEL > 10% 19.Personal monitor . H2S or LEL exposure. sulfur dioxide or carbon monoxide.park vehicle facing the lease exit for ease of egress .Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) . oxygen Practices. CO monitoring equipment (if applicable) Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) .Check beacons or alarms .5 % > O2 > 23% SO2 > 2 ppm CO > 25 ppm Benzene > 1 ppm . Combustible Gas Envir. If H2S or LEL gas limits are within H2S or LEL exposure. SO2.the vehicle can be driven directly off the site .Personal monitor . oxygen deficiency. explosions or fire proceed onto the lease and park appropriately.Check wind direction and park upwind .LEASE ENTRY PROCEDURE Control Step Hazard Lease Entry Procedure 5.Multi-head Gas Monitor .Multi-head Gas Monitor . .Benzene.comply with the “8 meter rule” from process equipment and piping . vehicles may now deficiency. explosions or fire. Personal monitor . Open building door while using Oxygen deficiency.Multi-head Gas Monitor .Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) . static High levels of H2S or LEL's . H2S & LEL limits . Step Lease Entry Procedure Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If levels do not clear contact H2S or LEL exposure. 260 7.Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) . .Multi-head Gas Monitor supervisor.Ground bare hand to metal surface to electricity should be considered and resulting in explosion discharge static electricity. LEL or H2S.check entrance area using Multi-head head monitor to ensure required O2. explosions or fire .open doors and vents using caution 10. oxygen . If H2S or LEL limits are exceeded H2S or LEL exposure. oxygen . gas leak can be deficiency.DO NOT ENTER. . explosions or fire . exposure explosions or fire hesitation step after opening doors . When exiting vehicle.Personal monitor investigated and/or repaired . person should ground themselves to metal object before opening buildings. explosions or fire . 8.Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) 11.Approach building using caution & take multi-head monitor.Personal monitor .Multi-head Gas Monitor . deficiency.Personal monitor back up personnel and notify deficiency. Once backup has arrived on H2S or LEL exposure.Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) 9. oxygen .breathing air equipment donned location.LEASE ENTRY PROCEDURE Hazard Control Combustible Gas Envir. oxygen deficiency. . . Proceed through the entire building sweeping for gas before commencing work. H2S or LEL exposure. Register personnel exiting the site though the use of an automated system (VMS) or by notifying the control room.Multi-head Gas Monitor .Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) . If no gas level present proceed into building using caution. explosions or fire H2S or LEL exposure. .Personal monitor .Multi-head Gas Monitor . .ensure VMS or manual login system clears personnel for site Combustible Gas Envir. explosions or fire 13. oxygen deficiency. explosions or fire off vms system. oxygen personal and log out of automated or deficiency. 261 14.LEASE ENTRY PROCEDURE Control Step Hazard Lease Entry Procedure 12. while monitoring gas levels with multihead gas monitor. When leaving lease notify BP H2S or LEL exposure.shut in using site specific shut down procedures.Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable) Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.Personal monitor . equipment should be shut-in. If gas levels can not meet Practice requirements after investigation and/or repair. PREPARATIONS: • ite-specific procedures are required for S removal and installation of all PSV’s. Pressure Vessels and pressure piping Section 6). [See: Permits and BP PSV handling and servicing procedure (Part of owner inspection program)] • ll block valves on the upstream and/or A downstream side of a PSV must be sealed or padlocked in the open position.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and before the applicable work permit is issued. • Toxic/Combustible fluids. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • System Overpressure. Pressure Safety valves PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES PURPOSE: To provide instructions for adequately protecting all pressure systems. • ll PSV’s will be checked as per provincial A regulations. APPLICATION: All pressure systems. • Pressure on flare system (where applicable). • Explosion: Air in flare system and/or piping. The procedures must be discussed and documented prior to carrying out the work. 262 . • ll pressure safety valves (PSV’s) must be A maintained in operable condition. in accordance with Provincial Regulations (Ref: Quality management system for Boilers. or his designate. [See: Energy Isolation] 7. The Supervisor in charge. sealed or padlocked. 4. When transporting a PSV for service or returning it to the facility the PSV must be transported in the vertical position. 263 Pressure Safety valves . After Repair on Operating Equipment: 9. epairs to the PSV must be made as quickly as R possible with an emergency priority designation. All PSV’s are to remain in service while the equipment that they are protecting is in service. 10. It is then to be logged that the PSV is in service. except for repair as noted in ASME Code. 6. or by being continuously manned by a designated Operator to control the working pressure of the equipment as per ASME Section VIII Div. No PSV may be taken out of service unless adequate protection is maintained by adjacent equipment.1 Appendix M. No PSV may be taken out of service at any time without approval from the Supervisor responsible for that facility. All block valves must be opened. 5.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 3. 2. Returning a Pressure Safety Valve to Service 8. ll PSV’s removed from service must be imA mediately logged and documented on the PSV handling and servicing procedure tracking sheet. 11. PROCEDURES: Pressure safety valve repair shops require certification approval from applicable government agency per CSA B51. must witness the installation of the seals or padlocks on the block valves connected to the pressure safety valve. The PSV must be replaced immediately after the repair is complete. PRECAUTIONS: Taking a PSV out of Service for Repair on equipment in operation: 1. piping. piping. repairs and replacements of vessels. Engineering Authority (EA) and Regulatory Approval is Required. • ASME Code Section VIII. Pressure Vessel and Pressure C Piping Code. • BP PSV Handling and servicing Procedure. APPLICATION: New installations. • SA B51 Boiler.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. PREPARATIONS: [See: Purging] POTENTIAL HAZARDS:[See purging] • verpressure – operating above the system O MAWP. and pipelines. PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING PURPOSE: To establish pressure and leak testing safe work practices for vessels. DEFINITION: There are two types of pressure tests of which hydrostatic is the preferred method. Pneumatic testing is only permitted under special conditions. Pressure Safety valves RESPONSIBILITY: The BP Canada Representative in charge of the job is responsible for ensuring that safe work procedures are developed and followed. 264 . REFERENCE: • P Quality management system for Boilers B and Pressure Vessels and process piping. and pipelines. latest edition. • xplosion – Through overpressure or ignition of E flammable gas. The 265 Pressure Safety valves . equipment or vessels only after the system has been properly purged. stored energy and combustible issues. 2. • eaks – Test medium leaking during test. • Pneumatic testing is not recommended Leak Check: Combustible Gas can be used for Leak Check test on piping. Methods: Hydrostatic: This is the preferred method because energy release causes minimal concern: • ater/glycol – preferred hydrostatic test medium W (minimum danger). Pneumatic: When leaks or ruptures occur energy release can be extremely dangerous and prolonged: • nert gas – preferred pneumatic test medium I • ir/Flammable Gas – mixing these two test A mediums can result in explosion and fire. • ydrocarbon based fluid – the potential for H explosion.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. enviL ronmental. PROCEDURES: 1. toxicity. environment damage must be assessed and documented. fire. a low pressure test must be performed before the high pressure test to prevent failure of a component at high pressure and the resultant danger of this situation. When pressure testing. ll mechanical/integrity work on the system A should be complete before the system pressure test commences. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 4. 3. 3. Pressures intended for hydrostatic test must not be used for pneumatic tests. Pressure Safety valves pressure set points for these tests should be stated in the procedure along with the systems MAWP. isposal of test mediums should be in accorD dance with environmental guidelines. [See: Applicable Government Regulations:] • ASME Pressure Vessel Code • Provincial Boilers Branch or equivalent • EUB or equivalent 266 . n approved site-specific procedure must be A developed for all pneumatic pressure tests. SIGNS: Warning signs must be positioned prohibiting the presence of workers in the immediate area of the vessel or lines while pressure testing. All non essential personnel should be removed from the area being tested. When changing from hydrostatic to pneumatic testing. the test pressure must be recalculated. Consideration of the following sections may be required: • WHMIS • Purging • Blinding and Blanking (Energy Isolation) • Draining and Depressuring • Pre-job Safety Meeting • Permit to Work 1. ite-specific procedures should be developed for S all hydrostatic pressure tests. PRECAUTIONS: RESPONSIBILITIES: The BP Canada Representative in-charge is responsible for ensuring that safe pressure testing practices are followed. 2. NOTE: For pressure test design. ll mechanical/integrity work should be comA plete before the purging operation commences. chemical. APPLICATION: Any vessels or piping systems being prepared for inspection. nitrogen. or returning to service. repair. b. toxic or other hazardous materials from vessels and piping systems.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. PURGING Purging PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for safely removing combustible. carbon dioxide. or water or combustible gas may be used as a purging medium. the explosive risk associated with the transition zone Static Electricity: PREPARATIONS: 267 . POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Leaks from uncontrolled points. construction. • oxic vapor /Inert gas oxygen deficiency: T simple/chemical asphyxiation • ombustible material: explosion the system C contents could be in the zone between the LEL and UEL • isplaced fluids D • xplosion due to combustible material being E vented to atmosphere • perating the system outside its design condiO tions (Pressure/Temperature/Combustible gas in inert systems) a. DEFINITION: Purging is the removal of any undesirable medium from vessels or piping systems. Steam. If using combustible purge medium. d. The worker must know where the displaced fluids (i. Golden Rule] b. from bottom to top. purging should be from top to bottom. b. Vessels or piping must be isolated before purging. Purging of incomplete purge must be recognized. toxic) are going. Purge warning signs should be posted as required. PROCEDURES: a. If combustible gases are used for the purge medium the Engineering Authority (EA) must approve the procedure. air must be completely displaced from the system to a level that the system is no longer operating in the flammable/ explosive zone. If it is lighter. Associated instrumentation must also be isolated. The necessary safety equipment must be on hand (e.) b. etc.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. fire extinguishers. Safety Equipment: a. A site-specific procedure must be developed for each purging operation. c. Low point drains should be checked periodically for water removal. Velocities should be kept very low to sweep the undesirable medium out of the system with as little mixing as possible. Flare pilots/igniters might have to be isolated. When purging for start-up. and should be done at atmospheric pressure. combustible. before attempting to pressure up the system. Purge gas should be introduced into the system very slowly. and all potential ignition sources must be eliminated. and the condition area is suitable to receive the fluids.g.[See: Energy Isolation. breathing apparatus. If the hydrocarbon is heavier than the purge medium. Inert gas should be used where possible. Isolating: a.e. 268 . c.. introducing air). Some combustible gas detectors require oxygen for analysis of the sample. Contact your PU Industrial Hygienist. RADIOACTIVE OR NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (NORM) PURPOSE: To establish the requirements for the safe handling of Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM). b. c. All non-essential personnel should be removed from the purge area. essels or equipment may still contain toxic and/ V or combustible sludge or scales after purging.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 269 Radioactive (NORM) PRECAUTIONS: . if the detector is inserted in an oxygen-deficient atmosphere.[See: Confined Space Entry]. e. when using steam. a. SCBA/SABA must be worn when performing atmospheric monitoring prior and during Confined Space Entry. d. ake sure there are no dead legs in the vessel or M piping to be purged. Creating or pulling a vacuum on piping or vessel (i. and therefore will not give a true indication when a vessel or piping is checked for the removal of hydrocarbons. g. [See: Atmospheric Monitoring] f.e.. Consideration should be given to the removal of this material to maintain and ensure a safe atmosphere. Tests must always be made to determine if purging has eliminated the undesirable medium from the vessel or piping system. Purge medium temperatures must be considered for affect on the system to be purged. Radioactive (NORM) APPLICATION: All worksites where NORM contamination may occur. b. n ENFORM trained and qualified NORM A Control Coordinator must be assigned for all worksites where there is or likely to be NORM contamination. All personnel performing work that involves NORM contaminated equipment must be trained in personal protection and safe handling. Survey: All sites that may have NORM contamination must have completed a NORM survey of the applicable equipment performed before work planning commences to ensure all hazards are identified. recordkeeping. specific monitoring and PPE. PREPARATIONS: a.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Exposure to NORM. analysis and w disposal of NORM materials and/or NORM contaminated equipment and PPE 270 . Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist for advice on training. Work Planning: • ork Planning for NORM contaminated W equipment must include provisions to ensure the personnel are trained • the necessary equipment and PPE is available • the need for personnel decontamination facilities • possible facilities for equipment decontamination • ventilation • filtering exhausted air or waste water and • aste storage. Refer to the Code of Practice and contact your NORM Control Coordinator. 271 Radioactive (NORM) Pre-Job Safety Meeting: . responsible for the Th operation • torage. made accessible. in the area affected by the work • ll women who are pregnant or are conA sidering pregnancy must declare this to the Occupational Health Centre prior to work commencing so that an exposure risk assessment can be completed. [See: TDG-Packaging and Safe Transport of Radioactive Material.e. [See: Safety Meetings]. The NORM Control Coordinator must attend all pre-job safety meetings. and unauthorized entry of personnel banned. etc. The risk assessment may include restricted work with NORM contaminated materials. C Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist for advice before any work proceeds. isolated. [See: Canadian Guidelines for the Management of NORM. PROCEDURES: Safe handling procedures should include: • Specific job procedures to be followed • e expected effluent concentrations and Th methods of control if applicable • e person in charge. depressured. • ust be conducted prior to commencement M of operation.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. testing and disposal of NORM wastes S • quipment and worksite must be properly E prepared (i.) The worksite should be roped off. Radiation warning signs must be posted. Guidelines for the Handling of NORM in Western Canada] • ontact the NORM Control Coordinator. Station shutdown could result when using a highly energetic radioactive source in the vicinity of a detector. instruments. rescue and decontamination facilities are on hand and in operable condition before the job commences.[See: Equipment Shutdown Systems] • ORM survey meters are not explosion N proof. Care must be taken to reactivate the detection system when the work is completed. Fire detection systems sensitive to radiation may have to be by-passed when radioactive sources are in use in the immediate area. 272 . A risk assessment must be performed to determine the scope and risk from NORM and radioactive sources. Radioactive (NORM) PRECAUTION: • ighly energetic NORM may affect some H LEL monitors and fire detection systems. thus a Hot Work Permit is required.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • e Contractor performing work on NORM Th contaminated equipment and waste is responsible for ensuring that safe handling procedures and contingency plans have been developed which comply with all government regulations. • e BP NORM Control Coordinator is reTh sponsible for ensuring that all NORM control procedures meet regulations. RESPONSIBILITIES: • e BP Canada Representative is responsible Th for ensuring that all procedures are supplied and followed. the BP Codes of Practice and that all procedures are followed. He is also responsible for ensuring that all applicable protective equipment. and the following general guidelines apply. PURPOSE: To provide procedures for the safe loading of tank cars. a site-specific procedure is required.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Tank Truck Loading/Unloading] b. Before loading tank cars.Tank cars found in bad order must be reported to the supervisor immediately. Car wheels must be chocked to prevent the car from accidentally rolling. However. PROCEDURES: a. d. Tank cars must be inspected prior to loading. All ground and bond connections should be frequently inspected. and must not be loaded 273 Rail Car Loading RAIL CAR LOADING .[See: Electrical] b. ensure that it is in a closed position. APPLICATION: Tank car loading at plant and field locations. oading racks and loading rack trackage must be L securely and adequately grounded and bonded. and erect the required warning signs. c. The loader must attach the ground cable to each car before connecting the loading hoses. the loader shall check the derail. Tank car loading encompasses similar concerns and problems as transferring fluids by truck. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Static Electricity • Combustible Fluids • Tank Car Movement PREPARATIONS: a. j. Company employees must stay away from tank cars when the train crew is coupling. eaking valves or loading hoses must be repaired L or replaced immediately. and liquid petroleum gas vented to the vent stack before loading hoses are disconnected. and spotting cars.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Proper documentation is also required. the spout must be chained to the tank car during loading. 274 . Tank cars must be filled to the proper level as instructed. PRECAUTIONS: a. i. The loading rack must never be left unattended while loading or offloading a tank car.[See: TDG] f. switching. All loaders must be familiar with the location of fire-fighting equipment and must be trained in its use. b. and the loader should stand by to shut off the loading valves when this level is approached. g. f. e. No part of the body shall be positioned over the slip tube gauge. Only approved flashlights for hazardous locations are permitted. Rail Car Loading until repairs have been made. When loading is complete. xtension cords with lights attached must not E be used at the loading rack. Workmen must refrain from jumping from the loading rack to the tank car or from car to car. c. e. The loader must label loaded cars with the proper placards designated for this purpose and required by regulations. h. the block valve on loading hose and tank car must be closed. The loading hoses must be hooked back to the loading rack when loading has been completed. d. k. Walkways and platforms must be inspected frequently and kept in good condition. When using a top loading spout. or cause irreversible and incapacitating effects to that person’s health. switching and spotting procedures meet applicable government regulations. RESPONSIBILITIES: • t is the responsibility of the BP Canada I employee in-charge of the operation.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. flammable or toxic air contaminants would cause a person without respiratory protection to be fatally injured. RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PURPOSE: To provide safe work practices for workers in areas where there is a respiratory hazard. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Toxic atmospheres • Oxygen deficient atmosphere DEFINITION: *IDLH – Immediately dangerous to life or health. to ensure that safe loading procedures are followed. This also applies to visitors to field locations who may use respiratory protection. Any atmosphere where the concentration of oxygen. • e train crew is responsible for ensuring that Th safe tank car coupling. PROCEDURES: [See: BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program] Equipment for IDLH* Environment: 275 Respiratory Protection . APPLICATION: All personnel who are required to or may use respiratory protection to mitigate inhalation risks. 4-02 (Selection. or toxic contaminants exceed the allowable exposure limits. These respirators are never to be used in oxygen-deficient IDLH atmospheres. articulates filters (P100 or HEPA – High EfP ficiency Particulate Air filters) 2. 276 . Use. where danger exists from reduced oxygen content of the air (less than 19. and Care of Respirators). and Care of Respirators).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Respiratory Protection Self-contained or supplied-air breathing apparatus (SCBA/SABA) must be worn. and CSA Z180.5% oxygen). Use. BP Occupational Health Centre will perform the assessment on BP employees and full time contactors.1-00 (Compressed Breathing Air and Systems). Fitness to Wear Respirators: All personnel required to wear respirators must be evaluated by a Health Professional to ensure pre-existing health conditions are not affected by respirator use. There are two main types of air-purifying respirators: 1. The limitation and use of SCBA/SABA are outlined in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program and the Canadian Standards Association CSA Z94. Equipment for Non-IDLH Environment: Air-purifying respirators filter and remove specific contaminants from the air. Contract companies must provide documentation that demonstrates contract employees are fit to wear respirators.4-02 (Selection. and CSA Z180.1-00 (Compressed Breathing Air and Systems). Chemical cartridge These respirators are limited to the uses outlined in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program and the Canadian Standards Association CSA Z94. The BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program also includes a selection chart for the type of respiratory equipment required for specific hazards. the equipment must be cleaned. but is kept ready for emergency use. The inspection must 277 Respiratory Protection . scars. contractors. at least monthly. and Storage of Respiratory Protection Equipment: Immediately after use. Conditions such as unusual face contours. Inspection: A competent worker must inspect respiratory protective equipment that is not used routinely. and the equipment stored in the proper location. A quantitative or qualitative fit test shall be performed on new employees and long-term contractors within the first three months of commencing work. The maintenance. eyeglasses. or not to exceed 2 years. the seal must be positive and negative tested and a satisfactory fit obtained prior to each use. For this reason. Most manufacturers provide instructions for fit testing. and visitors doing work on BP premises or operating sites who are required to wear appropriate respiratory protective equipment must have quantitative or qualitative fit testing records available for review. cleaning. Fit Testing: All BP Canada employees. the face piece sanitized. The user of the equipment should perform this task. refer to BP’s Respiratory Protection Program or contact your Safety Advisor or Industrial Hygienist for guidance on how these tests should be performed and documented. facial surgery. if these are unavailable. and storage of respiratory protection must be consistent with the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program. contracted employees. Cleaning.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Maintenance. skin eruptions. injury or missing dentures might interfere with the seal. Repeat testing is recommended annually thereafter. Individuals who are required to wear respiratory equipment must be clean-shaven where the face piece of the respirator seals with the skin of the face. Written documentation of this inspection must be retained at the worksite and must include the name of the inspector and the date the inspection was performed. Documentation of training frequency. The supervisor in charge of the work location must designate a trained worker to complete the monthly inspection. Respiratory Protection ensure that the equipment is in satisfactory working condition. This analysis must be performed on site. 2 ducated on the reason a particular piece of E respiratory equipment was chosen. and its capabilities and limitations. 278 . Repeat training is recommended annually. care. T and fitting of the respirators they will be using. Contractors using their own respiratory equipment on BP sites must have documentation available regarding the testing.1-00. TRAINING: All workers entering a BP Canada field worksite where a respiratory hazard may exist must be: 1 Educated on the hazards present. 3 rained in the proper use. maintenance.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Taking an air sample in a bomb and the sending the sample to a laboratory for analysis is prohibited. • ir from respiratory air compressors must A be tested annually by a qualified person to ensure analysis includes particulate and oil mists. The inspection must follow those established in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program. inspection and maintenance of respirators. The frequency of training will be determined by the particular job requirement. and in its proper location. or not to exceed 3 years (see BP Respiratory Protection Guidelines). PRECAUTIONS: • ompressed breathing air must meet quality C specifications for breathing air specified by CSA Standard Z180. clean. For each confined-space entry. supplied-air respiratory protective equipment will be a requirement of each site-specific pre-entry safety meeting. maintenance p and inspection of the respiratory equipment. Task Hazard Assessment: All tasks requiring respiratory equipment must be identified and assessed to ensure all hazards have been identified and mitigated. • ersonnel are trained in the use. and session attendance must be retained on file at each area office. RESPONSIBILITY: The Supervisor in charge of the work location must ensure that: • mployees and full time Contractors have E been deemed fit to wear respirators by the Occupational Health Centre. training in the use of selfcontained. Site specific code of practice 279 Respiratory Protection . • ll tasks which have respiratory hazards A are identified. Industrial Hygiene Manual 2. evaluated. The mitigation measures should be documented in Work Orders and Safe Work Permits.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Respiratory Protection Program 3. • ontractors have performed fit testing and C fitness to wear respirators medical assessment has taken place. type. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: 1. documented and included in work orders or Safe Work Permits. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and environmental problems at the worksite. occupational health. PROCEDURES: Joint Worksite Health. Safety. HSSE MEETINGS HSSE Meetings PURPOSE: To describe the composition. and meetings of the Joint Worksite Safety. to be attended by both contractor and BP Canada personnel before any potentially hazardous activity is started. The committee members will either address these concerns immediately or bring them to the attention of the committee at a meeting. The term of a committee member will usually be a minimum of one year. The committee shall consist of an adequate number of members to provide representation for all workers. describe meetings. The Operating Centre Manager is responsible for the formation of the committee at each worksite. 3. 2. Security and Environment Committee: 1. and identify the requirements of the pre-job meetings. Members of the 280 . occupaTh tional health and environmental concerns of both management and workers. responsibilities. APPLICATION: Worksites and workers within a Department/Area as designated by the Department/Area Manager. and shall include at least one supervisor or equal numbers of workers and supervisors. e committee will address the safety. Health and Environment Committee. Joint Worksite Safety. Health and EnvironA ment Committee is a group of worker employee representatives working together to identify and solve safety. The committees will hold regular meetings. iscussion of all incidents and near misses D within the area. health and environment meetings are held.g. 3. Employees should attend all health. Education programs such as: • Review of regulations • eview of safety practices and site-specific R procedures • Seminars on new equipment • azard identification and training. Safety. 4. An attendance record must be signed by the attendants and retained at the worksite with the minutes of the meeting. General Meetings: The BP Canada Supervisor in-charge of the work area is responsible for ensuring safety. Security and Environment comH mittee concerns and recommendations. iscussion of incidents. . ealth. 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. at least once a month. In most areas. Committee Meetings: The committee will hold meetings on a regular basis. ommittee concerns and recommendations C must be documented and filed. H (e. WHMIS) 281 HSSE Meetings committee will inspect the worksites regularly and report their findings to the committee. A suggested meeting format is included at the end of this section. 2. and near misses D throughout company and industry. security and environment meetings but must attend a minimum of four meetings a year. Discussion of all bulletins and safety information. there will be one meeting per month. The agenda will follow that of a regular business meeting: 1. safety. Where any personnel are to undertake an activity deemed to be potentially hazardous. he/she shall take immediate corrective action where practical. 3. HSSE Opportunity/Near Miss Reporting: When a worker has reason to believe that an unsafe condition or practice may exist. emergency procedures and job-specific safety requirements. and tower report. The minutes of the pre-job risk assessment must be recorded. 2. HSSE Meetings The minutes of the meetings must be recorded and distributed. Where the job is complex or involves hot work. as follows: • A copy posted at the facility • A copy sent to appropriate personnel • Copy posted on the gHSSEr web site Pre-Job risk assessment: 1. This documentation must be retained on file at the worksite office for a minimum of one year. a pre-job risk assessment shall be held. the pre-job safety meeting will involve all personnel on the lease and be noted in the morning report. site hazards.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and reviewed at this meeting. procedures and hazards. These include the requirements for personnel protective equipment. a detailed site-specific procedure must be prepared prior to. All personnel involved in the work task must sign the minutes of the meeting. HSSE Opportunity/Near Miss reports will be filled out and returned to the onsite HSSE representative. here the pre-job risk assessment is being held W as part of ongoing rig operations. 282 . and report the condition/ practice to his supervisor. The BP Canada representative in charge of the pre-job risk assessment must review general HSSE requirements emphasizing checks. Chairperson of Meeting. Old safety concerns reported but not corrected (including specific details). Safety concerns corrected but not reported. time. Date. Distribution list for minutes. incidents and near D accidents (in area. 3. Consecutive days since last Lost Time Accident. 9. and location of meeting. 10. 7. This can be split into smaller monthly ones. iscussion of accidents. 8. APPLICATION: Confined-space entry. ust complete a full work place level one M inspection per year.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 11. Safety. Old safety concerns reported and corrected. throughout the company and the industry). 1. List of attendees. Consecutive days since last Preventable Vehicle Accident. 12. and other work tasks as specified by site-specific procedures. 283 Safety Standby Suggested format for recording the minutes of joint worksite Health. New safety concerns and recommendations. 5. 6. 4. Security and Environment committee meetings: . SAFETY STANDBY PURPOSE: To provide procedures for a safety standby person to be used as an observer and back-up during specific work procedures. afety topics discussed and/or education S program. 14. 2. 13. Safety standby personal will be identified by some type of measure as identified in the pre-job risk assessment. [See Section: Atmospheric Monitoring] 284 . DEFINITION: Safety Standby A “safety standby” person is an employee or designate used as an observer and back-up. This person is not part of the work crew. – Training • First Aid • CPR • H2S. PROCEDURES: Qualifications: The safety standby person must have up-to-date knowledge of the following: • Site-specific job procedures • perating procedures for the safety equipO ment required for the job in progress • e location of the Operator and Supervisor Th in charge and be able to communicate with either Potential hazards. if applicable • Rescue procedures • Applicable Golden Rule of Safety • BP Indoctrination • Confined Space if applicable Pre-entry or rescue • Atmospheric monitoring if applicable Duties of the Safety Standby: 1. if applicable • Fire extinguisher use.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. onitoring atmospheric conditions from outside M the confined space – Ensuring the air supply to supplied-air units that are being used. and is only concerned with the safety of the workers. whenever the above work applications are being carried out. A safety standby is a person who observes a work task for the purpose of: Fire suppression 2. Note: Safety standby personnel can not leave their assigned post unless personal safety is jeopardized. nsuring that all workers involved in the task E have the proper training certification in place. and proceed with appropriate action. Emergency Actions: In the event of any emergency. the safety standby must perform the following: (a) ommunicate the emergency to the appropriate C back-up support. shall be concise and specific: e. 8. Equipment Required: The safety standby equipment must be designated in the site-specific job procedure. (b) f there is no immediate response. Man Down. Explosion. 7. roviding communication between workers and P other operation or rescue personnel in the event of an emergency . nsuring unsupervised entry points are flagged E off indicating “DO NOT ENTER” or made inaccessible by other means. Other duties as identified in the pre-job safety meeting. repeat the I message. Example: In the case of a “Man down”: • all for help from a safe area and confirm call C 285 Safety Standby 3. Fire. xecution of emergency rescue plan and activation E of rescue team 5. The call shall give the lease location. aintaining entry log and tool log to ensure all M personnel and tools are accounted for. 4.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.g. 6.. e.. and to ensure that a properly trained person is used where required. silica D sand. has been acknowledged Sand Blasting • Assess the hazard • ut on (don) respiratory protective equipment P (SCBA) as per provincial requirements • Remove the victim to a safe area • Perform emergency first aid as appropriate • eport all incidents immediately and arrange R for the victim to be transported to the nearest medical support Entry to Sour Worksites: [See: Hydrogen Sulfide Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Employee in charge and/or contractor to address the need for a Safety Standby during specific work procedures.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.e. lead base paints) • Sparks caused by the blasting operation 286 . walnut shells) • ust from material removed D (i. APPLICATION: All BP Canada Plant and Field sites. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • ust created by blasting operations (i. SAND BLASTING / ABRASIVE BLASTING PURPOSE: Provide general guidelines for safe sand blasting operations.. shut-off device located at nozzle.).Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Working in a Combustible Atmosphere Standard] [See: Safe Work Permits] [See: HSSE Meetings] [See: Personal Protective Equipment] [See: Confined Space Entry] [See: Noise and Hearing Conservation] PROCEDURES: The compressor.e. nozzle and operator must be properly grounded to prevent build-up of static electricity. The equipment operator must be able to stop the flow of material immediately. • pproved respiratory protection must be used to A 287 . silica.. • Safe Work Permit and Pre-Job Safety A Meeting may be required. etc. PRECAUTIONS: • f conducting abrasive blasting ensure that I crystalline silica is replaced with a less harmful substance. • inimize any release of dust (nuisance particuM lates. • Static electricity build-up Sand Blasting • ossibility of physical injury from the blasting P operation • Noise exposure • Heat stress PREPARATIONS: • ork area should be checked for combustible W gas prior to commencing operation and as required throughout. hose. Ventilation requirements for the work area must be considered. depending on the proximity to the production facilities and the complexity of the job. i. lead. or his designate. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring: • at all personnel are properly trained in the safe Th use of the equipment • That the material hazards are identified • at approved respiratory protection and perTh sonal protective equipment are used. lead or other toxic fumes. 288 . [See: MSDS] [See: Personal Protective Equipment] RESPONSIBILITIES: The BP Canada Representative. warehouses. guard against inhalation of air borne contaminants. wellsites. property and assets from injury. • pproved personal protective equipment must be A used to guard against injury to the operator. loss or damage.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. pipelines etc. and contractor personnel. compressor stations. including plants. • onsult Safety Coordinator or Industrial HyC gienist for advice on working with silica. [See: Respiratory Protection] Security • afe handling requirements for sand blasting S material. SECURITY PURPOSE: To protect the public. batteries. or material removed from surfaces must be addressed. vapors or particulates. APPLICATION: All BP Canada locations. BP Canada. offices. is responsible for ensuring that safe sand blasting procedures are followed. daily operation Security • Manned – 24 hr. 2. daily operation Assets included: • Product • Equipment • Legal Liability PROCEDURES: Physical Security: 1. See: Lease Design] 2. Post appropriate signs at ALL entrances to “guide” legitimate visitors and “warn-off” potential trespassers. Control access to company facilities. Properly maintained public protection security systems contribute to visitor safety. 289 . and minimize exposure to possible litigation resulting from incidents/accidents involving non-employees on locations. vandalism or unauthorized entry. [For appropriate signs. here locks are required. DEFINITION: Security included: • Unmanned – 8 hr. approved heavy-duty/ W industrial shackle padlocks (7/16 inch diameter) and chains will be used. (For approved padlocks.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Utilize gates and barriers to prevent the casual and/or curious from wandering or driving into facilities. Where the possibility exists for theft. Livestock entry shall be a consideration. The following are general physical security practices: Perimeter Protection: 1. facilities shall be evaluated and secured as required. 2. Lighting: Areas should have sufficient illumination for security purposes. offices.4 meters high.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.180 & EUB IL 90-19. deadbolt locks on the doors and heavy security screening (mesh) or bars over the windows of buildings containing vital controls and sensitive or valuable equipment. chain linked and topped with three strands of barbed wire angled outward. in addition. (If other than Alberta. Overhead doors may require additional protection. see applicable government regulations. 4. Corporate Security can provide recommendations and assistance as required. and be in accordance with BP Canada General Specifications and applicable government regulations. Buildings.170. BP standards are F 2. Install approved heavy-duty.) Building Protection: 1. contact Corporate Security. 8. containing vital controls.) Security 3. large quantities of valuable equipment and/or supplies may. Identification: Valuable equipment and other theft-prone items should be engraved or stamped with a company-issued. encing requirements for sour facilities or faciliF ties near populated areas can be found in Alberta Oil & Gas Regulations - 8. encing. etc. require electronic fire and intrusion detection systems. (Corporate Security shall issue numbers specific to each operating facility/area during 290 . identification number. for security purposes. computerregistered. RESPONSIBILITIES: All employees must report incidents involving criminal action or loss to Corporate Security. Forms: • 48-220 Security Incident Report • C1121 Bomb Threat/Anonymous Telephone Call Record SERVICE RIG SAFETY PURPOSE: To review the major areas of concern in regard to service rig safety to ensure compliance of service rigs with all applicable government and BP Canada regulations and practices. APPLICATION: All BP Canada operated service rig operations. Local Management and Police (if required).) . PREPARATIONS: Pre-employment Meeting: A Pre-employment meeting should be held with the service rig contractor to ensure compliance with Service Rig Safety requirements. EMERGENCY PLANS: Refer to Emergency Response Plan Guide.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Contractor Safety Program] Controlled Areas: Where service rig operations are required in a controlled 291 Service Rig Safety security surveys and/or on management request. Service Rig Safety area. or • hen a service rig has not worked for BP W Canada for a significant length of time (several jobs). that is. [See: Applicable Government Agency. or • hen it is deemed necessary by BP Canada W Wellsite Leader • is inspection must be reported on the daily Th report and service rig tour sheets • or critical wells. or • nce every three months during continuous O operation for BP Canada. hard-hat area. Signs: Post appropriate signs at the lease entrance advising H2S. adjacent to airports or populated areas.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. in Alberta] Notification: The applicable government agency should be notified of all rig moves.B. overhead power lines. PROCEDURES: Detailed Rig Inspection Report: Form C-79 (88-08) Must be filled out and sent to the appropriate supervisor according to the following schedule: • hen using a service rig that has not worked for W BP Canada before.U. E. this inspection should be F completed within the 24 hour period prior to initiating operations Note: Weekly Rig Inspection Report: 292 . restricted access. etc. additional equipment and/or procedures may be required to meet government regulations. Ideally this inspection could be carried out in conjunction with the daily mechanical testing of the BOP equipment.) Blow-out Preventers: 1. drilling. In addition to the detailed Rig Inspection. Service Rig Blow-Out Prevention Drill Report: Form C-125 (88-08) Blow-out drills must be performed by each rig crew every 7 days. or once per well. Accumulator: Lines shall be tested to the maximum operating pressure of the accumulator for 5 minutes prior to commencing operations. Daily Inspections: A walk around inspection must be done on a daily basis with the contractor representative. and must be reported on the daily report and service rig tour sheets. tripping.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. henever bolts are loosened or flanges broken.e. [See: Electrical Protection Regulations] 2. the heat source must be suitable for the electrical area classification in which it is used. out of hole. etc. When BOP’s require winterizing. whichever is more frequent. Hose couplers within 7.0 meters of the wellbore must 293 Service Rig Safety Form C-125 (88-08) . This should be done first thing in the morning and reported on the daily report and service rig tour sheets. The report must be filled out and sent to the appropriate supervisor. Performance and certification of the rig crew and supervisors must be recorded on the form. whichever is more frequent. W that section of the BOP system must be pressuretested as if it had just been hooked up. service rig inspections must be carried out each week. Drills should be done at various stages of activity (i. or once per well. 294 . If fire sheathed hoses are used. Gasoline must not be used. Gas detection. Service Rig Safety be “lock-type” or “Hammer Union type”. Lighting: All rig lights must be enclosed in vapor-proof glass covers and should be controlled by an explosion-proof switch within reach of the driller while at the brake. Threaded BOP ports are not acceptable because of potential thread damage. either automatically or manually operated. i. without air intake shut-offs.e. essential to operations may operate within this distance. Kill and Bleed Off System: Wellhead casing valves must not be used as part of this system. These valves are reserved for emergency use only. This valve must be function tested prior to commencing operations and at least once a week thereafter. Rig Cleaning: The rig should be kept clean using rigwash chemicals and water. Vehicles.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. they shall be shop serviced in three year cycles and service reports made available. Rig Savers/Shut-Offs: All diesel engines within 25 meters of a wellhead or a tank must be equipped with a positive air shut-off valve (PASO). This does not apply to where a vehicle is performing an operation on the well. BOP Remote: Must be shielded from the wellhead and may be located at the accumulator. provided the BP Canada Representative in-charge or his designate assesses the on-site safety. Tests shall be recorded on daily reports. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Monitors: Ensure Drager or Gastec H2S sampling devices are available with an adequate range of dated sampling tubes. H2S electronic monitors, complete with audible and visual alarms, are required on critical sour wells. The monitor must be capable of detecting H2S at 10 PPM. The monitor should provide alarms as follows: • Low Alarm – 10 PPM H2S • High Alarm – 20 PPM H2S Monitors must be routinely calibrated and tested by a qualified person. A minimum of two detectors are required; one located as close to the return line in the rig/mud tank as possible, and the other placed under the rig floor. [See: Standard for Working in a Combustible Gas Environment] Equipment Placement: On initial set-up, the rig should be upwind of the wellhead, based on the prevailing wind direction. The line from the tank to the wellhead should run at 90 degrees to the wind, and the pump must be upwind of the tank. [See: E.U.B. Equipment Spacing Diagram included at the end of this section.] NOTE: If the lease is too small to position equipment according to the applicable regulations, approval for exemption must be obtained from the appropriate regulatory agencies prior to performing the work. (e.g. EUB and/or OH&S). Power Line Spacing: Guy lines must not cross under or over any existing power line. For minimum clearances from overhead power lines, [See: Electricity]. 295 Service Rig Safety Hydrogen Sulfide and Combustible Gas (L.E.L.) Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Service Rig Safety Wind Direction: A method of determining wind direction shall be used. This should be supplemented by streamers in the derrick, guy wires and rig tank to ensure that a correct wind direction is always available. Access and Parking: The parking area should be as far away from the wellhead as possible, but in no case closer than 25 meters. Access to and from this area should be outside the 25 meter radius. Sump, Swab Tank and Flare Stack: The sump, swab tank and flare stack must be located 50 meters downwind of the rig based on the prevailing wind direction. On sour wells, the flare stack must be equipped with a continuous Pilot. For critical sour wells, continuous ignition is suggested as a back-up to the continuous pilot. Anchors: All underground piping, cable and cathodic protection beds must be located prior to driving in anchors. [See: Ground Disturbance Practice] Anchors must be properly spaced and pull tested according to the rig manufacturer’s specifications. [See: BP’s Completion Operations Manual for further details] Safety Trailer Requirements: Safety trailers are required where the H2S concentration in the vapor phase is equal to or greater than 1 percent. A safety trailer and safety supervisor is required on all wells where the H2S concentration in the vapor phase is equal to or greater than 5 percent. For wells where the H2S concentration is low and risk to personnel associated with an H2S release is minimal, the non-requirement for a safety trailer can be addressed in the work plan. 296 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. All electrical systems must be properly grounded. Ground electrodes must have a resistance of no more than 10 ohms. Ground the service rig, pumps, pump trucks and rig tanks, etc. The electrode resistance should not exceed 7 ohms. Cathodic protection must be shut off and the pipeline properly bonded to the wellhead and service rig before it is disconnected. [See: Electricity] When ground electrodes are to be used, these will be driven rods or pipes. RESPONSIBILITIES: The BP Canada representative in-charge is responsible for ensuring that all personnel on-site fully understand the safety considerations and service rig safety requirements. He is also responsible for ensuring that service rig inspections are performed, and that all service rigs that work for BP meet the applicable requirements. The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that his equipment and personnel comply with the applicable government regulations and BP HSSE Policies. SIGNS AND BARRICADES PURPOSE: To provide safe work practices to reduce hazards by the use of signs or barricades. APPLICATION: All BP plant and field roads and facilities. PROCEDURES: Road Hazards: Where a hazard exists on a road, e.g., closure, bridge out, or culvert out, proper signs and barricades must be 297 Signs & Barricades Electrical Grounding/Bonding: Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Simultaneous Operating used to ensure public safety. Road signs addressing dust hazards, ice, curves, hills, speed limits, etc. should also be considered. Local management should assess the need on all company roads. Road Maintenance: Whenever road maintenance (i.e., sanding, grading, gravelling, etc.) is being conducted on BP Canada roads, all signs required by Provincial Transportation must be used. BP Canada roads are open to public use and must be treated as such. Temporary Hazards: Wherever a temporary hazard exists during maintenance or operating activities, (i.e. open ditches, spills, wet floors, etc.) the necessary signs or barricades must be in place to ensure the safety of uninvolved personnel. RESPONSIBILITIES: All employees and contractors are responsible to identify hazards and ensure that proper and adequate signs and barricades are used as required. Use of reflective vests are required for people involved in setting, manning signs and barricades on roadways. SIMULTANEOUS OPERATING PROCEDURE 1.0 1.1 Purpose/Scope The intent of this document is to provide procedures to facilitate safe operations during simultaneous Well, Operations, and Construction activities. The Canada Gas BU team is committed to maintaining a safe and environmentally sound workplace. Pre-job planning, cooperation and communication between all groups and departments during 1.2 298 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. simultaneous operations are crucial to ensuring safe operations. Simultaneous operations (SIMOPS) referenced herein apply to interactions between Operations, Wells, and Construction activities. Federal, provincial, and local regulations are to be followed during all operations and activities. 2.0 2.1 Key Responsibilities The following is a list of the key Canada Gas PU Field based positions and their roles with respect to Simultaneous Operations planning. As the project develops, roles and responsibilities will change. These changes will be clearly identified and communicated at the daily coordination meetings. O perating Centre Manager (or designee such as Plant or Field Foreman for a site within the OC) is responsible for the overall safety of personnel on site. On a continuous basis they will communicate with the operating groups to learn of the day’s activities. They will decide which activities take precedence after assessing the priorities associated with each operation. The OCM (or designee) has the obligation and authority to shutdown any or all activities necessary to ensure the safety of personnel and the facility. He is responsible for organizing communications meetings with the respective Person in Charge from Wells, Construction and Operations for SIMOPS activities. P erson in Charge (PIC) will be a designated Contractor, Alliance partner, or BP employee who is singularly accountable for compliance with this SIMOPS Procedure at a given work location. Their accountabilities under this procedure will include notification/training of the work location department staff outlined in this procedure, develop- 2.2 2.3 299 Simultaneous Operating Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Simultaneous Operating ment of any location specific notification lists, and ongoing reporting of any HSSE incidents or “near miss” incidents. There shall be a PIC identified for each major work group on the site (e.g. Construction, Wells, and Operations) wherever simultaneous operations can occur. As the project progresses, the PIC role may be transferred to different personnel. As these roles change, it is important that the PIC’s are clearly identified to all personnel onsite through training/orientations and posting on the SIMOPS Notice Board. 2.4 W ells Representative is the BP Wellsite Leader and is accountable for all drilling and rig related activities and operations. He/she is the Wells PIC and reports to the Wells Team Leader in Calgary. S pecial Projects / Construction Foreman - this can be any person who has responsibilities for construction or special project activities including WARTHOG. He/she is accountable for all project-associated contractors to provide a SIMOPS Work Plan for all construction projects that involve SIMOPS (concurrent activity among Projects, Wells, and Operations). O perations Lead/or Area Authority is accountable for facility operations and all non-drilling remedial well operations as well as all activities on the site outside of the drilling rig after Production Operations begin. He/she is the Operations PIC and is accountable for Operations SIMOPS Work Plans that involve activities that impact drilling operations or project/construction activities. Depending on the particular OC / Site organization this may be a Foreman, Senior Operator or Plant / Field Operator. Issuing Authority is accountable for the overall 2.5 2.6 2.7 300 Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. control of work on the work site. He / she will issue Work Permits. In cases where the Issuing Authority has been transferred from existing operations the Issuing Authority must ensure the requirements for handing over a lease and changing Issuing authority have been met. On larger sites it may be appropriate to designate more than one Issuing Authority. In that case the designated areas for each Issuing Authority must be clearly defined with a marked up plot plan and on site (e.g. snow fencing). Note in many cases the Issuing Authority will also be a PIC. 2.8 S ite HSSE Coordinator will be responsible for site safety programs. The Site HSSE Coordinator will assist the PIC in the facilitation of SIMOPS communication meetings and provide support to all departments in the preparation of SIMOPS Plans and hazards analysis reviews. Definitions S imultaneous operations referenced herein apply to interactions between Operations, Wells, and Construction activities. Federal, provincial, and local regulations are to be followed during all operations and activities. These activities as well as other terminology are defined as follows: • perations: facilities operation and maintenance, O well production and maintenance, pipeline operation and maintenance • ells: drilling rig, workover rig, and/or compleW tion rig operations including abandonment’s, and rig maintenance • onstruction: civil/gravel work, facilities installaC tion and construction, pipeline construction, site decommissioning and abandonment and general construction 3.0 3.1 301 Simultaneous Operating drilling. Coordination meetings will be held daily through the various phases of construction. processing. At this meeting. or any construction activity • ite Control: Ultimate control and accountS ability for a development work site by one of the three departments shall be established for each phase of the individual program development Procedure Communications C ommunications is the key to excellent HSSE performance and safe Simultaneous Operations.1 302 . Potential work conflicts will be resolved between the various groups before any work will commence.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. It is critically important during Simultaneous Operations that all personnel involved know how to communicate an emergency situation. or injection of hydrocarbons (and associated water). A representative from each major work group will attend these meetings and exchange information about their respective group’s activities for the day. remedial operations. 4. SIMOPS activities planned for the next day will be discussed in detail and the various PIC’s will pass on SIMOPS information to affected supervisors. Every group must be keenly aware of what the other groups are doing to avoid conflicts. Simultaneous Operating • imultaneous Operations (SIMOPS): concurrent S activities of producing. foreman and workers at the following day’s HSSE meetings.0 4. drilling. well maintenance/service. completion. A SIMOPS Notice Board shall be established at a designated location on the work site. information relative to future work will also be shared to allow adequate planning for all affected departments. and operations activities. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 4. and contact information for Work Permits • • • SIMOPS Work Plans Emergency Response Plan (ERP) N ame and contact information for the site specific Person in Charge (PIC) for Construction. Crew supervisors are accountable for reviewing the SIMOPS Notice Board and ensuring that any operation which affects another group’s activity be discussed at the next appropriate tour or shift change tool box safety meeting. The Issuing Authority in charge of the site shall be accountable for reviewing and updating the SIMOPS Notice Board. as a minimum: • Site specific Emergency Notification Number(s) • Site specific Emergency Notification Procedure • uthority or Department in charge of the locaA tion (Site control). Th e SIMOPS Notice Board shall be updated as conditions or development phases change. or pre-job safety meeting. the site specific emergency notification procedure and the muster location(s) will be reviewed. and Operations D ate of last Notice Board information change or review • The location of the notice board and the minimum information above shall be part of the initial site specific HSSE orientation. This SIMOPS Notice Board will display. name of Issuing Authority (IA). pre-tour safety meeting.2 Work Permits Th e Canada Gas PU Permit to Work (PTW) Practice (MS880) will be used. It must be reviewed weekly for accuracy. Wells. As part of the site orientation. 303 Simultaneous Operating . Work Permits will be issued by the Issuing Authority and posted on the SIMOPS Notice Board. 304 . project. a SIMOPS Work Plan is required of all activities that may impact wells. equipment involved.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.3 Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS) Work Plans S IMOPS Work Plans shall be developed for any work group’s activity that directly or indirectly affects the safe performance of another work group’s activity or operation.. gHSSEr MF36201. The Site HSSE Coordinator will assist each department in the development of SIMOPS Plans and hazards analysis and will facilitate SIMOPS interface meetings between departments. • esignated PIC for the job and the communicaD tion plan for contacting the PIC by radio and/or phone • Expected duration of the work • Hazard Analysis profile for the job • Work Permit Plan for that given job • larity on which activities cannot occur simulC taneously or what special controls are required if the activities are to take place simultaneously E very SIMOPS Work Plan must be approved and signed by the PIC for the operation(s) impacted. Simultaneous Operating 4. etc.e. Th e work activity requiring the SIMOPS Plan should be clearly identified on the SIMOPS Plan form. site resources required. or A activity to be conducted including the number of personnel involved. operation. production operations or construction operations. (i.) Responsibility for SIMOPS Work Plan preparation lies with the work group initiating the activity. The plan must include but is not limited to the following key points: • description of the job. Examples of work requiring SIMOPS Work Plans include but are not limited to the following: • n a well site. For example. Reference Documents • Project Management Plan – gHSSEr MS 363 • HSSEr MS 880 - Permit to Work and Hazard g Assessment Practice • AG SPU Control of Work Policy http://docs.0 6. operation. Construction work adjacent to a O drilling or well service rig • n a plant site. project. N bpweb.bp. A copy of every approved SIMOPS Work Plan shall be posted on the SIMOPS Notice Board. and obtaining the Wells PIC’s approval before the work begins. Upon completion of the SIMOPS activity. Construction work adjacent to O live operating plant Th e Issuing Authority or PIC can require a SIMOPS Work Plan before the new job. the PIC for Construction is accountable for communication with the Wells PIC.0 305 Simultaneous Operating .com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/ documents/K0000002586 Forms • HSSEr MF36201 – SIMOPS Work Plan Form 5. However work can only begin when a Permit to Work has been issued by the Issuing Authority who has also reviewed the SIMOPS Work Plan.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. reviewing the SIMOPS Work Plan. or activity can begin. when a construction activity impacts a Wells operation by proximity to the wells operation. the Plan may be removed from the SIMOPS Notice Board. and therefore necessitates the need for extreme caution and proper procedures to eliminate the safety hazards. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Fire. Burns PREPARATIONS: The stress relieving unit and associated equipment are both potential ignition sources. Electrical Shock. site-specific procedures must be developed. RESPONSIBILITIES: • e BP Canada Representative in charge of the Th operation is responsible for ensuring that safe stress relieving procedures are followed • t is the responsibility of the qualified engineer I 306 . [See: Permit to work] [See: HSSE Meetings] PROCEDURES: Whenever stress relieving is performed on piping or vessels in place.General] Refer to BP’s Welding Quality Control Manual for stress relieving requirements and techniques. [See: Welding Practices . Signs: Appropriate signs should be erected around the work area to warn of the hazard and to keep out non-essential personnel. APPLICATION: All BP Canada Facilities. Explosion. Stress Relieving STRESS RELIEVING PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for safe stress relieving practices.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. swabbing units and wireline units. wireline unit. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Combustible Fluids: As excessive gas becomes evident. 307 . Does not include swabbing operations on sour wells. Wind indicators must be present at all locations.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. in charge to ensure that the appropriate stress relieving requirements and techniques are met • e contractor is responsible for the safe operaTh tion and use of his equipment while on an BP Canada worksite Swabbing SWABBING PURPOSE: To provide a general guide for safe swabbing operations. production must be switched through testers and gas flared. APPLICATION: All swabbing operations conducted by service rigs. Toxic return fluids: [See: WHMIS for Fluid Handling Requirements] [See: H2S Safety] [See: Static Electricity] Swabbing Unit. DEFINITION: Routine Work: Frequently performed swabbing operations on wells of similar set-up. service rig and associated piping and equipment must be properly bonded to wellhead and grounded. swabbing unit and swab return line must then be electrically bonded to the flowline to eliminate any electrical potential before disconnecting. If swabbing is part of service rig operations. This procedure must be reviewed with all pertinent contract personnel. Cathodic Protection: If flowline is to be disconnected. cathodic protection must be shut off. or swab return line is to be connected to flowline. 308 . The wellhead.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. only if the Hydrogen Sulfide concentrations are less than the occupational exposure limit. PROCEDURES: Company Representative: A properly trained BP Canada Representative. or his designate. [See: Permits To Work] [See: HSSE Meetings] Routine Work: Swabbing procedures must be developed for all routine swabbing operations where a work permit and pre-job safety meeting are not issued or conducted. Procedures reviewed and individuals trained must be documented. Fluids should be swabbed through a poorboy degasser into a rig tank. must be on-site for all swabbing operations. prior to commencing operation. The procedure must cover all pertinent safety and operation considerations and emergency plans. [See: Bonding and grounding] PREPARATIONS: Swabbing Non-Routine Work: A Work Permit must be issued and a pre-job safety meeting conducted. An BP Canada Representative must be on-site when swabbing operations involve sour wells. only a pre-job safety meeting needs to be conducted. and vented tanks. and the driver must not be in the cab. which may include a separator. Two qualified personnel should supervise the equipment. Diesel Engine Shut-Offs: [See: PASO] Oil Savers: Lubricator oil savers must be equipped with controls which can be readily operated. [See: BP’s Completion Operations Manual] Swab Return Vent Lines: Must be equipped with block valves. all fluid should be swabbed through proper testing equipment. [See: H2S Safety] If the H2S concentrations exceed the occupational exposure limit. A wireline truck equipped with adequate lighting and a meterage wheel may be used with the approval of the supervisor. or his designate and the appropriate government agency. which are closed when running in the hole with the swab mandrel. continuous flare pit. configured appropriately for the specific well. Swab Tank: Must be spaced as per rig tank spacing requirements. gas boot. the engine must be shut off. Swab Cable: Swabbing 309 . flare stack.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Swabbing with service rig or swabbing unit must not be done after dark. Swabbing Unit: Must be securely anchored according to manufacturer’s specifications. Tank Trucks: If swabbing to a tank truck. If external gauging is not possible. suspend swabbing operations and ensure that the swab return line block valve is closed prior to any personnel going up on the tanks. TRAINING: [See: Training] TANK GAUGING PURPOSE: To provide a guide for safe gauging of tanks. 310 . Fluid must not be unloaded from the swab tank while a swab is being pulled.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. PRECAUTIONS: • anks installed on a permanent basis should have T gauge boards or an external gauging mechanism. The service contractor is responsible for the safe operation of his equipment. Should be flagged and well maintained. Tank Gauging PRECAUTIONS: Swab tank should be externally gauged. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: Gauging operations present a hazard to the worker due to the presence of toxic or flammable gases and the tank height. APPLICATION: All plant and field operations. and for the adherence to all applicable government and BP Canada regulations and practices. [See: Tank Gauging] RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative in charge of the operation to ensure that safe swabbing procedures are followed. a fall arresting device must be worn. • here tanks are handling toxic fluids. guardrail. the W worker may require breathing apparatus and a safety standby person. [See: Ladders – Fixed] • No person should stand on a tank roof. . platform or cage has not been supplied.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. where a hoop. [See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Tank Truck Loading/Unloading] • onsult Safety Coordinator or Industrial C Hygienist for advice on specific respiratory protection. [See: Working at Heights Standard and Golden Rule] TANK TRUCK LOADING /UNLOADING PURPOSE: To provide guidelines for loading and unloading products and fluids safely. APPLICATION: Movement of fluids at plant and field operations via bulk truck transport. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Combustible/Toxic Fluids [See: WHMIS] [See: MSDS] [See: Hydrogen Sulphur Safety] [See: Atmospheric Monitoring] [See: Respiratory Protection] 311 Tank Truck Loading • ll tank ladders shall conform to applicable A government regulations and BP Specifications.0 meters. • hen gauging a tank from a ladder at a height W greater than 2. connections.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. If a leak is spotted. Unless specific safety related considerations require otherwise. or sour fluids are being transported. PROCEDURES: Before loading or unloading. the driver will immediately stop the activity. All diesel engine vehicles working within 25 meters must be equipped with a positive inlet air shut-off.e. In areas where spacing relaxation has been approved by the necessary government agencies. All trucks must be parked at least 25 meters from any combustible source. Tank Truck Loading • Static Electricity • Elevated Worksite – Top of Tank • Fluid temperature. all trucks must be suitably grounded. correct the problem. i. These will address the unique hazards and safeguards required.. [See: Electrical Bonding and Grounding] [See: Working at Heights] PREPARATIONS: Where caustic. the driver will remain outside the vehicle at all times during loading and unload- 312 . When loading has started the driver must walk around the unit to ensure that the product is not leaking from hoses. [See: Service Rig Safety for Spacing Diagrams] All trucks must be equipped to allow determination of levels in the tank without the driver being on top of the tanks. and if safe to do so. valves. corrosive. Sulfur. and pointed off the lease for quick exit. the truck must be located a minimum of 8 meters from the production tanks and outside of any tank dykes. or extremely volatile. the distances so approved shall be maintained. acids. LPG. site-specific procedures must be followed. or pump seals. While loading or unloading. The grounding cable connection should be made at the Tank Truck to eliminate any possible spark at the ignitable source. Prior to loading and unloading a vehicle. during loading and unloading operations. gauging tanks. A safety standby should also be considered. placed ready to use. The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that safe loading/unloading procedures are followed While loading or unloading.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. where the potential exists for H2S to exceed the occupational exposure limits. 313 Tank Truck Loading ing operations to continuously monitor tank levels and connections. In areas where spacing relaxation has been approved by the necessary government agencies. In systems with low H2S content and/or the risk to worker exposure is minimal. No truck maintenance shall take place during these operations. the wheels must be chocked. the non-requirement for a safety standby can be addressed by a site-specific procedure. . the truck must be located a minimum of 8 meters from the production tanks and outside of any tank dykes. Special Precautions for Handling Sour Fluids: When handling fluids containing H2S. The appropriate personal protection must be worn. and checking truck compartments during loading or unloading operations. truck operators must wear breathing equipment while connecting or disconnecting load lines. [See: Hydrogen Sulfide Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Safety Standby] RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada employee in-charge to ensure that safe loading and unloading procedures are conveyed and followed. [See: Personal Protective Equipment] Tank trucks must be equipped with at least 1-30# LTK Fire extinguisher. This equipment must be supplied and maintained by the contractor. the driver will remain outside the vehicle at all times during loading and unloading operations to continuously monitor tank levels. No truck maintenance shall take place during these operations. truck operators must wear breathing equipment while connecting or disconnecting load lines. the non-requirement for a safety standby can be addressed by a site-specific procedure. connections. the driver will immediately stop the activity. or pump seals. [See: Service Rig Safety for Spacing Diagrams] Swabbing All trucks must be equipped to allow determination of levels in the tank without the driver being on top of the tanks. [See: Personal Protective Equipment] Tank trucks must be equipped with at least 1-30# LTK Fire extinguisher. where the potential exists for H2S to exceed the occupational exposure limits. correct the problem. Unless specific safety related considerations require otherwise. and checking truck compartments during loading or unloading operations. the wheels must be chocked. the distances so approved shall be maintained. When loading has started the driver must walk around the unit to ensure that the product is not leaking from hoses. Prior to loading and unloading a vehicle. placed ready to use. during loading and unloading operations. A safety standby should also be considered. The appropriate personal protection must be worn. [See: Hydrogen Sulfide Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Safety Standby] 314 . gauging tanks. In systems with low H2S content and/or the risk to personnel associated with an H2S release is minimal.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. This equipment must be supplied and maintained by the contractor. If a leak is spotted. and if safe to do so. Special Precautions for Handling Sour Fluids: When handling fluids containing H2S. valves. ) Damaged handles on hammers. RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the Canada employee in-charge to ensure that safe loading and unloading procedures are conveyed and followed. The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that safe loading/unloading procedures are followed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.e. Check for tight- 315 Tools . Inspection of Hand Tools prior to use: • erform a complete inspection of all equipment P and job related tools prior to starting any job. • heck to ensure that tool handles are wedged C tightly in the head of all tools. torque wrenches to be used vs. chisels and E punches. TOOLS All tools must be inspected prior to use and only used if in safe working condition. impact wrenches). which develop mushroomed heads during use. • nsure hand tools such as hammers. • nsure wooden or fiberglass handles used on E hammers and similar tools are not damaged or have been modified (i.e. Studs and nuts must be tightened as per manufacturer’s recommendation (i. This means all guards must be in place and no modifications made to the tool. All tools and equipment used must be clean and in good working condition prior and during use. axes and similar equipment shall be immediately taken out of service and replaced promptly. are reconditioned or replaced as necessary. Tools must be used as per manufacturer’s recommendation. taped wooden handles may hide damage to the handle. etc. Training • eplace worn or bent wrenches. • ever attempt to repair damaged or modified N tools. pliers. APPLICATION: Employees and Contractors as required by job function and/or designated by the Department/Area Manager. [See: Safety Meetings] 316 . This on-site communication will provide informal training and open channels for encouraging awareness and information flow as the operation progresses. R regularly. TRAINING PURPOSE: To describe the safety training courses and certification required by employees and contractors to ensure safe and productive on-site operations. required training and certification. • tore tools in dry secure locations where they will S not be tampered with. PREPARATIONS: Pre-Job risk assessment Meeting: Should provide details of the job and all safety considerations related to the job could include but not limited to. • tilize appropriate eye face and hand protection U while using hand tools or equipment which might produce flying materials or be subject to breakage? (See Personal Protection Equipment for further information) • reference is to select a tool that will keep your P wrist in neutral position. ness at head/handle connection point.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Safety training will be instituted to comply with mandatory requirements and other safety training as deemed necessary by Management.P. PROCEDURES: Safety is a function of every job task.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. The Safety and Industrial Hygiene section provides for the required safety training in-house or through recommended outside agencies. certification (for Drilling S Operations) • ell Service B. Wellsite Training: The On-Site BP Representative in charge of any rig operation must have the following qualifications: • econd Line B. Contractor Safety: Training All contractors should have a Safety Program in place which meets the training requirements of the applicable government regulations and BP Canada requirements. in several special safety training areas. Safety Training Records: A complete record of all safety training must be maintained by the Local VTA Administration section in the Department/Area.O. Training Courses: Employees will be trained to a competent level on job tasks. This should be reviewed prior to awarding work. and mandatory safety training. It also promotes the compliance of all employees with safety training requirements.O. by monitoring changes in regulations and advising the Operating Management of the requirements. certification (for Service Rig W Operations) • H2S Alive certification (as applicable) 317 .P. certification is a requirement. however. operating procedures. and should be retained in the VTA database. certification for Toolpush/ S Rig Manager (for drilling operations) • ell Service B. This matrix must provide for.P. RESPONSIBILITIES: The BP Canada Supervisor/Representative in charge is responsible for verifying that the required training and certification requirements are met as per the CGPU HSSE Required Training Matrix. in accordance with the applicable government regulations and BP Canada requirements. certification for Drillers (for F drilling operations) • econd Line B. all legislated training requirements. at a minimum. (in accordance with appli- cable government regulations) • orksite Hazardous Materials Information W System (WHMIS) • Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) • Confined Space (as applicable) • pecific Training in the type of Operations being S performed.P. The Field Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all workers are properly trained or under the direct supervision of a worker who is.O.P. BP and FTE Employees within Operations refer to the CGPU Field Required Training Matrix for training requirements and renewal frequencies located on the gHSSEr 318 .O. • e Service Rig/Drilling Contractor/Service Th Company personnel must have the following qualifications: • irst Line B. Training • espiratory Protection Training certification (as R applicable) • First Aid & C.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.R. certification for Toolpush W and Driller (for service rig operations) • Boiler Tickets certification (as applicable) • asic specific training in the operation or service B they are to perform.P.O. asp .bp. CONTRACTOR REQUIRED SAFETY TRAINING: Contractors working on behalf of BP Canada are required to have the minimum training requirements listed below.com/EP3/Skills_ N Development/default.bpweb.com/NAG:/content/hse/ onshore/documents/K0000002586?docbase=NA G&ticket=vlinkpass&username=bp_vlink&root paths=%2Fcontent%2Fhse%2Fonshore%2Fdoc uments%0A%0D.bp. The Contractor shall be able to provide valid training certificates to the BP Representative on site prior to work commencing: • 2S Alive if working in potential H2S atmospheres H • WHMIS • Standard First Aid to meet the minimum first aider requirements in provincial regulations • TDG if transporting dangerous goods • Level One Indoctrination References: • Skills Development Web Links: - AG SPU: https://wss2.aspx • AG Control of Work Practice Web Link: N http://docs.bpweb.com/index. WELDING PRACTICES – GENERAL PURPOSE: To provide safe procedures for welding.bp. APPLICATION: All BP Canada Facilities and pipelines.com/EP3/Skills_ C Development/Canada/Forms/AllItems. DEFINITION: 319 Welding Practices website - http://gasiso14001.aspx - ANADA: https://wss2.bp.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. Radiation and electric shock • Toxic welding fumes. Other jurisdictions may have definitions that vary. gaskets. fittings. particularly when the work involves cutting into. solids line. tubes. bolting. and gases • Compressed fuel cylinders • Noise • Vibration PREPARATIONS: 320 . The sole purpose of this system is the conveyance of a fluid under pressure. The appropriate regulations should be checked for their definitions. secondary line. and other components making up a system. fluid line. conduits. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • elding within a production area is an activity W which requires extreme caution and proper procedures • elding and “hot work” are not to be considered W routine operations. oil line. Welding Practices Welding includes: • Arc Welding • MIG • TIG • Hot cutting • CAD Welding • Stoppling • Explosion welding and cutting A pressure piping system includes the pipe.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. distribution line or flowline. and the control of the flow of a fluid under pressure between two or more A pipeline is a gas line. production lines • Fire and Explosion • Welding Burns. multiphase line. or welding onto. Welding in any production facility requires a Hot Work Permit and shall require a pre-job safety meeting depending on the complexity and hazard associated with work. to the following: • Blinding • Purging • Depressuring • Excavations • X-Ray • Stress Relieving • Non-Destructive Testing 321 Welding Practices All welding and “hot work” must be done with the permission of the BP Canada Representative in-charge. The BP Canada welding quality manual and specification must be consulted. [See: Permit to work] [See: HSSE Meetings] [See: MSDS] NOTE: esignated welding shops are exempt. This may include. PROCEDURES: Site-specific procedure must be developed. D Complete risk assessment to determine if respiratory protection and emergency back-up personnel are required. proper notification must be made and approval secured. . Government Regulations: Before any additions or changes are made to pressure piping that are classified under the provincial inspection jurisdictions. but is not limited. prior to commencing any welding operation. [See: Safety Standby] [See: Respiratory Protection] The needs for warning signs. to isolate or restrict entry to the work area to authorized personnel wearing suitable protection should take into consideration.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. or tie-in to existing operating equipment must be prepared. local fume extraction equipment or respiratory protection must be used where: • Natural ventilation is obstructed • Toxic metals or fluxes are used • Toxic fumes. beryllium and other metal fumes or dusts the following respiratory protection guidelines must be followed: 322 . To reduce exposure to hexavalent chromium. gases and vapors may occur in the welding process. the following areas must be covered: 1. ctivity: Describe what has to be done and how A the activity will be carried out.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 2. Respiratory: Exposure to hazardous fumes. 4. dusts. [See: Confined Space Entry] [See: Respiratory Equipment] Note: Consult Industrial Hygienist for advice on appropriate worker exposure controls and respiratory protection. ire Protection Equipment: Must be located at F the work site. [See: Fire Protection Equipment] PRECAUTIONS: Ventilation: Adequate mechanical ventilation. azards: Describe the safety hazards present H and how each hazard will be eliminated or minimized. welding. For each activity. 3. The procedure must list all the activities in sequence required to complete the job. ready to use. ersonnel: Describe who is responsible for the P activity and who will carry it out. Welding Practices Site-Specific Procedure: A detailed work plan for any procedure that involves the use of a cutting torch. gases and ozone are generated. cutting. Welding helmet and safety glasses must be worn when welding. Half Mask respirator with P100 filters Powered air-purifying or full-face respirator with P100 filters Protective Equipment: Welder and Welder’s helpers must wear approved protective equipment. the Practice PPE requirements shall be followed. If a welder is performing non-welding related tasks. Welders are responsible for the proper maintenance and safe operation of their equipment. to ensure that safe welding procedures are in place and followed. grinding and buffing. FRW Practice and Hand Protection Practice] Flash protection screens should be used to protect the uninvolved workers. 323 Welding Practices Task Welding. Re-entry to work area must be accompanied by re-check for combustible and/or toxic gas. equipment and lines shall be checked for combustible and/or toxic gas prior to starting job. Work area may require continuous monitoring throughout the job. RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada supervisor in charge. [See: Personal Protective Equipment. TRAINING: Only welders ticketed for the applicable weld procedure shall be used.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. or his designate. Gas Monitoring: Work area. gouging & grinding on stainless steel inside a vessel or in a shop Welding on carbon steel with chromium or beryllium containing rods (in shop or outside) Welding & grinding on stainless steel using Inconel rod inside vessels Respiratory Protection Half Mask respirator with P100 filters . Well Servicing Work Plan All workers must be properly trained and competent to carry out their required task. DEFINITION: A site-specific procedure of the well servicing operations to be undertaken. The following outlines the information and procedures that should be included in any approved work plan. Pertinent Well Data: • Well name and location 324 . All well workovers must have an approved work plan.112 – 12.1 (1) – 174 (1) • ritish Columbia OH & S Manual – Section B 12. PROCEDURES: Each well servicing job should have a work plan. Analysis of the operation and safety conditions will dictate the detail required. For welding rules and regulations consult the provincial occupational health and safety references listed below: • lberta OH & S Manual – Part 10 Section A 171. APPLICATION: All BP Canada operated wells.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.124 WELL SERVICING WORK PLAN PURPOSE: To provide a guide for developing work plans for well servicing work. ) • Bottom hole pressure • Bottomhole temperature • 2S concentration (Is a safety company reH quired? Is this a “critical sour well” as defined by the EUB?) • Hole capacities • ellhead description including details of size. and accessories (packers. Job Procedure: 325 Well Servicing Work Plan . Ground or CF • TD • PBTD • asing details: Surface. cement volume • roduction tubing details.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. lost circulation. OD’s). e. weight. flanges. etc. • Perforations • Zone • Elevations: KB. hangers.g. cementing difficulties. including all dimensions (ID’s. tubing anchors. W pressure ratings. and manufacturer’s name • ucker rod and bottomhole pump details includS ing polish rod dimensions • Pumping unit details. grades. Any problems previously encountered should be referenced and detailed. setting depth. [See: H2S Safety] Well History: An outline of the initial completion and a summary of all previous workovers should be included. listed from top to P bottom. pressure test failures. grade. cement type. collapsed casing. weights. thread size. particularly those which could lead to further trouble.. etc. intermediate and producC tion size. the program must be discussed with a representative of the substitute company before they arrive at the lease. every job to be done must be included in the procedure. etc. profiles. The service to be provided and the contact must be listed. and the BP Canada personnel that must be notified before any equipment is moved on a location. Well Servicing Work Plan A detailed. and a copy of their program attached. All fluids to be used must be fully detailed. [See: TDG Regulations] Service Companies: If specific companies are to be used. ID. EUB approval is required for critical sour wells. including all safe handling precautions (Include MSDS). Applicable Emergency Response Plan should be referenced and included in work plan package as required.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. therefore. Approvals: All well workover work plans or programs must be approved according to the Department/Area policy. It cannot be assumed that the wellsite supervisor will perform any operation.). [See: Emergency Response Plan] All equipment to be used (packers. OD. which details the various regulatory bodies. and thread connection. It should begin with the statement of notification. should be fully identified by manufacturer’s name. Contact List: This should include BP Canada personnel as well as essential contract personnel contacts. part number. where the fluid is to be obtained and how it is to be disposed of. Down-hole Schematic-Log Sections: 326 . step-by step procedure must be written. If it is necessary to substitute service companies during the course of the job. they should be named. APPLICATION: All BP Canada operated well testing operations. i.e. E entrained air • High Pressure • oxic and/or Combustible fluids T 327 Well Testing Down-hole drawings which show “present” and “proposed” down-hole details must be attached. WELL TESTING PURPOSE: To provide a general guide to safe well testing operations. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • xplosion: Improper Purging procedures. Pertinent open hole and cased hole log sections must be attached and referenced in the main body of the program.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. must be listed and the supplier identified. . All special handling tools must be listed. Use Form C-238. ineral Surface Lease or Landowner Contact M Sheet RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative onsite to ensure that a work plan is developed and provided. Flaring Permit 2. Material Requirements: Any materials that are not readily available. or must be specially manufactured. noting which log is to be used for correlating purposes. Other Requirements: Copies of the following documents or permits must be attached to the program package where appropriate: 1. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. [See: Work Plan] A work plan should address the following: • Safety Hazards and Considerations • Purpose of the test • Type of reservoir • Test Equipment required • otential operating difficulties and preventative P measures. no additional response plan is required for testing. Otherwise a site-specific Emergency Response 328 . H2S Safety] Well Testing • tatic Electricity: All equipment rigged in must S be electrically bonded and grounded. • High Noise: [See: Electricity] [See: Noise Exposure & Hearing Conservation] PREPARATIONS: Well Test Program: A work plan must be developed which meets the applicable regulatory requirements. or may stand alone. Procedures may be part of the well servicing work plan. prior approval from the EUB. [See: EUB IL 91-2] The requirements under IL 91-2 must also be addressed when flaring wells containing 1-5% H2S and should be followed for wells containing less than 1% H2S. [See: WHMIS. Where the well is part of an approved Emergency Response Plan for an existing sour facility. An Emergency Response Plan must be in place when testing wells containing H2S in excess of 1%. if in Alberta. When testing wells containing H2S in excess of 5 percent. must be obtained. or Alberta Occupational Health and Safety. Equipment Spacing: [See: Service Rig Safety] NOTE: In British Columbia. [See: HSSE Meetings] Signs: Warning of the presence of H2S must be posted at the lease entrance when testing wells with H2S content exceeding 10 PPM. All testing lines must be staked or secured First Aid Equipment: Must be available on-site along with means for transportation off-site. PROCEDURES: The BP Canada representative in charge must be aware of the regulatory requirements as laid out in the following: “Well Testing – Minimum Guidelines for Safety Enhanced Field Operations”. Three (working) qualified test personnel are required on-site at all times when the H2S content of the well is known to be greater than 1% 329 . Well Testing [See: Emergency Response Plan] Pre-Job Safety Meeting: Must be held before commencing operations to discuss testing procedures and potential hazards. the flare stack must be 50 meters from the separator. [See: First Aid Equipment] Testing Personnel: A minimum of two (working) qualified test personnel are required on-site at all times. Plan is required.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. available from most testing companies in Alberta. and specifically the flare must not be lit. Purging: System must be purged of all air with pilot out prior to commencing operations. or to the wellhead pressure rating. Breathing: A minimum of two self-contained breathing apparatus must be on location at all times. whichever is the lesser. adequate breathing apparatus must be supplied for the full crew. Well Testing (10. ignition sources must be eliminated. If using a combustible purge medium. [See: Electrical Protection Regulations] Communications: Off lease communications and an Emergency Contact List must be on location at all times.000PPM). to assess the need for additional personnel and ensure that fully trained and competent contractor employees are used. Fire Protection: A minimum of 2 – 30# LTK BC fire extinguishers must be on location in accessible areas ready to use. Well site illumination must be adequate to safely perform any job.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. It is the responsibility of the BP Canada representative in charge. Once 330 . The use of a non-combustible purge medium is desirable. and must be approved for use in the hazardous locations. [See: Purging] Pressure Testing: All equipment upstream of the choke should be pressure tested to 1.2 times the maximum working pressure. If working on a sour well. CPR and WHMIS and should have an H2S certificate. The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all equipment and personnel meet the applicable Government regulations. PRECAUTIONS: Safety standby must be utilized for tank gauging when working with toxic fluids. Where H2S is expected. all personnel must possess a H2S certificate. check the entire system for leaks.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. BP Canada requirements. [See: H2S Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Safety Standby] Sour and/or Critical Wells: Additional safety procedures are required. . [See: Training] WIRELINE OPERATIONS PURPOSE: To provide a general guideline for safe wireline operations. or when working with fired equipment. TRAINING: All personnel must possess valid First Aid. 331 Wireline Operations the flow test has started. [See: OH&S “Well Testing” guide] [See: BP’s Completion Operations Manual] RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative in-charge to ensure that safe well testing operations are carried out. and possess sufficient experience to perform the work with minimal supervision. fishing. DEFINITION: Routine Work: Frequently performed wireline operations (i. Wireline Operations APPLICATION: All BP Canada operated wells where wireline is run for remedial and/or maintenance requirements (i.’s: At least one line-B.P. [See: Safety Harnesses. and opening or closing sliding sleeves).O. Climbing on the lubricator is not allowed. dewaxing.P. Lanyards and Lifelines] Wireline Unit and Picker/Mast Unit must have wheels chocked. Does not include wireline operations on sour wells.e. Lubricator & B. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • igh Pressure: Well pressure must be checked to H ensure that wireline equipment is rated for the working pressure. located between the lubricator and wellhead must be used.s for sweet wells can be either 332 . • tatic Electricity: The Wireline and Picker/Mast S unit must be properly bonded and grounded to the rig and/or wellhead. B. running or pulling plugs/chokes. pressure survey.O.e. • Combustible/Toxic Fluids: [See: Electricity] [See: H2S Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] PROCEDURES: All equipment attached to the wellhead must be adequately supported to prevent lateral movement.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. dewaxing) on wells of similar set-up.O.P. TRAINING: (See: Training) WELL WORK .’s. Stuffing Box: Rubber/Packing must be maintained in good condition. [See: Alberta Recommended Practices – Volume 2] [See: BP Completion Operations Manual] Equipment approved for use in sour service must be used (i.P.’s must be pressure tested to the lesser of 1. Well Work Lubricator and B. The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all equipment meets all applicable government regulations and BP requirements. PRECAUTIONS: Critical Wells: Additional safety procedures are required. At least 2 – 30# LTK fire extinguishers must be on-site and ready to use. 333 . line.e. manually or hydraulically operated. and all personnel are properly trained in safe wireline procedures.HAND OVER BETWEEN OPERATIONS AND WELLS TEAMS PURPOSE: To provide standards of safe well turnover between Operations and the Wells group. prior to use.P.2 times the maximum working pressure or the wellhead pressure rating. lubricator. B.O. running tools). RESPONSIBILITIES: It is the responsibility of the BP Representative in-charge to ensure that safe wireline procedures are followed.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.O. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.1 Scope and Applicability The purpose of this practice is to provide safe work 334 . 3) rior to starting work on the well bore. 2) ny deviation from the agreed upon time period A requires joint written approval by both Operations and Wells teams.0 1. the Wells P team will take steps to ensure seal integrity. e. removed. no leaking of the master valves. The surface facilities downstream of the master valves shall be fully de pressured with all process connections.g. WORKING ALONE PRACTICE 1. This is required to give the appropriate time to plan for the required resources. PROCEDURE: 1) ere will be a minimum of 36 hr notice (longer Th if required by either Operations or the Wells teams) between the time the program for the well work is received in the field and the well work operation begins. chemical lines.g. and properly co-ordinate activities between Wells and Operations teams in the field. 6) teps 2 and 3 will be documented as part of S BP Canada’s “Permit to Work” Golden Rule Practice. e. APPLICATION: Working Alone All BP Canada operated wells. 5) e well bore will be locked and tagged by Th the Operator until such time as it is ready to turn over to the Wells team as per BP Canada’s “Energy Isolation” Golden Rule Practice. 4) perations will take responsibility for the turn O over of the well bore to the Wells team. “readily available” may mean “immediately available”. location and hazards. they cannot expect a visit from another worker for some time and when assistance is not readily available in the event of an injury. contracted employees and contractors working or traveling alone on Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) business.3 ffective Means of Communication – Radio. 2. If the hazards the worker faces poses a high risk of injury. Definitions 2.1 orking Alone – To “work alone” means to work W or travel alone at a site in circumstances when they cannot be seen or heard by another worker. type of work. teleE phone or other electronic communication device.0 2. premises and work sites. 335 Working Alone requirements for employees. 1. illness or emergency.2 This practice applies to all CGPU employees.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. for example. The availability of assistance increases as the level of risk associated with the work increases.2 eadily Available – Three assessment factors must be R considered when determining if assistance is readily available: • wareness – Will other workers capable of proA viding assistance be aware of the worker’s needs? • illingness – Is it reasonable to expect those W other workers will provide helpful assistance? • imeliness – Will assistance be provided within a T reasonable period of time? This assessment must consider the level of risk associated with the circumstances of the work. . 2. contracted employees and contractors performing potentially hazardous work alone or traveling alone. the physical location of the work and workers and the type and level of risk of the work being performed Scope of Responsibility 2.0 336 . being continuously monitored by a remote surveillance camera. scheduling check-ins with other workers or designated persons. injury or emergency. There should be a reasonable expectation that the persons being relied on to provide assistance can and actually will provide that assistance. making frequent contact with other workers or persons throughout the work period • illingness – Persons expected to provide W assistance must be capable and willing to do so when required. A worker is not working alone if all the following conditions are met: • wareness – The worker can get the attention of A someone capable of providing helpful assistance when the worker requires it. staying within hearing range of others.4 Working Alone E ffective Contact System – An alternative to an “effective means of communication” that is appropriate to the hazard. for example. Examples of a contact system include visiting the worker. reporting to an office or particular person upon completion of a task. Depending on circumstances. those persons may need access to communication devices to trigger emergency response plans or telephone to call Emergency Services (9-1-1) • imeliness – The required assistance will be T provided in a reasonable period of time.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. sounding an alarm. What is reasonable depends on factors such as the nature of the illness. 2. The frequency of the contact is based on a hazard assessment. and visual or audible contact with other persons who can offer assistance when needed. by maintaining visual contact.5 3. Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. and • roviding the required training to allow workers P to perform work safely A ll workers and contractors are responsible for following the working alone procedures developed for a specific area.1 • onducting a hazard assessment to identify existC ing or potential safety hazards in the work place associated with working alone • eveloping and implementing a written proD cedure for checking the well-being of a worker assigned to work alone • mplementing safety measures to reduce the risk I to workers from the identified hazards • nsuring workers have an effective means of E communicating with their immediate supervisor or other designated person in case of an emergency • nsuring workers have an effective contact E system for checking the well-being of a worker in the event the worker may not be able to signal for assistance in the event of an injury or illness while working alone.3 4.0 337 Working Alone E ach functional area manager (Operating Centre Manager.2 3. Requirements for Working Alone while Performing Potentially Hazardous Work 3. 3. Wells Manager or HSSE Manager) is accountable for: . Wells Supervisor) is responsible for: • eveloping and implementing the site specific D working alone requirements. Construction Foreman. and • nsuring workers are trained and educated so E they can perform their work safely Th e functional team lead (Area Foreman. The frequency of contact for checking the worker’s well-being must be based on a hazard assessment and developed in consultation with the worker assigned to work alone o etermine the type of contact required D – visual or verbal (e. working in hazardous atmosphere where a safety stand-by is required (e. The key point is that the communication system must permit the worker requiring assistance to send a message or signal to someone capable of providing assistance to them • s an alternative to an “effective means of comA munication”. confined space entry.1 Working Alone H igh risk activities such as working at heights. portable two-way radios.g. an effective “contact system” that is appropriate to the hazard can be developed. energy isolation.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. personal alarms and computer-based systems that achieve the same results. including provisions for emergency rescue. P rior to commencing work. call-in) o Identify a designated person to establish 4. The “effective means of communication” is not limited to verbal communication. satellite telephones. The contact system will: o efine the time interval between scheduled D checks and procedures to follow in case the worker cannot be contacted.3 338 .g. Common devices that meet the intent include: telephones. a work site hazard assessment to identify existing hazards for employees working alone is required. 4. H2S).2 4. I mplement and develop a working alone safe work procedure that contains: • n “effective means of communication” to A provide workers with a method of signaling their need for assistance. cellular telephones. or working with hazardous equipment such as chainsaws must never be conducted alone. and .4 A worker required to work alone and any person assigned to check on the well-being of a worker must be trained in the written site-specific working alone procedure.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. C 4. and o Visual or audible contact with other persons who can offer assistance when required 4. o nsure a worker checks-in at the end of the E work shift • Examples of contact systems include: o Visiting the work at pre-determined intervals o Scheduling check-ins with other workers or designated persons o Reporting to an office or particular person upon completion of a task.1 339 Working Alone contact with the worker at pre-determined intervals and the results of this contact recorded by that person.5 5. The procedure and system must be reviewed more frequently if there is a change in work arrangements which could adversely affect a worker’s well-being or a report that the system is not working effectively.0 5. Th e procedure and system for checking a worker’s well-being must be reviewed at least annually. Requirements for Traveling Alone People traveling alone require a traveling alone plan that contains the following: • estination and schedule for arriving at the D destination • Mode of transportation to destination • ontact person for communicating travel plans. 340 . vehicle fit for purpose and adequate emergencies supplies for the trip.2 A ll aspects of the journey will comply with gHSSEr MS860 – Vehicle Standard including training. and o Procedures and response plan in case the person traveling does not check-in at predetermined times or cannot be contacted 5. and Working Alone • stablish scheduled check-in times with contact E to indicate: o When starting the journey o Arrival at pre-determined check points if deemed necessary o Arrival at destination o Changes to travel plans.Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. 1 • Online Controlled Copy Revised and Books Printed After October 1. 341 • Moved Jewerly section under PPE. 2007 • Minor . • Replaced Working at Heights Practice to include the boom lift section.New Version Number 1. Revisions .Date gHSSEr Forum Revision Type/Comment Revised By: Revision Authority: Details: Dec 10. • Added the Eye Hazard Assessment Chart under PPE. 2007 Joanne Dezall Standard Safety Practices Manual Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe. • Updates to Ground Disturbance and Practice for Working in a Combustible Gas environment. Added to table of contents.